LEED v4.1 Residential BD C Multifamily Homes Guide

LEED v4.
1
RESIDENTIAL BD+C
MULTIFAMILY HOMES
Getting started guide for beta participants
April 2020
CONTENT
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
WELCOME TO LEED V4.1 ................................................................................................................................................................ 5
LEED V4.1 RESIDENTIAL: MULTIFAMILY SCORECARD .....................................................................................................9
WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW ....................................................................................................................................................... 11

LEED v4.1 Residential Certification ......................................................................................................................................... 11
LEED v4 Multifamily Credit Substitution ............................................................................................................................. 12
LEED v4 BD+C Credit Substitution........................................................................................................................................ 13
Campus Guidance ......................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Recertification ................................................................................................................................................................................. 15
IP CREDIT: INTEGRATIVE PROCESS ........................................................................................................................................ 17

MF ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
LT CREDIT: LEED FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT LOCATION .................................................................. 22

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 22
LT CREDIT: SENSITIVE LAND PROTECTION ....................................................................................................................... 24

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 24
LT CREDIT: HIGH-PRIORITY SITE.............................................................................................................................................. 27

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 27
LT CREDIT: SURROUNDING DENSITY AND DIVERSE USES......................................................................................... 29

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 29
LT CREDIT: ACCESS TO QUALITY TRANSIT ....................................................................................................................... 32

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 32
LT CREDIT: BICYCLE FACILITIES .............................................................................................................................................. 35

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 35
LT CREDIT: REDUCED PARKING FOOTPRINT .................................................................................................................... 38

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 38
LT CREDIT: ELECTRIC VEHICLES .............................................................................................................................................. 41

MF ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 41
SS PREREQUISITE: CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY POLLUTION PREVENTION ........................................................ 44

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 44
SS CREDIT: SITE ASSESSMENT ................................................................................................................................................. 46

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 46
SS CREDIT: PROTECT OR RESTORE HABITAT .................................................................................................................. 49
MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 49
SS CREDIT: OPEN SPACE ............................................................................................................................................................. 53

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 53
SS CREDIT: RAINWATER MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................................................. 55

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 55
SS CREDIT: HEAT ISLAND REDUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 59

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 59
SS CREDIT: LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION ...................................................................................................................... 62

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 62
WE PREREQUISITE: WATER USE REDUCTION .................................................................................................................. 66

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 66
WE PREREQUISITE: BUILDING-LEVEL WATER METERING ......................................................................................... 69

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 69
WE CREDIT: WATER USE REDUCTION.................................................................................................................................. 70

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 70
WE CREDIT: WATER METERING ............................................................................................................................................... 75

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 75
EA PREREQUISITE: FUNDAMENTAL SYSTEMS TESTING AND VERIFICATION .................................................. 77

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 77
EA PREREQUISITE: MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE............................................................................................... 87

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 87
EA PREREQUISITE: ENERGY METERING ............................................................................................................................. 108

MF ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 108
EA PREREQUISITE: FUNDAMENTAL REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT .................................................................... 110

MF ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 110
EA CREDIT: ENHANCED COMMISSIONING .......................................................................................................................... 112

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 112
EA CREDIT: OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE .............................................................................................................119

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................119
EA CREDIT: WHOLE BUILDING ENERGY MONITORING AND REPORTING ......................................................... 127

MF ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 127
3 U.S. Green Building Council

EA CREDIT: GRID HARMONIZATION .................................................................................................................................... 130
MF ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 130
EA CREDIT: RENEWABLE ENERGY ....................................................................................................................................... 134

MF ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 134
EA CREDIT: ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT .............................................................................................142

MF .......................................................................................................................................................................................................142
EA CREDIT: DOMESTIC HOT WATER PIPE INSULATION ............................................................................................ 145

MF ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 145
MR PREREQUISITE: STORAGE AND COLLECTION OF RECYCLABLES .................................................................147

MF .......................................................................................................................................................................................................147
MR PREREQUISITE: CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLANNING ................ 148

MF ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 148
MR CREDIT: BUILDING LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION ........................................................................................... 151

MF ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 151
MR CREDIT: ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS ...................................................................................158

MF .......................................................................................................................................................................................................158
MR CREDIT: CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT ........................................................ 180

MF ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 180
EQ PREREQUISITE: MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE ................................................................185

MF .......................................................................................................................................................................................................185
EQ PREREQUISITE: COMBUSTION VENTING .....................................................................................................................188

MF .......................................................................................................................................................................................................188
EQ PREREQUISITE: GARAGE POLLUTANT PROTECTION .......................................................................................... 190

MF ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 190
EQ PREREQUISITE: RADON-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION.........................................................................................192

MF .......................................................................................................................................................................................................192
EQ PREREQUISITE: INTERIOR MOISTURE MANAGEMENT ..........................................................................................195

MF .......................................................................................................................................................................................................195
EQ PREREQUISITE: ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE CONTROL ................................................................. 198

MF ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 198
EQ PREREQUISITE: COMPARTMENTALIZATION ........................................................................................................... 200

MF ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 200

EQ CREDIT: ENHANCED COMPARTMENTALIZATION................................................................................................. 203
MF ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 203
EQ CREDIT: NO ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE .............................................................................................. 205

MF ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 205
EQ CREDIT: ENHANCED INDOOR AIR QUALITY STRATEGIES ............................................................................... 207

MF ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 207
EQ CREDIT: LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS........................................................................................................................... 210

MF ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 210
EQ CREDIT: INDOOR AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT ......................................................................................................... 215

MF ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 215
EQ CREDIT: THERMAL COMFORT...........................................................................................................................................219

MF .......................................................................................................................................................................................................219
EQ CREDIT: DAYLIGHT AND QUALITY VIEWS ................................................................................................................ 223

MF ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 223
EQ CREDIT: ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................................................ 227

MF ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 227
IN CREDIT: INNOVATION............................................................................................................................................................. 231

MF ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 231
IN CREDIT: LEED ACCREDITED PROFESSIONAL............................................................................................................ 233

MF ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 233
RP CREDIT: REGIONAL PRIORITY ......................................................................................................................................... 234

MF ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 234
APPENDICES .................................................................................................................................................................................... 235

Appendix I. Summary of changes - Changes from LEED v4 BD+C ...................................................................... 235
Appendix II. Summary of changes - Changes from LEED v4 Multifamily Midrise (Homes Design and
Construction) .............................................................................................................................................................................. 244
Appendix IV. Multifamily Core and Shell .......................................................................................................................... 252
SS CREDIT: TENANT DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES ........................................................................256

CS ......................................................................................................................................................................................................256
Welcome to LEED v4.1

Welcome to the next evolution of LEED for residential buildings! Whether you are a seasoned LEED
practitioner, or new to LEED, we encourage you to test out this bigger, stronger, bolder rating system
for your buildings and to be a leader in shaping the future of building performance.

There are four key goals that have guided our technical development process for the LEED v4.1
Residential Multifamily rating system:
 ensure leadership
 increase achievability
 measure performance
 expand the market
This version of LEED is the result of countless hours of effort from our volunteers and staff and we are
confident that the rating system meets those goals.
USGBC informed development work by conducting a comprehensive review of residential rating

systems, comparing them against local rating systems in key markets across the globe and identifying
barriers and opportunities to advancing market transformation through LEED. Staff specifically
compared global typologies of residential buildings, regional environmental mitigation challenges,
market drivers of green housing, and income-based housing classification (affordable housing).
Based on this assessment, LEED v4.1 Residential Multifamily intends: to streamline and integrate the
LEED rating systems that focus on residential projects; balance local needs and market realities with
globally recognized best practices; and provide variability in credit requirements to address differences
in residential building occupancy, construction methods and level of fit out of the project space. Where
feasible, residential credit requirements are aligned with changes to the v4.1 BD+C rating system.
Regions and markets move at different paces, and we want to be sure we can meet the needs of
everyone in the green building community. LEED v4.1 represents a series of upgrades that will improve
our standards, encourage leadership, and make our platform more user friendly, more accessible—and
most importantly—more collaborative than ever before.
LEED is the world’s rating system for the design, construction and operation of high-performance green
buildings. For the last 18 years, various versions of LEED have pushed the global green building market
forward progressively, with more than 93,000 registered and certified projects and a total of 19.3 billion
square feet of space used worldwide.
LEED v4.1 will be our most inclusive and transparent platform to date. That’s because our most
important requirement for adoption will come from our most valuable resource of all—YOU!
Highlights of LEED v4.1 Residential Multifamily
LEED v4.1 Residential BD+C Multifamily Homes and Multifamily Homes Core and Shell are now available
for registration in LEED Online for all countries except the United States and Canada.
Projects in the United States and Canada can continue to use the LEED v4 rating systems available to
residential projects and substitute credits from the LEED v4.1 Residential rating systems to benefit from
the rating system’s new features.
Integrative • The credit has a more balanced approach for project teams to understand, improve,
Process and document both the process and outcomes of integrated design through a new
documentation approach of a project team letter.
• A new option focused on installation contractor training, taken from Midrise v4,
rewards project teams that set up the trades for success in addressing unique
requirements demanded by a green building.

Location and • Reduced Parking Footprint recognizes variations in consumer behavior; preferred
Transportation parking requirements are removed and three new credit options are added that
reward projects for no off-street parking, providing carshare parking, or unbundling
parking.
• Green Vehicles is renamed Electric Vehicles; the credit now refers to electric
vehicles only and offers a new option rewarding the installation of electric vehicle
infrastructure.
• Bicycle Facilities requirements are more representative of common site conditions.
Sustainable Sites • Protect or Restore Habitat is more achievable for projects with a reduced
restoration threshold, new soil and vegetation guidance, and lowered financial
requirements.
• Rainwater Management requirements are more applicable and achievable; the credit
features a reduced minimum percentile storm event and more guidance for zero-lot-
line projects.
• Site Assessment is more relevant to international project teams; the US specific TR-
55 standard is no longer required.
Water Efficiency • Indoor Water Use Reduction and Outdoor Water Use Reduction were combined to
reward the Total Water Use Reduction of a project.
New compliance pathways were developed for projects that seek to be rewarded
for specific water efficiency improvements in indoor and/or outdoor water use
reduction.
Energy and • The referenced standard for energy performance is updated to ASHRAE 90.1-2016;
Atmosphere projects are now required to demonstrate performance against two metrics: cost
and greenhouse gas emissions.
• Optimize Energy Performance includes a new prescriptive option, as well as
dwelling unit energy simulation.
• Commissioning and Fundamental Systems Testing and Verification requirements
were updated to be applicable to all multifamily project types, including small
projects with no central systems to mixed-use buildings with sophisticated central
HVAC systems
• Renewable Energy Production and Green Power and Carbon Offsets are combined
into a new credit, Renewable Energy, to better address diverse methods of
renewables procurement and evolving global renewables markets.
• Demand Response is updated to Grid Harmonization to recognize the role of
buildings in supporting grid-scale de-carbonization; the new credit option rewards
technologies and strategies for building load flexibility and management.
Materials and • To encourage greater uptake of all Materials and Resources credits, additional credit
Resources pathways and updated credit achievement thresholds are introduced for several
credits, including Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction and Building Product
Disclosure and Optimization (BPDO) credits. BPDO credits were combined into a
single credit called Environmentally Preferable Products.
• The credit category fine-tunes requirements with revised credit achievement
thresholds to acknowledge variations for different project types and scopes of work.
These updates include revised thresholds for number of products, cost and
manufacturers in BPDO credits for smaller and/or less material intensive projects
and project types such as Warehouses and Core and Shell to make credits more
achievable.
• The Construction and Demolition Waste credit is revised for challenging project
sites and features updated total waste reduction thresholds.

• Greater emphasis and weighting is given to embodied carbon reductions through
building reuse, salvage, whole building LCA, and EPDs.
Indoor • The calculation methodology in the Low-Emitting Materials credit is restructured to

Environmental be more straightforward and organized around product categories. The compliance
Quality thresholds have also been adjusted.
• The air quality testing option for Indoor Air Quality Assessment has been revised
with two testing pathways and a small list of required contaminants.
• Residential-specific requirements are more clearly called out, specifically those from
LEED v4 Multifamily Midrise, including Radon-Resistant construction, Combustion
venting, Compartmentalization, and Garage Pollutant Protection.
• Requirements for Acoustic Performance and Thermal Comfort have been simplified
to allow for greater adaption.

LEED v4.1 Residential: Multifamily Scorecard
INTEGRATIVE PROCESS 1
Credit Integrative Process 1
LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION 15
Credit LEED for Neighborhood Development Location 15
Credit Sensitive Land Protection 2
Credit High-Priority Site 1
Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses 5
Credit Access to Quality Transit 3
Credit Bicycle Facilities 1
Credit Reduced Parking Footprint 1
Credit Electric Vehicles 2
SUSTAINABLE SITES 10
Prerequisite Construction Activity Pollution Prevention P
Credit Site Assessment 1
Credit Protect or Restore Habitat 1
Credit Open Space 1
Credit Rainwater Management 3
Credit Heat Island Reduction 2
Credit Light Pollution Reduction 1
WATER EFFICIENCY 12
Prerequisite Water Use Reduction P
Prerequisite Building-Level Water Metering P
Credit Water Use Reduction 10
Credit Water Metering 2
ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE 34
Prerequisite Fundamental Systems Testing and Verification P
Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance P
Prerequisite Energy Metering P
Prerequisite Fundamental Refrigerant Management P
Credit Enhanced Commissioning 6
Credit Optimize Energy Performance 18
Credit Whole Building Energy Monitoring and Reporting 1
Credit Grid Harmonization 2
Credit Renewable Energy 5
Credit Enhanced Refrigerant Management 1
Credit Efficient Hot Water Distribution Systems 1
MATERIALS AND RESOURCES 13
Prerequisite Storage and Collection of Recyclables P
Prerequisite Construction and Demolition Waste Management Planning P
Credit Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction 5
Credit Environmentally Preferable Products 6
Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Management 2

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY 16
Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance P
Prerequisite Combustion Venting P
Prerequisite Garage Pollutant Protection P
Prerequisite Radon-Resistant Construction P
Prerequisite Interior Moisture Management P
Prerequisite Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control P
Prerequisite Compartmentalization P
Credit Enhanced Compartmentalization 1
Credit No Environmental Tobacco Smoke 1
Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies 4
Credit Low-Emitting Materials 4
Credit Indoor Air Quality Assessment 2
Credit Thermal Comfort 1
Credit Daylight and Quality Views 1
Credit Acoustic Performance 2
INNOVATION 6
Credit Innovation 5
Credit LEED Accredited Professional 1
REGIONAL PRIORITY 4
Credit Regional Priority 4
110
TOTAL POSSIBLE
POINTS POINTS

WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW
This version of LEED v4.1 for multifamily projects allows the market to work with the rating system and
provide feedback based on real-world application.
This beta rating system is not final; feedback from the beta will inform the public comment draft(s). We
will update this document as needed and as more program features become available. In the future,
USGBC will present LEED v4.1 for public comment, followed by a member ballot.
LEED v4.1 Residential Multifamily is built on requirements from both the LEED v4 Homes mid-rise
multifamily rating system and the LEED v4 for building design and construction rating system. This
document is a comprehensive guide to the LEED v4.1 Residential Multifamily rating system
requirements. The guide contains guidance sections that are new or modified from LEED v4; they are
complimentary to the LEED v4 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction and LEED v4
Reference Guide for Homes Design and Construction. For the omitted sections, refer to the main
reference guides.
LEED v4.1 Residential Certification

Projects should first confirm that they meet the three current LEED Minimum Program Requirements
and will use LEED Online for registration.
 Registration
o Your first step is to confirm eligibility and select the appropriate rating system. The v4.1
Residential beta includes two rating system adaptations:
 Multifamily. This rating system is applicable to any predominantly multifamily
building with 2 or more units.
 Multifamily Core and Shell. This rating system is applicable to multifamily new
construction or major renovation (for the exterior shell) projects that do not
include installation of any space conditioning systems and electrical appliances
(including lights and ceiling fans) in dwelling units but include all interior
finishes in the developer’s scope.
Contact us if you are not clear which rating system or adaptation you should use.
o Next, register your project in LEED Online at leedonline.com.
o For registration fees, view our detailed fees table at usgbc.org.
 Certification
o Engage a LEED Green Rater to perform on-site verification services for your project.
Projects in regions without Green Rater availability shall contact GBCI for further
assistance
o Submit the necessary information, calculations, and documentation to your Green Rater.
Your LEED application will then be submitted to GBCI for review and certification.
o Refer to the Guide to Certification: Residential for more details on the certification
process
110 total points are available. A minimum of 40 points are required for certification. LEED has four levels
of certification, depending on the point thresholds achieved:
 Certified: 40-49 points

 Silver: 50-59
 Gold: 60-79
 Platinum: 80+

LEED v4 Multifamily Credit Substitution
Multifamily projects pursuing LEED v4 Homes or Multifamily Midrise can substitute any of the following
v4 credits for v4.1 Residential Multifamily credits
Unless otherwise noted, each point earned in LEED v4.1 Residential Multifamily earns the same number
of points in LEED v4 Homes or Multifamily Midrise.
v4 Credit v4.1 Credit Implementation and Documentation

Guidance
LEED for LEED for -

Neighborhood Neighborhood
Development Development
Location Location
Site Selection – SS Open Space -

Option 3 Open Space
Site Selection – Bicycle Facilities -

Option 5 Bicycle
Network and Storage
Compact Surrounding Density Meet 2 point threshold in Case 1.

Development and Diverse Uses – Surrounding Density to earn 1 point in
Option 1 Surrounding LEED v4 Multifamily Midrise; meet 3
Density point threshold in v4.1 to earn 2
points in LEED v4 Multifamily Midrise
Community Resources Surrounding Density -

and Diverse Uses –
Option 2 Diverse Uses
Access to Transit Access to Quality 1 point in v4.1 Multifamily earns 1 point

Transit in Homes v4; 2 points in v4.1
Multifamily earns 1.5 points in Homes
v4; 3 point in v4.1 earns 2 points in v4
Construction Activity Construction Activity -

Pollution Protection Pollution Protection
Heat Island Reduction Heat Island Reduction -
Rainwater Rainwater -
Management Management
Water Metering Water Metering -
Minimum Energy Fundamental Systems Project teams must meet

Performance Testing and requirements of both Fundamental
Verification Systems Testing and Verification and
Minimum Energy Performance
Minimum Energy prerequisites from v4.1
Performance

Energy Metering Energy Metering -
Durability Interior Moisture -

Construction Waste Construction and Projects may earn up to 2 points

Management Demolition Waste using v4.1
Management
Ventilation Minimum Indoor Air -

Quality Performance
Combustion Venting Combustion Venting -
Garage Pollutant Garage Pollutant -

Protection Protection
Radon-Resistant Radon-Resistant -
Construction Construction
Environmental Environmental -
Tobacco Smoke Tobacco Smoke
Control
Compartmentalization Compartmentalization -
Enhanced Enhanced 1 point may be earned using v4.1

Compartmentalization Compartmentalization
Low-Emitting Low-Emitting Up to 3 points may be earned using

Materials Materials v4.1
No Environmental No Environmental Multifamily Midrise only

Tobacco Smoke Tobacco Smoke
LEED v4 BD+C Credit Substitution

Multifamily projects pursuing LEED v4 BD+C can substitute any of the following v4 credits for v4.1
Residential Multifamily credits. Multifamily projects pursuing v4 BD+C may also use credit substitutions
from v4.1 BD+C.
Unless otherwise noted, each point earned in LEED v4.1 Residential Multifamily earns the same number
of points in LEED v4 BD+C.
v4 Credit v4.1 Credit Implementation and Documentation

Guidance
Integrative Process Integrative Process -
Surrounding Density & Surrounding Density & -

Diverse Uses Diverse Uses
Bicycle Facilities Bicycle Facilities -

Reduced Parking Reduced Parking -
Footprint Footprint
Construction Activity Construction Activity -

Pollution Prevention Pollution Prevention
Site Assessment Site Assessment -
Site Development – Protect or Restore -

Protect or Restore Habitat
Habitat
Open Space Open Space -
Rainwater Rainwater -
Heat Island Reduction Heat Island Reduction -
Light Pollution Light Pollution -

Reduction Reduction
Building-Level Water Building-Level Water -

Metering Metering
Fundamental Fundamental Systems -

Commissioning and Testing and
Verification Verification
Minimum Energy Minimum Energy -

Performance Performance
Building-Level Energy Energy Metering -

Metering
Fundamental Fundamental -
Refrigerant Refrigerant
Enhanced Enhanced -
Commissioning Commissioning
Optimize Energy Optimize Energy Project teams must also achieve the LEED
Performance Performance v4.1 Minimum Energy Performance
prerequisite.
Advanced Energy Whole Building Project teams must also achieve the LEED
Metering Energy Metering and v4.1 Energy Metering prerequisite.
Reporting
Demand Response Grid Harmonization -

Enhanced Refrigerant Enhanced Refrigerant -
Renewable Energy Renewable Energy Project teams may allocate points in one or
Production both LEED v4 credits, up to a maximum of
five points. Project teams cannot double
Green Power and Renewable Energy count points between the two LEED v4
Carbon Offsets credits.
Storage and Storage and -

Collection of Collection of
Recyclables Recyclables
Construction and Construction and -

Demolition Waste Demolition Waste
Management Planning Management Planning
Building Life-Cycle Building Life-Cycle -

Impact Reduction Impact Reduction
Construction and Construction and -

Demolition Waste Demolition Waste
Environmental Compartmentalization -
Tobacco Smoke
Control
Indoor Air Quality Indoor Air Quality -

Assessment Assessment
Thermal Comfort Thermal Comfort -
Process for attempting credit substitutions:
1. Review the table of eligible credit substitutions and make a note of any credits you would like to
use on your LEED v4 Homes, Multifamily Midrise or BD+C residential project.
2. In the project scorecard, column L (Notes), make a note that the project is using an approved
v4.1 credit substitution for each eligible credit being attempted.
3. Provide any additional required documentation for the v4.1 credits, as outlined in the LEED v4.1
Residential Multifamily Guide.
4. Submit for review as usual.
Campus Guidance
Refer to the LEED v4 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction to determine the eligibility
of LEED v4.1 Residential prerequisites and credits for campus credits or group project certification,
unless new or revised guidance is available within the Further Explanation, Campus section of each
credit in this document.
Recertification
Refer to the new guidance section, Connection to Ongoing Performance, to understand how each
Residential credit sets you up for success in performance tracking and recertification.

All certified projects are strongly encouraged to pursue recertification using the recertification guidance
available on www.usgbc.org.

IP Credit: Integrative Process
This credit applies to
 Residential: Multifamily (1 point)
Intent
To support high-performance, cost-effective project outcomes through an early analysis of the
interrelationships among systems and installation contractor training.
Requirements
MF
Option 1. Installation Contractor Training (1 point)
Before construction but after installation contractors have been hired for the project, conduct at least
eight hours of training (extending a full day or over several days) on the green aspects of the project
and how the installation contractors can contribute to achieving each LEED prerequisite and attempted
credit. Focus on areas where installation contractors have traditionally struggled to meet green building
standards. Include at least the following trades in the training:
 plumbing;
 mechanical systems;
 insulation;
 framing; and
 air sealing.
Each installation contractor may be present only for the relevant segment, but the builder’s site
supervisor must be present throughout so that he or she understands the quality control duties on LEED
and green building best practices.
OR
Option 2. Integrative Process (1 point)
Discovery:
Beginning in pre-design and continuing throughout the design phases, identify and use opportunities to
achieve synergies across disciplines and building systems. Use the analyses described below to inform
the design, and construction documents.
Energy-Related Systems
Perform a preliminary “simple box” energy modeling analysis before the completion of
schematic design that explores how to reduce energy loads in the building and accomplish
related sustainability goals by questioning default assumptions. Assess strategies associated
with each of the following, as applicable:

 Site conditions. Assess shading, exterior lighting, hardscape, landscaping, and
adjacent site conditions.
 Massing and orientation. Assess massing and orientation affect HVAC sizing, energy
consumption, lighting, and renewable energy opportunities.
 Basic envelope attributes. Assess insulation values, window-to-wall ratios, glazing
characteristics, shading, and window operability.
AND
Water-Related Systems
Perform a preliminary water budget analysis before the completion of schematic design that
explores how to reduce potable water loads in the building, reduce the burden on municipal
supply or wastewater treatment systems, and accomplish related sustainability goals. Assess
and estimate the project’s potential nonpotable water supply sources and water demand
volumes, including the following:
 Indoor water demand. Assess flow and flush fixture design case demand volumes,
calculated in accordance with WE Prerequisite and Credit Water Use Reduction.
 Outdoor water demand. Assess landscape irrigation design case demand volume
calculated in accordance with WE Prerequisite and Credit Water Use Reduction.
 Supply sources. Assess all potential nonpotable water supply source volumes, such
as on-site rainwater and graywater, municipally supplied nonpotable water, and
HVAC equipment condensate. Analyze how nonpotable water supply sources can
contribute to the water demand components listed above
Implementation:
Develop a Project Team Letter. Provide a dated letter on the letterhead of the Integrative
Process Facilitator that summarizes the team’s integrative process approach and describes the
difference that this integrative approach made in terms of improving project team interaction
and project performance.
 Describe the approach developed by the project team for engaging a clearly defined
and manageable integrative design process beginning in pre-design and continuing
throughout the design phases.
 The letter must include a separate summary for each issue area analyzed by the project
team, describing how the analysis informed the design and building form decisions in
the project’s OPR and BOD and the eventual design of the project. Describe the most
important goals for each issue area and provide clear guidance on how to evaluate the
project’s impact on the selected goals.
The creation of this letter should be a team effort facilitated by the Integrative Process
Facilitator. The letter must be signed by all principal project team members and made available
to key stakeholders including, but not limited to the owner(s), facility manager(s), tenant(s), and
community members. Describe how the letter was distributed to these stakeholders and/or
made publicly available.
Guidance
Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C and Homes Design and Construction reference guides, with the following
additions and modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update

This credit includes the integrative process requirements from LEED v4 BD+C, in order to align across
rating systems, as well as an option for trades training from Multifamily Midrise to capture the value of
green building education and training for installation contractors.
Option 1. Installation Contractor Training

Refer to the guidance for Option 3. Trades training of the Integrative Process credit in the LEED v4
Homes Design and Construction reference guide. All references to trades have been updated to the
term “installation contractors.”
Option 2. Integrative Process

Refer to the LEED v4 reference guides for an introduction to the integrative process and its benefits.
More than ever, the Integrative Process credit documents the nature of the process, the understanding
of system relationships, and the resultant decision making by all project team members through a
project team letter. Project teams are better able to demonstrate the delta, the difference between the
standard approach and the integrative approach for key issue areas like energy and water, as well as
broader concepts at the frontier of the green building movement like social equity and public health.
Step-by-Step Guidance
Follow steps 1-7 in the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide, with the following modifications:
 All references to the Integrative Process Worksheet are replaced by the Project Team Letter.
 Assess strategies associated with each of the seven energy aspects, as applicable, and at least
one on-site non-potable water source that could supply a portion of at least two water demand
components.
 Step 1: Add the following paragraph at the end:
Consider reviewing ASHRAE Standard 209-2018, which provides a standardized methodology
for applying energy modeling throughout the integrative design process to inform building
design.
ASHRAE 209, Section 5.3 (Climate and Site Analysis) and Section 5.4 (Benchmarking) provide
helpful guidance for conducting this preliminary research.
ASHRAE Standard 209-2018 Section 5.5 (Energy Charrette) provides a good framework for
incorporating energy considerations into the design charrette.
 Step 5:
o Replace last sentence beginning with “Conduct” with “Conduct such preliminary
modeling to assess at least one strategy for each of the above seven aspects, as
applicable”.
o Add the following paragraph at the end:
ASHRAE Standard 209-2018 Sections 6.1 (Simple Box Modeling), 6.2 (Conceptual
Design Modeling), and Modeling Cycle 3 (Load Reduction Modeling) may be used to
demonstrate compliance with the Integrative Process credit requirements to develop a
Simple Box Energy Model. The data reporting information described in Standard 209,
Section 5.7 may also be used to generate a consistent reporting methodology during
the energy analysis process.
 Step 7: Replace” “…identify at least two options for each of the seven aspects listed in Step 5”
with “…identify one or more options for each of the seven aspects listed in Step 5, as
applicable.”
Further Explanation
Refer to the LEED v4 reference guides for their respective option, with the following additions and
modification:

Required Documentation
Documentation Option 1 Option 2
List trainer, trades training participants’ names and

companies, trades (as listed in requirements), training X
date(s), and duration.
Project Team Letter X
Integrative Process worksheet (energy and water analysis X

tabs)
Exemplary Performance
Project teams may choose an additional lens through which to demonstrate the outcomes and benefits
of an integrative process for an Exemplary Performance point. Optional issue areas to carry out analysis
relevant to the project include: site selection, social equity, health & well-being, or another topic not yet
addressed.
Site Selection
Before site selection, analyze project goals to identify and select the building site or base
building that will provide the most opportunities and fewest barriers for project. Assess at least
two potential locations or base building options, taking into consideration at least the following:
• Building site attributes. Assess the building’s location and site design characteristics.
• Transportation. Assess the tenant occupants’ transportation needs for commuting to

and from the site, including convenient access to alternative transportation that meets
occupants’ needs.
• Occupant and community well-being. Assess the building’s ability to provide daylight
and views, indoor air quality, and other indoor environmental quality characteristics.
Identify community assets and the proximity of vulnerable populations surrounding the
project. Assess the project’s ability to provide positive social, economic, and
environmental benefits for existing community members, as well as any potential
negative impacts.
Social Equity
Beginning in pre-design and continuing throughout the design phases, review and then
complete the LEED Project Team Checklist for Social Impact in order to assess and select
strategies to address issues of inequity within the project and its community, team and supply
chain. Through research and consultation with key stakeholders, ensure that all responses
within the Checklist are ultimately documented as “Yes” or “No,” and complete all sections for
Stakeholders and Goals.
Health & Well-being
Beginning in pre-design and continuing throughout the design phases, use the following steps
to inform the design and construction documents:

• Establish health goals. Set clear and specific goals to promote the health of core groups,
including:
o Building occupants and users
o Surrounding community
o Supply chain
Develop a statement of health goals for each population, including a summary of how
this health goal relates to the highest priority health need for each population.
• Prioritize design strategies. Select specific design and/or programming strategies to

address the project’s health goals. This could be accomplished by holding a stand-alone
“health charrette” or by integrating health considerations into an existing green
charrette.
• Anticipate outcomes. Identify expected impacts on population health behaviors and

outcomes associated with the project’s prioritized design strategies.
Referenced Standards
 ASHRAE Standard 209-2018, Energy Simulation Aided Design for Buildings except Low Rise
Residential Buildings
Connection to Ongoing Performance

 LEED O+M IN credit Innovation: When selecting a qualified professional to carry out the training
for installation contractors, choose a LEED Homes Accredited Professional, if possible, so that
the team can meet the requirement for a LEED Accredited Professional in the LEED v4.1 O+M
Innovation credit. In addition, the final phase of the integrative process is the period of
occupancy, operations, and performance feedback. Project teams can demonstrate their
ongoing efforts in the LEED v4.1 O+M Integrative Process pilot credit.

LT Credit: LEED for Neighborhood
Development Location
 Residential: Multifamily (15 points)
Intent
To avoid development on inappropriate sites. To reduce vehicle distance traveled. To enhance livability
and improve human health by encouraging daily physical activity.
Requirements
MF
Locate the project within the boundary of a development certified under LEED for Neighborhood
Development (Stage 2 or Stage 3 under the Pilot or 2009 rating systems, Certified Plan or Certified Built
Project under the v4 rating system).
Projects attempting this credit are not eligible to earn points under other Location and Transportation
credits.
Guidance
There are no substantive changes to the credit requirements; refer to the LEED v4 Homes Design and
Construction reference guide, with the following additions and modifications:
Further Explanation
 LEED O+M LT credit Alternative Transportation: Locating a building on a LEED ND site impacts
vehicle miles travelled by encouraging and enhancing walkability. This credit would have a
significant positive impact on the transportation patterns of building occupants. As a result, this
credit makes the performance-based LT credit Alternative Transportation more achievable.
Documentation All
Projects
LEED ND project information (name, ID number, rating system and version, X

certification level, and certification date
Vicinity base map with LEED project boundary and LEED ND certified
X
neighborhood or plan boundary

 LEED for O+M v4.1 LT credit Alternative Transportation: Locating a building on a LEED ND site
impacts vehicle miles travelled by encouraging and enhancing walkability. This credit would
have a significant positive impact on the transportation patterns of building occupants. As a
result, this credit makes the performance-based LT credit Alternative Transportation more
achievable.

LT Credit: Sensitive Land Protection
 Residential: Multifamily (1-2 points)
Intent
To avoid the development of environmentally sensitive lands and reduce the environmental impact from
the location of a building on a site.
Requirements
MF
Option 1. Previously Developed Land (2 points)
Locate the development footprint on land that has been previously developed.
OR
Option 2. Avoidance of Sensitive Land (1 point)
Locate the development footprint on land that does not meet the following criteria for sensitive land:
 Prime farmland. Prime farmland, unique farmland, or farmland of statewide or local importance
as defined by the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 7, Volume 6, Parts 400 to 699, Section
657.5 (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) and identified in a state Natural
Resources Conservation Service soil survey (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
 Floodplains. A flood hazard area shown on a legally adopted flood hazard map or otherwise
legally designated by the local jurisdiction or the state. For projects in places without legally
adopted flood hazard maps or legal designations, locate on a site that is entirely outside any
floodplain subject to a 1% or greater chance of flooding in any given year.
 Habitat. Land identified as habitat for the following:
o species listed as threatened or endangered under the U.S. Endangered Species Act or
the state’s endangered species act, or
o species or ecological communities classified by NatureServe as GH (possibly extinct), G1

(critically imperiled), or G2 (imperiled), or
o species listed as threatened or endangered specifies under local equivalent standards

(for projects outside the U.S.) that are not covered by NatureServe data.
 Water bodies. Areas on or within 100 feet (30 meters) of a water body, except for minor
improvements.
 Wetlands. Areas on or within 50 feet (15 meters) of a wetland, except for minor improvements.
Guidance
Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide, with the following additions and modifications:

Behind the Intent
Beta Update
This credit replaces the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction LT credit: Site Selection with the
LEED v4.1 LT credit: Sensitive Land Protection. The two credit options were given titles to clarify their
intent and remain consistent with the format of other credit options. The list of minor improvements
within wetland and water body buffers has been moved from the rating system language to the guide
because it is guidance.
 Option 1 can now be referenced as “Option 1. Previously Developed Land.”
 Option 2 can now be referenced as “Option 2. Avoidance of Sensitive Land.”
Further Explanation
Documentation Option Option
1 2
Site map(s) showing project boundary, development footprint, any

X
previous development, any sensitive areas, and any minor improvements in X
required buffers
Explanation of the previous development of the site
X
Provide soil data map to demonstrate that development is not on qualifying X
farmland.
Provide floodplain map that demonstrates project is above floodplain. X
Provide documentation that demonstrates that project is not land identified X

as habitat.
Identifying Sensitive Habitat

 Minor improvements within the wetland and water body buffers may be undertaken to enhance
appreciation of them, provided such facilities are open all building users. Only the following
improvements are considered minor:
 Bicycle and pedestrian pathways no more than 12 feet wide (3.5 meters), of which no more than
8 feet (2.5 meters) may be impervious;
 Activities to maintain or restore native natural communities and/or natural hydrology;
 One single-story structure per 300 linear feet (90 linear meters) on average, not exceeding 500
square feet (45 square meters);
 Grade changes necessary to ensure public access;
 Clearings, limited to one per 300 linear feet (90 linear meters) on average, not exceeding 500
square feet (45 square meters) each;
 Removal of the following tree types:
 Hazardous trees, up to 75% of dead trees
 Trees less than 6 inches (150 millimeters) diameter at breast height
 Up to 20% of trees more than 6 inches (150 millimeters) diameter at breast height with a
condition rating of 40% or higher.
 Trees under 40% condition rating
 The condition rating must be based on an assessment by an arborist certified by the
International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) using ISA standard measures, or local equivalent for
projects outside the U.S.

 LEED O+M SS credit Site Management: During an assessment, a project team may find features
such as vegetation, land use, or hydrology that require protection to achieve this credit. The
same assessment may be used to identify protection measures in the related credit.
 LEED O+M SS credit Rainwater Management: Sensitive land or previously undeveloped land on
the project site that is left undisturbed may be used to manage runoff and help achieve the
related credit.

LT Credit: High-Priority Site
Intent
To encourage project location in areas with development constraints and promote the health of the
surrounding area.
Requirements
MF
Option 1. Historic District (1 point)
Locate the project on an infill location in a historic district.
OR
Option 2. Priority Designation (1 point)
Locate the project on one of the following:
• a site listed by the EPA National Priorities List;
• a Federal Promise Zone;
• a Qualified Opportunity Zone;
• a Department of the Treasury Community Development Financial Institutions Fund Qualified

Low-Income Community (a subset of the New Markets Tax Credit Program);
• a site in a U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development’s Qualified Census Tract (QCT)
or Difficult Development Area (DDA); or
• a local equivalent program administered at the national level for projects outside the U.S.
OR
Option 3. Brownfield Remediation (1 point)
Locate on a brownfield where soil or groundwater contamination has been identified, and where the
local, state, or national authority (whichever has jurisdiction) requires its remediation. Perform
remediation to the satisfaction of that authority.
Guidance
Behind the Intent

Beta Update

This credit has been introduced from LEED v4.1 BD+C. The equivalent programs previously in the
criteria (Empowerment Zones, Enterprise Community sites, and Renewal Community sites) have been
superseded by Opportunity Zones and Promise Zones due to updated U.S. tax legislation. It is important
to update the outdated terminology and highlight the new programs for project teams as these zones
are some of the most disinvested communities in the country.
Follow steps in the LEED v4 reference guide, with the following modifications to Step 1:
 Federal Promise Zones and Qualified Opportunity Zones, identified by the U.S. Department of
Housing and Urban Development, offer various tax incentives to encourage businesses to open
or expand and hire local residents.
Further Explanation
Documentation Option Option Option
1 2 3
Vicinity map indicating previously developed land within ½ mile

X
(800 meters) of project boundary
Document from historic preservation entity confirming location in a
historic district X
Vicinity map or other documentation confirming priority site

X
designation
Documentation from authority having jurisdiction declaring
X
existence of specific contamination and confirming that remediation
has been or will be completed to its satisfaction
Reference existing standards, with the following modification:
 U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development, Federal Promise
Zones: https://www.hudexchange.info/programs/promise-zones/
 U.S. Department of the Treasury, Qualified Opportunity
Zones: https://www.cdfifund.gov/Pages/Opportunity-Zones.aspx

 LEED O+M LT Credit Alternative Transportation: Locating a building on any of the high-priority
site types addressed in this credit significantly increases the likelihood that the project will be in
a dense area served by transit and diverse uses, which would in turn have a significant positive
impact on the transportation patterns of building occupants. As a result, this credit makes a
performance-based LT credit more achievable. LT credit Alternative Transportation evaluates a
building’s transportation characteristics through the collection and measurement of occupant
survey data, rewarding projects based on how building occupants actually travel to and from
the project.

LT Credit: Surrounding Density and
Diverse Uses
Intent
To conserve land and protect farmland and wildlife habitat by encouraging development in areas with
existing infrastructure. To promote walkability, and transportation efficiency and reduce vehicle
distance traveled. To improve public health by encouraging daily physical activity.
Requirements
MF
Option 1. Surrounding Density (1–3 points)
Case 1. Surrounding Density
Locate on a site whose surrounding existing density within a ¼-mile (400-meter) offset of the project
boundary meets the values in Table 1. Use either the “separate residential and nonresidential densities”
or the “combined density” values.
Table 1a. Points for average density within 1/4 mile of project (IP units)
Combined Separate residential and nonresidential Points

density densities
Square feet per Residential Nonresidential Multifamily

acre of buildable density (DU/acre) density (FAR)
land
22,000 7 0.5 2
35,000 12 0.8 3
Table 1b. Points for average density within 400 meters of project (SI units)
Combined Separate residential and nonresidential Points

density densities
Square meters Residential Nonresidential Multifamily

per hectare of density density (FAR)
buildable land (DU/hectare)
5,050 17.5 0.5 2

8,035 30 0.8 3
DU = dwelling unit; FAR = floor-area ratio.
OR
Case 2. Compact Development (1 point)
Construct or renovate a building that has buildable land area density of at least 30 dwelling units/acre
of buildable land (74 dwelling units/hectare of building land)
AND/OR
Option 2. Diverse Uses (1-2 points)
Construct or renovate a project such that the building’s main entrance is within a 1/2-mile (800 meters)
walking distance from the following number of uses, as listed below.
Table 1. Points for proximity to uses
Multifamily:
Points
Uses
4–7 1
≥8 2
The following restrictions apply.
• A use counts as only one type (e.g., a retail store may be counted only once even if it sells
products in several categories).
• No more than two uses in each use type may be counted (e.g. if five restaurants are within
walking distance, only two may be counted).
• The counted uses must represent at least three of the five categories, exclusive of the building’s
primary use.
Guidance
Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C and the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction reference guides, with the
following additions and modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
This credit has been updated to integrate the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction LT credit:
Compact Development with the LEED v4.1 BD+C LT credit: Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses.
Updates also clarify that surrounding existing density is measured within a ¼-mile (400-meter) offset,
not radius, of the project boundary.

Further Explanation
1 2
Area plan or maps showing project site and location of existing residential
and non-residential buildings within ¼ mile (400 meter) offset of project X
site
Documentation of buildable land area and number of dwelling units.
X
Area plan or map showing project site, location and type of each use, and X
walking routes

 LEED O+M LT credit Alternative Transportation: Locating a building in a dense area served by
transit and diverse uses would have a significant positive impact on the transportation patterns
of building occupants. As a result, this credit makes the performance-based LT credit
Alternative Transportation more achievable.

LT Credit: Access to Quality Transit
Intent
To encourage development in locations shown to have multimodal transportation choices or otherwise
reduced motor vehicle use, thereby reducing greenhouse gas emissions, air pollution, and other
environmental and public health harms associated with motor vehicle use.
Requirements
MF
Locate any functional entry of the project within a ¼-mile (400-meter) walking distance of existing or
planned bus, streetcar, or informal transit stops, or within a ½-mile (800-meter) walking distance of
existing or planned bus rapid transit stops, passenger rail stations (i.e. light, heavy, or commuter rail) or
commuter ferry terminals. The transit service at those stops and stations in aggregate must meet the
minimum listed in Tables 1. Planned stops and stations may count if they are sited, funded, and under
construction by the date of the certificate of occupancy and are complete within 24 months of that
date.
Both weekday and weekend trip minimums must be met.
 For each qualifying transit route, only trips in one direction are counted towards the threshold.
 For weekend trips, only trips on the day with the higher number of trips are counted towards
the threshold.
 If a qualifying transit route has multiple stops within the required walking distance, only trips
from one stop are counted towards the threshold.
 Privately-run shuttles are only acceptable if the service is also made available to the public.
Table 1. Minimum daily transit service for projects with one or more transit types (bus, streetcar,
rail, or ferry)
Weekday Weekend Multifamily

trips trips Points
72 30 1
100 70 2
144 108 3

If existing transit service is temporarily rerouted outside the required distances for less than two years,
the project may meet the requirements, provided the local transit agency has committed to restoring
the routes with service at or above the prior level.
Guidance
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
Updates to this credit recognize the challenges project teams face in meeting the pervasive limitations
to weekend transit requirements. The by reducing the lowest weekend minimum thresholds are
reduced and by allowing projects teams are now allowed to only count the weekend day with the higher
number of trips rather than an average. With newly added intermediate thresholds, projects (excluding
Core and Shell) can now earn 2 and 4 points.
Follow steps in the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide, with the following modifications:
 Step 4. The number of transit vehicle trips on a weekend. If weekend counts are different, only
count the weekend day with the highest number of trips.
 Disregard any mention of the “commuter rail or ferry only” pathway. This section has been
removed from the rating system.
Further Explanation
Examples
 The example provided references commuter rail, light rail, and averaged weekend trips. These
references are no longer applicable and should be disregarded.
All
Documentation Projects
Map showing project, project boundary, transit stop locations, and walking routes X
and distances to those stops
Timetables or other service-level documentation X
If applicable, documentation of planned transit or restoration of temporarily

X
rerouted service
Definitions
Refer to the LEED v4 reference guide for additional definitions.
 Replace all references to rail transit with the umbrella term, “passenger rail”. Replace all
references to “rideshare” with the term “informal transit”.
 passenger rail a diversity of rail transit service including light, heavy, and commuter rail transit.
Passenger rail systems are characterized by wheeled vehicles running on rails or tracks. They
may provide long-distance intercity transit services as well as local daily commuter or intracity
trips. Rail transit systems may vary with respect to vehicle type, car count, operating speeds,
right-of-way characteristics, and service schedule.
 informal transit a publicly available transit service that includes a fixed route service, fare
structure, and regular operation. It does not consist of taxi, private shuttles or seasonal, on-call
or on-demand transit.

 LEED O+M LT credit Alternative Transportation: Locating a project in a dense area served by
transit and diverse uses would have a significant positive impact on the transportation patterns
of building occupants, which is a data set that project teams are required to collect in order to
measure building performance under the performance-based LT credit Alternative
Transportation.

LT Credit: Bicycle Facilities
Intent
To promote bicycling and transportation efficiency and reduce vehicle distance traveled. To improve
public health by encouraging utilitarian and recreational physical activity.
Requirements
MF
Bicycle Network
Design or locate the project such that a functional entry or bicycle storage is within a 200-yard (180-
meter) walking distance or bicycling distance from a bicycle network that connects to at least one of the
following:
 at least 10 diverse uses (see Appendix 1);
 a school or employment center, if the project total floor area is 50% or more residential; or
 a bus rapid transit stop passenger rail station, or ferry terminal.
All destinations must be within a 3-mile (4800-meter) bicycling distance of the project boundary.
Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully funded by the date of the certificate of
occupancy and are scheduled for completion within one year of that date.
Bicycle Storage
Provide short-term bicycle storage for at least 2.5% of all peak visitors but no fewer than four storage
spaces per building.
Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 15% of all regular building occupants, but no less than one
storage space per three residential units. Indoor storage is acceptable as long as it meets the walking
distance requirements. Vertical distance travelled by elevator is exempt from being counted towards
the walking distance. On-site bicycle sharing stations within the project boundary may count for 50% of
the long-term and short-term bicycle storage space.
Short-term bicycle storage must be within 200 feet (60 meters) walking distance of any main entrance.
Long-term bicycle storage must be within 300 feet (90meters) walking distance of any functional entry.
Bicycle storage capacity may not be double-counted: storage that is fully allocated to the occupants of
nonproject facilities cannot also serve project occupants. Zero lot line projects may count publicly
available bicycle parking towards their short-term storage requirements if it meets the maximum
allowable walking distance.

Guidance
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
This updated credit, introduced from LEED v4.1 BD+C, is more achievable for diverse project-types as
storage and facility requirements are more representative of common site conditions. In recognition of
their growing prevalence and impact, on-site bicycle sharing stations are now allowed to count for 50%
of long-term and short-term bicycle storage space for all projects. Required walking distances to
storage have been extended based on feedback regarding common layout conditions. To better
accommodate projects with a high occupancy count, a LEED Interpretation about showers has been
adopted that adjusts the number of showers that are realistic for large buildings.
 Take note of the exemption of vertical distance from the walking distance requirements.
 Refer to new requirements and thresholds before proceeding with storage equations, such as
the new percentage storage required per three dwelling units for residential projects.
 Step 5. For high-occupancy projects, meet the applicable shower and changing facility
requirements for the building’s space type.
 For multifamily and residential projects, the ability to store bicycles within units does not count
as long-term storage
Further Explanation
Selecting Bicycle Storage
Recommended bicycle rack designs, derived from The Association of Pedestrian and Bicycle
Professionals (APBP) Essentials of Bike Parking Guide, include:
 For all applications: Inverted U (or Stable, Loop), Post and Ring, and Wheelwell-secure.
 For high- density, space-constrained situations: Staggered Wheelwell-secure, Vertical, and Two-
Tier.
 Bicycle rack designs that are not recommended include: Wave, Schoolyard, Coathanger,
Wheelwell, Bollard, Spiral, and Swing Arm Secured.
Rating System Variations

Historic Urban Locations
If the requirements on the width of bike paths cannot be met due to the historic urban context of the
bicycle network, compensating measures to reduce street speeds and/or to enhance biking security on
routes connecting to a qualifying bike network are acceptable:
 A security lane for biking (marked dedicated bike lane, which can be shared by cars in narrow
sections of the street when no bikes are present) or a physically dedicated bike lane less than 5
feet (1.5 meters) wide
 Intersections spaced no more than 400 feet (122 meters) apart
 Travel lane widths no greater than 10 feet (3 meters) and parallel parking lane widths no greater
than 8 feet (2.4 meters)
Routes that meet the alternative requirements outlined above must be clearly identified by type within
the required documentation. Historicity of the area and/or whether the site receives legal protection are
determining factors for whether a building has a historic urban context.
All
Vicinity map showing bicycle network and route and distance along network to X
eligible destination(s)

Site plan showing bicycle storage locations X
Calculations for storage and, if applicable, shower facilities X
The Association of Pedestrian and Bicycle Professionals (APBP), Essentials of Bike Parking: Selecting
and Installing Bike Parking that Works (2015), pages 6-
8: https://www.apbp.org/resource/resmgr/Bicycle_Parking/EssentialsofBikeParking_FINA.pdf
Definitions
 long-term bicycle storage bicycle parking that is easily accessible to residents and occupants
and covered to protect bicycles from rain and snow.
 historic urban context refers to limiting conditions linked to historic urban planning that may
consequentially impact buildings and infrastructure within the associated jurisdiction. Such site
conditions may make buildings act as traffic calming structures or may effect street access and
the width of right-of-way. Historicity of the area and whether the site receives legal protection
are determining factors for whether a bicycle network has a historic urban context.

 LEED O+M LT credit Alternative Transportation: Improving bicycle facilities and access to a
bicycle network as well as implementing any corresponding bicycle programs may help improve
a project’s transportation performance score.

LT Credit: Reduced Parking Footprint
Intent
To minimize the environmental harms associated with parking facilities, including automobile
dependence, land consumption, and rainwater runoff.
Requirements
MF
Option 1. No Off-Street Parking (1 point)
Do not provide off-street parking.
OR
Option 2. Reduce Parking (1 point)
Do not exceed the minimum local code requirements for parking capacity.
Provide parking capacity that is a 30% reduction below the base ratios recommended by the Parking
Consultants Council, as shown in the Institute of Transportation Engineers’ Transportation Planning
Handbook, 4th edition, Tables 11-12.
OR
Option 3. Carshare (1 point)
Provide dedicated parking for carshare vehicles. Provide at least one vehicle parking space for every
100 occupants, rounded up. If the project has fewer than 100 occupants, provide one carshare vehicle
parking space.
Existing carshare vehicles located in nearby on- or off-street parking areas do not contribute to credit
achievement.
OR
Option 4. Unbundling Parking (1 point)
Sell parking separately from all property sales or leases.
Implement a daily parking fee at a cost equal to or greater than the daily cost of municipal public transit.
For All Projects
The credit calculations must include all existing and new off-street parking spaces that are leased or
owned by the project, including parking that is outside the project boundary but is used by the
project. On-street parking in public rights-of-way is excluded from these calculations.

Guidance
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
This credit has been updated to give project teams more flexibility. The credit includes four new
options, allowing additional strategies for diverse project types. By removing the carpool preferred
parking requirement, updates also recognize that carpooling is not an easily enforced nor a universally
adopted strategy.
 Steps in LEED v4 reference guide should be regarded within the context of Option 2. Reduce
Parking.
 Disregard any references related to carpool preferred parking.
 Disregard any references to Cases 1 and 2.
 Refer to 4th edition of the ITE standard where any instance of the outdated standard is
mentioned.
 For projects that use pooled parking, calculate compliance using the project’s share of the
pooled parking.
 Mixed-use projects should determine the percentage reduction by first aggregating the parking
amount of each use (as specified by the base ratios) and then determining the percentage
reduction from the aggregated parking amount.
 Do not count parking spaces for fleet and inventory vehicles unless these vehicles are regularly
used by employees for commuting as well as business purposes.
 Projects cannot achieve points under Option 1. No Off-street Parking if they have subsidized off-
site parking for occupants, even if no new parking has been constructed. There must be no new
or existing off-street parking owned or leased by the project, including parking that is outside
the project boundary but is used by the project.
 For Option 3. Carshare, locate carshare parking within a ¼-mile (400-meter) walking distance
from the project boundary.
Further Explanation
Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide, with the following additions:
 For Option 1. No Off-street Parking, the project team must provide calculations to demonstrate
a 100% reduction from the baseline and local requirement. In other words, a project team must
provide evidence in their documentation that the local requirement and the base ratio (applied
to their project space type) in the ITE Transportation Planning Handbook are not zero.
 For Option 3. Carshare, projects are required to show legal agreement between the carshare
company and the project. Engage in at least a 2-year agreement.
 For Option 4. Unbundling Parking, provide documentation that shows the project will
implement a daily parking fee at a cost equal to or greater than the daily cost of municipal
public transit for one person.
Documentation Option Option Option Option

1 2 3 4
Site plan demonstrating no off-street parking is provided

X
Provide calculations to demonstrate a 30% reduction from
the ITE baseline and that project is not exceeding local
X
requirements.

Calculations demonstrating threshold achievement X X
Drawings or photographs of signage or pavement markings

X
indicating reserved status of carshare parking areas
Legal agreement between the carshare company and the
project. X
Documentation that shows the project will implement a X

daily parking fee at a cost equal to or greater than the daily
cost of municipal public transit for one person.
 Institute of Transportation Engineers, Transportation Planning Handbook, 4th edition,
Tables 11-12.
 Achieve a 60% parking capacity reduction from the base ratio.
Definitions
 off-street parking any indoor or outdoor facility or area for vehicle parking that is not located
on the streets, such as garages, lots, and driveways.

 LEED O+M LT credit Alternative Transportation: Earning this credit will help improve a project’s
transportation performance score.

LT Credit: Electric Vehicles
 Residential: Multifamily (2 points)
Intent
To reduce pollution by promoting alternatives to conventionally fueled automobiles.
Requirements
MF
Provide charging infrastructure for electric vehicles for on-site parking.
Option 1. Electric Vehicle Charging (1 point)

Install electrical vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) in 2% of all parking spaces used by the project or at
least two spaces, whichever is greater, for 1 point. Install electrical vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) in
4% of all parking spaces used by the project or at least four spaces, whichever is greater, for 2 points.
Clearly identify and reserve these spaces for the sole use by plug-in electric vehicles.
The EVSE must:
 Provide a Level 2 charging capacity (208 – 240 volts) or greater.

 Comply with the relevant regional or local standard for electrical connectors, such as SAE
Surface Vehicle Recommended Practice J1772, SAE Electric Vehicle Conductive Charge Coupler
or IEC 62196 of the International Electrotechnical Commission for projects outside the U.S.
 Be vehicle to grid connected (e.g. ISO 15118 compliant) and capable of responding to time-of-
use market signals (e.g. price). Projects pursuing EA credit Grid Harmonization should
incorporate EVSE into any demand response program or load flexibility and management
strategies.
AND/OR
Option 2. Electric Vehicle Charging Infrastructure (1 point)

Make 6% of parking spaces or at least 6 spaces EV Ready for 1 point, or make12% of parking spaces or at
least 12 spaces EV Ready for 2 points.
To be EV Ready, meet all of the following:
• Install listed raceway capable of accommodating a 208/240-volt dedicated branch circuit.

• The raceway shall not be less than trade size 1 (nominal 1-inch inside diameter).
• The raceway shall originate at the main service or subpanel and shall terminate into a listed
cabinet, box or enclosure in close proximity to the proposed location of the EV space.
• The service panel and/or subpanel shall provide capacity to install a 40-ampere minimum
dedicated branch circuit and space(s) reserved to permit installation of a branch circuit
overcurrent protective device.
Multiple Panel Spaces required:

• When multiple charging spaces are required, raceway(s) is/are required to be installed at the
time of construction:
• The raceway(s) shall originate at a service panel or subpanel(s) serving the area, and shall
terminate in close proximity to the proposed location of the charging equipment into listed
cabinet(s), box(es), enclosure(s) or equivalent.
• Construction documents shall indicate raceway termination point and proposed location of
future EV spaces and EV chargers. Construction documents shall also provide information on
amperage of future EVSE, raceway method(s), wiring schematics and electrical load calculations
to verify electrical panel service capacity and electrical system, including any on-site distribution
transformer(s), have sufficient capacity to simultaneously charge all EVs at all required EV
spaces at full rated amperage of the EVSE
• Plan design shall be based upon a 40-ampere minimum branch circuit.
• Electrical calculations shall substantiate the design of the electrical system, to include the
rating of equipment and any on-site distribution transformers and have sufficient capacity to
simultaneously charge all required EVs at its full rated amperage.
• The service panel or subpanel(s) shall have sufficient capacity to accommodate the required
number of dedicated branch circuit(s) for the future installation of the EVSE.
A parking space with EVSE cannot also be counted as EV Ready.
Guidance
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
This updated credit now refers to electric vehicles (EV) only, and the credit title has been changed to
Electric Vehicles to reflect this. As the EV market grows around the world and outpaces other
alternative fuels, updates are reflecting the huge potential of electric vehicles to contribute to a clean
energy transition. Preferred parking requirements and other achievement barriers have also been
removed and replaced with simplified language addressing newly added options that reward the
installation of electric vehicle infrastructure.
 Disregard any references related to carpool preferred parking, alternative fueling, or
permanently installed signage or pavement markings for preferred parking.
 Refer to all vehicles as electric vehicles.
 Projects are no longer required to meet the American Council for an Energy Efficient Economy
(ACEEE) green score threshold of 45. However, project teams are encouraged to use the ACEE
GreenerCars Ratings as a reference for information on vehicles ranked “Above Average”.
 Schools pursuing Option 3 are encouraged to collaborate with utility organizations and consider
electric grid management options or electric bus storage opportunities. Working in conjunction
with a utility company can help reduce stress on the electric grid during peak demand periods
as well as help subsidize the cost of electric buses.
Further Explanation
Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide, with the following addition:
 Discounted parking rates are no longer applicable or viable as a substitute for preferred parking
since it is no longer a requirement.
 Signage for preferred parking are no longer required. Signage for charging stations are still
strongly encouraged, however.
 ACEEE scores no longer apply.

Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide, with the following modification:
 Documentation related to preferred parking spaces, fueling stations, and discounted parking
rates are no longer required.

1 2
Parking or site plan indicating main building entrance and electric vehicle X
X
charging spaces; calculations based on total parking capacity
For electric vehicle parking spaces, photographs of signage or pavement
marking X
For electrical connectors, manufacturer’s product specifications indicating

X
charge level, compliance with relevant standard, and internet addressability
Construction documents that indicate raceway termination point and
proposed location of future EV spaces and EV chargers. Construction
documents shall also provide information on amperage of future EVSE,
raceway method(s), wiring schematics and electrical load calculations to
verify electrical panel service capacity and electrical system, including any X
on-site distribution transformer(s)
 ISO 15118, Road vehicles - Vehicle to grid communication interface
By meeting higher thresholds for either credit option, an additional point may be earned.
 Option 1 – Install electrical vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) in 4% of all parking spaces used by
the project or at least four spaces, whichever is greater, for 2 points
 Option 2 – Make 12% of parking spaces or at least 12 spaces EV Ready for 2 points.
Definitions
 EV Ready A dedicated electrical circuit with appropriate capacity for an electric vehicle
charging station.
 electric vehicles (EV) vehicles driven by electric motors which draw energy from either storage
batteries or overhead cables.
 electric vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) the conductors, including the ungrounded,
grounded, and equipment grounding conductors, the electric vehicle connectors, attachment
plugs, and all other fittings, devices, power outlets or apparatuses installed specifically for the
purpose of delivering energy from the premises wiring to the electric vehicle. (National Electric
Codes and California Article 625).
 vehicle-to-grid (V2G) a system in which electric vehicles communicate with an electric
distribution grid to provide demand response services by allowing electricity to flow to and
from the grid or by curbing the vehicle’s charge rate.

 LEED O+M LT credit Alternative Transportation: Providing and improving electric vehicle
charging facilities and infrastructure implementing any corresponding electric vehicle
incentivizing programs may help improve a project’s transportation performance score.
 LEED O+M EA credit Grid Harmonization: Electric charging stations aligning with the existing
demand response program or infrastructure comply with the related performance-based credit.

SS Prerequisite: Construction Activity
Pollution Prevention
This prerequisite applies to
 Residential: Multifamily
Intent
To reduce pollution from construction activities by controlling soil erosion, waterway sedimentation,
and airborne dust.
Requirements
MF
Stockpile and protect disturbed topsoil from erosion (for reuse).
Control the path and velocity of runoff with silt fencing or comparable measures.
Protect on-site storm sewer inlets, streams, and lakes with straw bales, silt fencing, silt sacks, rock filters,
or comparable measures.
Provide swales to divert surface water from hillsides.
Use tiers, erosion blankets, compost blankets, filter socks, berms, or comparable measures to stabilize
soils in any area with a slope of 15% (6.6:1) or more that is disturbed during construction.
Projects in locations that have construction activity air pollution rules must prevent air pollution from
dust and particulate matter.
OR
Create and implement an erosion and sedimentation control plan for all construction activities
associated with the project. The plan must conform to the erosion and sedimentation requirements of
the 2017 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Construction General Permit (CGP) or local
equivalent, whichever is more stringent. Projects must apply the CGP regardless of size. The plan must
describe the measures implemented.
Guidance
Refer to the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction reference guide, with the following additions and
modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
Updated the referenced standard which was out of date. Removed the 1 acre stipulation for the EPA
CGP requirement.
 Refer to the 2017 edition of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Construction
General Permit (CGP) where any instance of the outdated standard is mentioned.

Further Explanation
 U.S. EPA, National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), Stormwater
Discharges from Construction Activities, 2017: https://www.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater-
discharges-construction-activities

 LEED O+M SS credit Rainwater Management: Implementing an ESC plan that minimizes soil
compaction where vegetation will be planted or where infiltration measures will be installed will
support reducing runoff volumes, in accordance with the related credit’s requirements.

SS Credit: Site Assessment
Intent
To assess site conditions before design to evaluate sustainable options and inform related decisions
about site design.
Requirements
MF
Complete and document a site survey or assessment 1 that includes the following information:
Topography.
 Contour mapping
 Unique topographic features
 Slope stability risks
Hydrology.
 Special Flood Hazard Areas (SPFHA) as determined by FEMA’s Flood Insurance Rate
Map (FIRM) (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.)
 Delineated natural water bodies wetlands, lakes, streams, and shorelines (refer to U.S.
EPA’s Clean Water Act or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.)
 Rainwater collection and reuse opportunities
 Impervious and pervious surfaces within the site boundary
Climate.
 Solar exposure and shading opportunities
 Heat island effect potential
 Seasonal sun angles
 Prevailing winds
 Average monthly precipitation and temperature ranges
Vegetation.
 Primary vegetation types
 Greenfield area
 Significant tree mapping
 Federal or state threatened or endangered species lists; for projects outside the U.S.,
International Union for Conservation of Nature (IUCN) Red List of Threatened Species
 Invasive plant species listed by regional, state, or federal entities
 EPA Level III ecoregion description (or local equivalent)
Soils.
 Natural Resources Conservation Service soils delineation (or local equivalent for
projects outside the U.S.)
 U.S. Natural Resources Conservation Service (or local equivalent for projects outside the
1Components adapted from the Sustainable Sites Initiative: Guidelines and Performance Benchmarks 2009,
Prerequisite 2.1: Site Assessment.

United States) prime farmland, unique farmland, farmland of statewide importance, or
farmland of local importance
 Healthy soils
 Previous development
 Disturbed soils
Human use.
 Views
 Adjacent transportation infrastructure, bicycle network, and bicycle storage
 Adjacent diverse uses
 Construction materials with existing recycle or reuse potential
Human health effects.

 Proximity of vulnerable populations
 Adjacent physical activity opportunities
 Proximity to major sources of air and water pollution.
The survey or assessment should demonstrate the relationships between the site features and topics
listed above and how these features influenced the project design; give the reasons for not addressing
any of those topics.
Guidance
modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
The removal of a U.S.-specific standard, TR-55, from the required considerations and broadening of this
concept to account for all impervious and pervious surfaces on site has made this updated credit more
approachable to most project teams. The credit now requires projects to describe their EPA Level III
Ecoregion (or local equivalent) in order to understand what native and adapted vegetation is
appropriate for their site, integrative information that better contextualizes the credit intent.
Further Explanation
Refer to the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction reference guide, with the following modifications:
 Hydrology: Disregard any mention of the Natural Resources Conservation Service TR-55
program as it is no longer required.
 Hydrology: Estimate the water storage capacity of the site by calculating the area of impervious
and pervious surfaces. Table 2 lists of other possible sources of information.
 Vegetation:
o Source – EPA Level III Ecoregion Descriptions
(ftp://newftp.epa.gov/EPADataCommons/ORD/Ecoregions/pubs/NA_TerrestrialEcore
gionsLevel3_Final-2june11_CEC.pdf)
o Description – Descriptions identifying North American ecoregions and detailing their
associated ecosystems and vegetation types.
 Provide a map illustrating the topography of the site.
 Provide a map illustrating the site’s Special Flood Hazard Areas (SPFHA) as determined by
FEMA’s Flood Insurance Rate Map (FIRM) (or local equivalent showing the 100-year floodplain
for projects outside the U.S.).
 Provide the description of the site’s EPA Level III ecoregion (or local equivalent).

 EPA Level III Ecoregion Descriptions:
ftp://newftp.epa.gov/EPADataCommons/ORD/Ecoregions/pubs/NA_TerrestrialEcoregionsLev
el3_Final-2june11_CEC.pdf

 LEED O+M SS credit Site Management: Conducting a site assessment and identifying natural
areas providing habitat will fulfill the related credit’s site assessment requirements.
 LEED O+M LT credit Transportation Performance: Analyzing the surrounding sites and diverse
uses, transportation infrastructure, bicycle network, as well as assessing existing bicycle
facilities and potential future facility needs, may help inform and influence the improvement of a
project’s transportation performance score.
 LEED O+M SS credit Rainwater Management: Studying the climate, rainfall, and hydrology of the
site and watershed will help determine applicable strategies to earn the related performance-
based credit.
 LEED O+M SS credit Heat Island Reduction: Site assessment can lead to identification of paving,
shading, or roofing materials that can contribute to requirements of the related performance-
based credit.
 LEED O+M EA credit Energy Performance: An analysis of the climate, including solar access,
temperatures, diurnal swings, wind patterns, humidity, and rainfall will support more effective
passive and active energy efficiency strategies.

SS Credit: Protect or Restore Habitat
Intent
To conserve existing natural areas and restore damaged areas to provide habitat and promote
biodiversity.
Requirements
MF
Preserve and protect from all development and construction activity 40% of the greenfield area on the
site (if such areas exist).
AND
Option 1. On-Site Restoration (1 point)
Using native or adapted vegetation, restore 25% (including the building footprint) of all portions of the
site identified as previously disturbed. Vegetated roof surfaces may be included if the plants are native
or adapted and provide habitat.
Soils
Restore all soils on site that have been disturbed or replace all soils removed by current construction
activities that will later serve as the final vegetated area.
 Restore or replace soils to a minimum depth of 12 inches (30.48 centimeters) or depth of root
ball for larger plant materials.
 Provide a soils test of imported soils that includes recommended amendments. Incorporate test
recommended amendments prior to planting.
 Imported soils must be reused for functions comparable to their original function.
 Imported soils may not include the following:
o soils defined regionally by the Natural Resources Conservation Service web soil survey (or
local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) as prime farmland, unique farmland, or
farmland of statewide or local importance; or
 soils from other greenfield sites
 sphagnum peat moss
Vegetation
Use only plant species that are appropriate for the project’s EPA Level III ecoregion and that are suitable
for site conditions, climate, and design intent. Both native and adapted vegetation may qualify. Native

grasses may be used in conjunction with a variety (two or more) of native or adapted vegetation
species.
 Use only plant species not currently listed as invasive on any federal or qualifying regional lists.
 Protect the root zone of trees found on site. Planting within the one foot (0.30 meter) radius
per inch (2.54 centimeters) Diameter Breast Height (DBH) should be avoided. Native grasses
may be used in conjunction with a variety (two or more) of native or adapted vegetation
species.
 Conserve endangered species.
OR
Option 2. Financial Support (1 point)
Provide financial support equivalent to at least $0.20 per square foot (US $2 per square meter) for the
total site area (including the building footprint).
Financial support must be provided to a conservation land trust or accredited conservation organization
within the same EPA Level III ecoregion or the project’s state (or within 100 miles of the project [160
kilometers] for projects outside the U.S.). For U.S. projects, the land trust must be accredited by the
Land Trust Alliance.
For projects outside of the U.S., the conservation land trust must either be a project supported by The
Nature Conservancy or World Land Trust.
Guidance
modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
This updated credit is now more achievable for various project types and more directly addresses the
intent of the credit as it relates to habitat protection and revitalization. For instance, the percent of the
site that must be restored has been reduced from 30% to 25%, Option 2. Financial Support now requires
spending only 20 cents (USD) per square foot, and a vegetation section has been added to more
explicitly address issues concerning species habitat. Soils requirements have been streamlined and
require a simple test of any imported soil. For international projects pursuing Option 2. Financial
Support, the credit now recognizes global options for ensuring the quality of conservation land trusts
receiving funds, including support from The Nature Conservancy or World Land Trust.
 Option 1. On-site Restoration:
o Verify that at least 25%, rather than 30%, of previously disturbed areas will be restored.
o Soil tests are only required for imported soils, not soils in situ.
o Native grasses may be used in conjunction with a variety (two or more) of native or
adapted vegetation species.
 Option 2. Financial Support:
o Determine the amount of financial support by replacing all instances of $0.40/sq ft with
$0.20/sq ft and $4/m2 with $2/m2 in the equations.

Further Explanation
 Best Practices for Habitat Protection:
o For more information on invasive vegetation, refer to the USDA’s NRCS PLANTS
Database, the Invasive Plant Atlas of the United States website, state and federal
Noxious Weed laws (or local equivalent for projects outside of the U.S.).
 Vegetated Roofs:
o Projects no longer need to meet a floor-area ratio (FAR) density minimum for vegetated
roofs to be considered part of the restored area.
o Either intensive or extensive vegetated roofs can be applied to the credit if the
applicant demonstrates that the proposed native or adapted plants provide habitat
supporting endemic wildlife populations of the site region with a diversity of species.
Examples of vegetated roof habitat benefits to be provided include wildlife nesting,
cover, respite, and food sources.
 Soil Restoration:
o Disregard Table 2. Soil restoration guidelines.
1. Restore or replace soils to a minimum depth of 12 inches (30.48 centimeters) or
depth of root ball for larger plant materials.
2. Test the soil to be restored or replaced and incorporate test recommended
amendments.
o Specialized engineered soil media may be required for other applications including
athletic fields, vegetated roofs, infiltration raingardens, green walls, trees in a paving,
bioswales, green vehicle easements, steep slopes, food gardens and constructed
wetlands.
o Take samples of imported soils and send them to a laboratory for testing and analysis
for horticultural suitability, fertility and physical characteristics. Local government
agencies may offer inexpensive testing of soil samples and guidance around sampling
procedures and topsoil suppliers may offer standardized testing of their products.
o Soil sample test results must include the components listed in Table 3 and should
include amendment recommendations impacting infiltration rates based on the
horticultural needs of designed restoration vegetation.
o Table 3. Soil sample test result components should also include the following:
 Physical aspects:
USDA Soil Classification
% Gravel
% Sand
% Silt
Estimated infiltration rate (metric per hour)
 Soil test analysis results with recommended amendments to be provided; provide
documentation of amendments.
 Projects outside the US: Confirmation that conservation project is supported by The Nature
Conservancy or World Land Trust.
 Projects outside U.S.: Verification that conservation organization is nationally or locally
recognized; description of qualifications and mission of conservation organization
Refer to the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction reference guide, with the following additions:
 EPA Level III Ecoregion
Descriptions: ftp://newftp.epa.gov/EPADataCommons/ORD/Ecoregions/pubs/NA_TerrestrialE
coregionsLevel3_Final-2june11_CEC.pdf
 The Nature Conservancy: https://www.nature.org

 World Land Trust: https://www.worldlandtrust.org/
 United Nations Environment Programme, List of accredited environmental organizations:
https://www.unenvironment.org/civil-society-engagement/accreditation/list-accredited-
organizations
 USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service, PLANTS Database:
https://www.nrcs.usda.gov/wps/portal/nrcs/main/national/plantsanimals/plants/
 Invasive Plant Atlas of the United States: https://www.invasiveplantatlas.org/
 U.S. State and Federal Noxious Weed laws: https://plants.usda.gov/java/noxComposite
 Option 1. Double the 25% restoration requirement (restore at least 50%).
 Option 2. Double the financial donation requirement (provide at least $0.40 per square foot or
$4.00 per square meter).

 LEED O+M credit Site Management: Naturally vegetated areas that meet the requirements of
this credit are less likely to require the routine use of maintenance equipment. They could also
reduce irrigation, nutrient application, and erosion, thereby helping the project meet the
requirements of the related performance-based credit.
 LEED O+M SS credit Rainwater Management: Restoring and protecting greenfield areas with
native or adapted vegetation will help provide applicable strategies to earn the related
performance-based credit.
 LEED O+M SS credit Heat Island Reduction: Vegetated roofs can be counted for both credits.

SS Credit: Open Space
Intent
To create exterior open space that encourages interaction with the environment, social interaction,
passive recreation, and physical activities.
Requirements
MF
Option 1. Onsite Open Space
Provide outdoor space greater than or equal to 30% of the total site area (including building footprint).
25% of the minimum 30% total outdoor space requirement must be planted with two or more types of
vegetation or have overhead vegetated canopy.
The outdoor space must be physically accessible and be one or more of the following:
 a pedestrian-oriented paving or landscape area that accommodate outdoor social activities;
 a recreation-oriented paving or landscape area that encourage physical activity;
 a landscape area with two or more types of vegetation that provide opportunities for year-
round visual interest;
 a garden space dedicated to food production;
 preserved or created habitat that meets the criteria of SS Credit Protect or Restore Habitat and
also includes elements of human interaction.
Extensive or intensive vegetated roofs that are physically accessible can be used toward the minimum
25% vegetation requirement, and qualifying roof-based physically accessible paving areas can be used
toward credit compliance.
Wetlands or naturally designed ponds may count as open space if the side slope gradients average 1:4
(vertical:horizontal) or less and are vegetated.
OR
Option 2. Access to Open Space
Select a location within ½ mile (800 meters) of a publicly accessible or community-based open space
that is at least ¾ acre (0.3 hectare). The open space requirement can be met with either one large open
space or two smaller spaces totaling ¾ acre (0.3 hectare).
Guidance

Behind the Intent

Beta Update
Updates clarify requirements about the percentage of outdoor space and vegetated space to qualify as
open space. Projects must provide outdoor space greater than or equal to 30% of the total site area,
and 25% of the minimum 30% total outdoor space requirement must be vegetated. Minimal changes to
verbiage regarding vegetation have also been made to clarify types of vegetation that meet the
requirements. Finally, the 1.5 FAR requirement for vegetated roofs has been removed in order to
encourage the use of vegetated roofs by any project, regardless of size.
 Refer to the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction reference guide under LTc Site Selection
> Option 3. Open Space.
Further Explanation
Project Type Variations
Multitenant Projects
 Refer to the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction reference guide, with the following
additions:
Open space can be either adjacent to the building or at another location in the site master plan.
The open space may be at another master plan development site as long as it is protected from
development. If the open space is not adjacent to the building, provide documentation showing
that the requirements have been met and the land is in a natural state or has been returned to a
natural state and conserved for the life of the building.
Campus
> Option 3. Open Space:
o Walking distance can be measured from center of community, provided distance from
center of community to farthest building does not exceed ¼ mile.
> Option 3. Open Space:
o Provide maps and calculations of publicly accessible open space of at least ¾ acre
within ½ mile of the project.

 LEED O+M SS credit Rainwater Management: Vegetated landscape areas with native or adapted
vegetation will help provide applicable strategies to earn the related credit.
 LEED O+M SS credit Heat Island Reduction: Vegetated roofs can be counted for both credits.

SS Credit: Rainwater Management
Intent
To reduce runoff volume and improve water quality by replicating the natural hydrology and water
balance of the site, based on historical conditions and undeveloped ecosystems in the region.
Requirements
Treat run-off from pollutant-generating impervious surfaces (i.e. vehicle pavement, service courts, trash
enclosures) using low-impact development (LID) practice.
MF
Option 1. Percentile of Rainfall Events (1-3 points)
In a manner best replicating natural site hydrology processes, retain (i.e. infiltrate, evapotranspirate, or
collect and reuse) on site the runoff from the developed site for, at minimum, the 80th percentile of
regional or local rainfall events using low-impact development (LID) /green infrastructure (GI) practices.
GI and LID strategies can be either structural or non-structural. Points are awarded according to Table 1.
For all projects, the use of coal tar sealants shall be prohibited in any application exposed to
stormwater, wash waters, condensates, irrigation water, snowmelt, or icemelt.
Examples of acceptable techniques include the following:
 planting rain gardens with native or adapted plant material (e.g. trees shrubs);
 installing a vegetated roof;
 using permeable paving, consisting of porous above-ground materials (e.g., open pavers,
engineered products), a base layer designed to drain water away from the building, and (often)
a 6-inch-deep (150 millimeters) subbase; and
 installing permanent infiltration or collection features (e.g., vegetated swale, rain garden,
rainwater cistern) that can retain 100% of the runoff from at minimum, the 80th percentile of
regional or local rainfall events.
A combination of LID approaches are recommended (but not required) as they are holistic measures
which maximize benefits. In contrast to LID, conventional stormwater techniques include grey
infrastructure, such as detention or retention ponds, pipes, and vaults. Conventional grey infrastructure
devices may be accepted only if integrated within a holistic LID system (ie. a combination of LID
techniques).
Use daily rainfall data and the methodology in the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
Technical Guidance on Implementing the Stormwater Runoff Requirements for Federal Projects under

Section 438 of the Energy Independence and Security Act to determine the percentile amount to be
retained.
Table 1. Points for percentile of rainfall retained
Percentile of Rainfall Retained Points
80th Percentile 1
85th Percentile 2
90th Percentile 3
Zero Lot Line projects only (1-3 points)
The following requirement applies to zero lot line projects in urban areas with a minimum density of 1.5
FAR. Treat run-off from pollutant-generating impervious surfaces (i.e. vehicle pavement, service courts,
trash enclosures) using low-impact development (LID) practice/green infrastructure (GI) (or a
traditional stormwater treatment device if LID/GI is not feasible for lack of space). Any above-ground
setback area must be designed and used as a pedestrian-oriented space (e.g. restaurant seating,
outdoor displays, private vendors, or related public purpose).
In a manner best replicating natural site hydrology processes, manage on site the runoff from the
developed site for, at minimum, the 70th percentile of regional or local rainfall events, using LID/GI.
Points are awarded according to Table 2.
Table 2. Points for percentile of rainfall retained on Zero Lot Line projects
Percentile of Rainfall Retained Points
70th Percentile 1
75th Percentile 2
80th Percentile 3
If the Zero Lot Line project meets the credit requirements and achieves at least the minimum percentile
threshold of rainfall retained, additional volume can be retained offsite so long as the management
system is designed to accommodate use by the project.
Option 2. Permeable Lot Area (1-3 points)
Use low-impact development (LID) techniques to minimize the amount of rainwater that leaves the site.
Examples of acceptable techniques include the following:
 planting areas with native or adapted plant material (e.g. trees shrubs);
 installing a vegetated roof;

 using permeable paving, consisting of porous above-ground materials (e.g., open pavers,
engineered products), a base layer designed to drain water away from the home, and (often) a
6-inch-deep (150 millimeters) subbase; and
 installing permanent infiltration or collection features (e.g., vegetated swale, rain garden,
rainwater cistern) that can handle 100% of the runoff from a two-year, 24-hour storm.
To determine compliance for multifamily homes, calculate the percentage of the lot area, including the
area under roof that is permeable or can direct water to an on-site catchment or infiltration feature.
Table 1. Points for permeable area, as percentage of total lot area
Percentage Points
50–64% 1
65–79% 2
≥ 80% 3
Guidance
modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
To make this credit more achievable, projects are now able to earn points for retaining runoff for the
80th, 85th, or 90th percentile of regional or local rainfall events, whereas the credit previously required
the 95th or 98th percentile.
Requirements for zero lot line (ZLL) projects have also been reduced. To ensure clarity, a more refined
definition for ZLL has been included and the term “manage” has been replaced with the more specific
and technical “retain (i.e. infiltrate, evapotranspirate, or collect and reuse)”. More guidance and
resources have also been added to clarify acceptable LID strategies.
 Option 2. Natural Land Cover Conditions is no longer available for this credit.
 Option 3. Permeable Lot Area is now Option 2. Follow the same Permeable Lot Area guidance in
LEED v4 for direction on how to achieve the option in LEED v4.1.
 The percentile rainfall event thresholds have been changed to 80th, 85th, and 90th percentile for
all projects and 70th, 75th, and 80th percentile for ZLL projects.
Further Explanation
 Green Infrastructure and Low-Impact Development Strategies: If project teams are facing
environmental or technical barriers to proceeding with LID techniques, consult the EPA’s Low-
Impact Development website for detailed “Barrier Buster Fact Sheets” that address specific
issues, such as how to combat clay soil constraints and designing LID practices on sloped sites.
 Project Type Variations, Zero Lot Line projects: Projects following the zero lot line path should
refer to the new v4.1 definition of “zero lot line project” to confirm the status of the project. A

slightly more set-back above-grade footprint is only acceptable as zero lot line if the setback
space above-ground is dedicated for pedestrian use and the below-grade (i.e. a parking garage
or lower level area) perimeter aligns with the overall LEED property boundary. In other words,
the above area that is set back can still be considered zero lot line if the below area meets the
property line and the above area is dedicated for pedestrian use.
Replace “Option 1 Path 3” titled column in the LEED v4 Required Documentation table with the title
“Zero lot line projects” and disregard/remove column titled “Option 2.”
 EPA’s LID website: https://www.epa.gov/nps/lid
 Georgetown Climate Center’s Green Infrastructure Toolkit:
http://www.georgetownclimate.org/adaptation/toolkits/green-infrastructure-toolkit/green-
infrastructure-strategies-and-techniques.html"
Definitions
 evapotranspiration the combination of evaporation and plant transpiration into the
atmosphere. Evaporation occurs when liquid water from soil, plant surfaces, or water bodies
becomes vapor. Transpiration is the movement of water through a plant and the subsequent
loss of water vapor.
 rainwater infiltration a natural hydrological process by which rainwater flows into and through
subsurface soil and other porous materials.
 retain (rainwater) on site to capture and reserve a specified volume of rainfall to mimic natural
hydrologic function. Retention is a function of rainwater management that includes strategies
involving evapotranspiration, infiltration, and capture and reuse.
 capture (rainwater) and reuse rainwater that has been captured and treated for reuse.
 Zero Lot Line project a project whose building footprint, exclusive of any required setbacks or
easements (such as rights-of-way), rests directly on, or nearly aligns with, the LEED project
boundary on multiple sides and covers 90% of the total site area (i.e. there is virtually no
setback of the building).

 LEED O+M WE credit Water Performance: LID and GI measures that harvest and reuse
rainwater may help reduce potable water demand. Thus, these measures help ensure that
projects will use less water throughout the building life cycle, which may help improve a
project’s water performance score. Tracking water consumption on a regular basis through
metering supports effective water management and provides performance data to help verify
that building systems are operating as designed.
 LEED O+M SS credit Heat Island Reduction: Vegetated roofs installed for achievement of this
credit will also qualify for the related performance-based credit.

SS Credit: Heat Island Reduction
Intent
To minimize effects on microclimates and human and wildlife habitats by reducing heat islands.
Requirements
MF
Choose one of the following options:
Nonroof and Roof (1-2 points)
Ensure that at least 50% of roof and nonroof hardscapes, but not including common roads that serve
multiple buildings, on the project site meet one or more of the following requirements. Points are
awarded according to Table 1.
Table 1. Points for percentage area with shading or nonabsorptive material
Percentage of
Points
hardscape area
50–75% 1
> 75% 2
OR
Meet the following criterion for 2 points:
Area of Area of High- Area of

Nonroof Reflectance Vegetated
Measures Roof Roof
————— + —————— + —————— ≥ +

Total Site Total Roof
0.5 0.75 0.75 Paving Area Area
Alternatively, an SRI and SR weighted average approach may be used to calculate compliance.
Use any combination of the following strategies.
Nonroof Measures

 Use the existing plant material or install plants that provide shade over paving areas (including
playgrounds) on the site within 10 years of planting. Install vegetated planters. Plants must be in
place at the time of occupancy permit and cannot include artificial turf.
 Provide shade with structures covered by energy generation systems, such as solar thermal
collectors, photovoltaics, and wind turbines.
 Provide shade with architectural devices or structures. If the device or structure is a roof, it shall
have an aged solar reflectance (SR) value of at least 0.28 as measured in accordance with
ANSI/CRRC S100. If the device or structure is not a roof, or if aged solar reflectance information
is not available, it shall have at installation an initial SR of at least 0.33 as measured in accordance
with ANSI/CRRC S100.
 Provide shade with vegetated structures.
 Use paving materials with an initial solar reflectance (SR) value of at least0.33.
 Use an open-grid pavement system (at least 50% unbound).
High-Reflectance Roof
Use roofing materials that have an aged SRI equal to or greater than the values in Table 1. If aged SRI is
not available, the roofing material shall have an initial SRI equal to or greater than the values in Table 1.
Table 1. Minimum solar reflectance index value, by roof slope
Aged
Slope Initial SRI
SRI
Low-sloped roof ≤ 2:12 82 64
Steep-sloped roof > 2:12 39 32
Roof area that consists of functional, usable spaces (such as helipads, recreation courts, and areas
covered by equipment, solar panels, and appurtenances) may meet the requirements of nonroof
measures.
Vegetated Roof
Install a vegetated roof using native or adapted plant species.
Guidance
Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C and Homes Design and Construction reference guides, with the following
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
This updated credit references the new ANSI/Cool Roof Rating Council S100 standard for “Rapid
Ratings.” Updates also clarify that functional space for occupant use located on a roof can be included
under nonroof calculations. This credit includes a portion of the Heat Island Reduction requirements
from LEED v4 BD+C, in order to align across rating systems, as well as a 1 point threshold from
Multifamily Midrise

Refer to the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction and BD+C reference guides, with the following
modification:
 Identify hardscape and roof area
o Common roads that serve multiple buildings should not be included in this calculation. If
the roads include the primary parking areas (i.e. parking spots along the road), those
parking areas should be included in the calculation.
 Selecting roofing materials:
o Initial SRI shall be computed in accordance with ASTM E1980, under medium wind-
speed conditions from initial values of solar reflectance and thermal emittance
measured in accordance with ANSI/CRRC S100.
o Aged SRI shall be computed in accordance with ASTM E1980, under medium wind-
speed conditions from aged values of solar reflectance and thermal emittance measured
in accordance with ANSI/CRRC S100.
o Values of roof solar reflectance, thermal emittance, and solar reflectance index may be
available at the Cool Roof Ratings Council’s Rated Products Directory.
 Evaluate compliance against credit requirements:
o Equation 2, within the “summed for all high-reflectance roof areas” portion, replace
'Required SR' in the denominator with 'Required SRI'.
Further Explanation
Campus
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.
Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
 ANSI/CRRC S100, Standard Test Methods for Determining Radiative Properties of Material
 ASTM E1980 Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low-
Sloped Opaque Surfaces
 Cool Roof Ratings Council, Rated Products Directory: https://coolroofs.org/directory
Definitions
 common road for the purposes of this credit, a common road is defined as a narrow or small
road or alleyway between buildings, which may or may not be drivable.
 solar reflectance (SR) The ratio of the reflected solar flux to the incident solar flux.
 solar reflectance, initial (initial SR) a solar reflectance that is measured prior to aging.
 solar reflectance, aged (aged SR) a solar reflectance that is measured after laboratory or
natural aging.
 solar reflectance index (SRI) a measure of the constructed surface’s ability to stay cool in the
sun by reflecting solar radiation and emitting thermal radiation. A standard black surface has an
initial SRI of 0, and a standard white surface has an initial SRI of 100.
 thermal emittance (TE) the ratio of the radiant heat flux emitted by a specimen to that emitted
by a blackbody radiator at the same temperature.
 thermal emittance, initial (initial TE) a thermal emittance that is measured prior to aging.
 thermal emittance, aged (aged TE) a thermal emittance that is measured after laboratory or
natural aging.

 LEED O+M SS Credit Rainwater Management: Reducing a site’s hardscape area and/or using
open-grid paving will improve infiltration rates and may help projects earn the related
performance-based credit. Vegetated roofs can also contribute to rainwater management.

SS Credit: Light Pollution Reduction
Intent
To increase night sky access, improve nighttime visibility, and reduce the consequences of development
for wildlife and people.
Requirements
MF
Meet uplight and light trespass requirements, using either the backlight-uplight-glare (BUG) method
(Option 1) or the calculation method (Option 2). Projects may use different options for uplight and light
trespass.
Meet these requirements for all exterior luminaires located inside the project boundary (except those
listed under “Exemptions”), based on the following:
 the photometric characteristics of each luminaire when mounted in the same orientation and tilt
as specified in the project design; and
 the lighting zone of the project property (at the time construction begins). Classify the project
under one lighting zone using the lighting zones definitions provided in the Illuminating
Engineering Society and International Dark Sky Association (IES/IDA) Model Lighting Ordinance
(MLO) User Guide.
Additionally, meet the internally illuminated signage requirement.
Uplight
Option 1. BUG Rating Method
Do not exceed the following luminaire uplight ratings, based on the specific light source installed in the
luminaire, as defined in IES TM-15-11, Addendum A.
Table 1. Maximum uplight ratings for luminaires
MLO lighting zone Luminaire uplight

rating
LZ0 U0
LZ1 U1
LZ2 U2
LZ3 U3
LZ4 U4

OR
Option 2. Calculation Method
Do not exceed the following percentages of total lumens emitted above horizontal.
Table 2. Maximum percentage of total lumens emitted above horizontal, by lighting

zone
MLO lighting zone Maximum allowed percentage of total

luminaire lumens emitted above horizontal
LZ0 0%
LZ1 0%
LZ2 1.5%
LZ3 3%
LZ4 6%
AND
Light Trespass
Option 1. BUG Rating Method
Do not exceed the following luminaire backlight and glare ratings (based on the specific light source
installed in the luminaire), as defined in IES TM-15-11, Addendum A, based on the mounting location
and distance from the lighting boundary.
Table 3. Maximum backlight and glare ratings
MLO lighting zone
Luminaire mounting LZ0 LZ1 LZ2 LZ3 LZ4
Allowed backlight ratings
> 2 mounting heights from lighting

B1 B3 B4 B5 B5
boundary
1 to 2 mounting heights from lighting

B1 B2 B3 B4 B4
boundary and properly oriented
0.5 to 1 mounting height to

lighting boundary and properly B0 B1 B2 B3 B3
oriented
< 0.5 mounting height to lighting

B0 B0 B0 B1 B2
boundary and properly oriented
Allowed glare ratings

Building-mounted > 2 mounting
heights from any lighting G0 G1 G2 G3 G4
boundary
Building-mounted 1–2 mounting

heights from any lighting G0 G0 G1 G1 G2
boundary
Building-mounted 0.5 to 1
mounting heights from any G0 G0 G0 G1 G1
lighting boundary
Building-mounted < 0.5

mounting heights from any G0 G0 G0 G0 G1
lighting boundary
All other luminaires G0 G1 G2 G3 G4
The lighting boundary is located at the property lines of the property, or properties, that the LEED
project occupies. The lighting boundary can be modified under the following conditions:
 When the property line abuts a public area that includes, but is not limited to, a
walkway, bikeway, plaza, or parking lot, the lighting boundary may be moved to 5 feet
(1.5 meters) beyond the property line.
 When the property line abuts a public street, alley, or transit corridor, the lighting
boundary may be moved to the center line of that street, alley, or corridor.
 When there are additional properties owned by the same entity that are contiguous to
the property, or properties, that the LEED project is within and have the same or higher
MLO lighting zone designation as the LEED project, the lighting boundary may be
expanded to include those properties.
Orient all luminaires less than two mounting heights from the lighting boundary such that the
backlight points toward the nearest lighting boundary line. Building-mounted luminaires with the
backlight oriented toward the building are exempt from the backlight rating requirement.
OR
Option 2. Calculation Method
Do not exceed the following vertical illuminances at the lighting boundary (use the definition of
lighting boundary in Option 1). Calculation points may be no more than 5 feet (1.5 meters) apart.
Vertical illuminances must be calculated on vertical planes running parallel to the lighting boundary,
with the normal to each plane oriented toward the property and perpendicular to the lighting
boundary, extending from grade level to 33 feet (10 meters) above the height of the highest
luminaire.
Table 4. Maximum vertical illuminance at lighting boundary, by lighting zone
MLO lighting zone Vertical illuminance
LZ0 0.05 fc (0.5 lux)

LZ1 0.05 fc (0.5 lux)

LZ2 0.10 fc (1 lux)
LZ3 0.20 fc (2 lux)
LZ4 0.60 fc (6 lux)
FC = footcandle.
AND
Internally Illuminated Exterior Signage
Do not exceed a luminance of 200 cd/m2 (nits) during nighttime hours and 2000 cd/m2 (nits)
during daytime hours.
Exemptions from Uplight and Light Trespass Requirements
The following exterior lighting is exempt from the requirements, provided it is controlled
separately from the nonexempt lighting:
 specialized signal, directional, and marker lighting for transportation;

 lighting that is used solely for façade and landscape lighting in MLO lighting zones 3 and
4, and is automatically turned off from midnight until 6 a.m.;
 lighting for theatrical purposes for stage, film, and video performances;
 government-mandated roadway lighting;
 hospital emergency departments, including associated helipads;
 lighting for the national flag in MLO lighting zones 2, 3, or 4; and
 internally illuminated signage.
Guidance
There are no substantive changes to the credit requirements; refer to the LEED v4 BD+C reference
guide, with the following addition:
Further Explanation
Campus
Group Approach
Campus Approach

 LEED O+M EA credit Energy Performance: A proper lighting design both minimizes light
pollution and maximizes energy efficiency, which could improve a project’s overall energy
performance.

WE Prerequisite: Water Use Reduction
Intent
To reduce water consumption.
Requirements
MF
Reduce aggregate water consumption by 20% from the baseline, or earn 3 points in WE credit Water
Use Reduction.
For indoor water savings, use the Water Reduction Calculator to determine the average flush or flow
rate for each fixture type and the estimated daily usage. The baselines for indoor water consumption are
shown in Table 1.
Table 1. Baseline water consumption of fixtures and fittings
Fixture or fitting Baseline (IP units) Baseline (SI units)
Toilet (water closet) 1.6 gpf 6 lpf
Urinal 1.0 gpf 3.8 lpf
Public lavatory (restroom) faucet 0.5 gpm* 1.9 lpm*
Dwelling unit lavatory, and public and 2.2 gpm* 8.3 lpm*
private kitchen faucets (excluding faucets
used exclusively for filling operations)
Showerhead 2.5 gpm**per shower stall 9.5 lpm**per shower stall or

or compartment compartment
Clothes washer 9.5 IWF 9.5 IWF
Dishwasher 6.5 gpc 24 lpc
* as tested at 60 psi or 415 kPa
** as tested at 80 psi or 550 kPa
Projects located where standard supply pressure is different than the LEED baseline supply pressure
may calculate the water consumption of flow fixtures and fittings at the local standard supply pressure;
the supply pressure must be consistent in the baseline and proposed case.
Any installed water softeners must be demand initiated.

For outdoor water savings, use the EPA WaterSense Water Budget Tool to calculate the baseline
landscape water consumption and the design landscape water consumption.

Implement the following measures to further reduce landscape water consumption. Add the savings
associated with each of the following strategies to the reduction from the landscape water requirement,
as calculated in the Water Budget Tool:
 Install smart scheduling technology. This strategy counts for a maximum reduction of 30%
provided all landscape water use is controlled by a soil moisture sensor control system or a
weather-based irrigation control system.
 Use captured rainwater.
 Use reclaimed water.
 Use water treated on site or conveyed by a public agency specifically for nonpotable uses
(water from naturally occurring surface water bodies, such as streams and rivers, and
groundwater, such as well water, does not count).
Guidance
modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
This new prerequisite combines LEED v4 BD+C WE prerequisite Outdoor Water Use Reduction and WE
prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction and requires a 20% water reduction from the baseline.
The prerequisite also incorporates feedback from and market barriers identified by LEED project teams.
The intent of these changes is to make prerequisite compliance more achievable and relevant to
international project teams by recognizing regional variations while maintaining the stringency of
requirements for water performance.
Refer to the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction reference guide, with the following modification:
Step 3. Calculate indoor and outdoor water usage
• Complete the indoor and outdoor water calculations based on the installed measures. Reduce
aggregate water consumption by 20% from the baseline.
• For outdoor water, use the EPA WaterSense water budget tool, and then include results in the
water reduction calculator.
• For indoor water use, use the water reduction calculator
Further Explanation
Non-Dwelling Unit Bathrooms: Occupant Types

If the project includes separate gender neutral and/or ADA restrooms without urinals, assume that 5%
of male occupants and 5% of female occupants use these restrooms. Enter 95% into the percent of
males expected to use restrooms with urinals in the Indoor Water Use Reduction Calculator. Alternately,
estimate this percentage based on the project's restroom layout and anticipated usage patterns or
weighted fixture counts.
International Tips
 International projects located where standard water supply pressure is different than the LEED
baseline supply pressure values may calculate the water consumption of flow fixtures and
fittings at the local standard water supply pressure. Product cutsheets must demonstrate that
the fixture or fitting complies with the LEED baseline flow rate.

o Projects that are unable to provide manufacturer documentation of the fixture flow rate
at the LEED baseline water supply pressure may use the local standard supply water
pressure in the design case and the standard LEED baseline flow rates in the baseline
case.
o Projects served by water supply pressures different than specified in LEED may install
pressure compensating aerators in flow fixtures to achieve the desired flow rate without
compromising user satisfaction.
 The World Meteorological Organization website (worldweather.wmo.int) and other sources
provide annual precipitation data for many sites. If precipitation data for the project location are
unavailable, they must be estimated.
 Evapotranspiration data are available through various government and academic sources.
The Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations
(fao.org/nr/water/eto.html) calculates reference evapotranspiration using a variety of
algorithms based on monthly average weather data. The month with the largest deficit between
reference evapotranspiration and rainfall is the peak watering month.
 The international version of the WaterSense Water Budget Tool can be found on the USGBC
website under this credit’s resources section.
Related Credit Tips

WE Credit Water Use Reduction. This credit provides a performance pathway and a prescriptive
pathway for project water consumption. All projects are encouraged to use the performance pathway,
Option 1. Total Water Use Reduction, but teams with some multibuilding projects may find it easier to
plan with Option 2. Outdoor and Indoor Water Use Reduction.
EA Credit Domestic Hot Water Pipe Insulation. Insulating hot water pipes reduces heat loss and can
raise water temperature, which can help conserve water by reducing the wait time for hot water.
Campus
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.
Campus Approach

 LEED O+M WE credit Water Performance: Selecting efficient fixtures, fittings and appliances in
the design phase helps ensure that projects will use less water throughout the building life cycle,
which may help improve a project’s water performance score. Similarly, designing out the need
for a permanent irrigation system, selecting native or adapted plants for project landscaping
and/or installing efficient irrigation systems reduces irrigation water use throughout the building
life cycle, which may help improve a project’s water performance score.

WE Prerequisite: Building-Level Water
Metering
Intent
To support water management and identify opportunities for additional water savings by tracking water
consumption.
Requirements
MF
Install permanent water meters that measure the total potable water use for the building and associated
grounds. Meter data must be compiled into monthly and annual summaries; meter readings can be
manual or automated.
Commit to sharing with USGBC the resulting whole-project water usage data for a five-year period
beginning on the date the project accepts LEED certification or typical occupancy, whichever comes
first.
This commitment must carry forward for five years or until the building changes ownership or lessee.
Guidance
There are no substantive changes to the prerequisite requirements from LEED v4 BD+C. Refer to the
LEED v4 BD+C reference guide, with the following additions and modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
This prerequisite was renamed to Building-Level Water Metering and reporting requirements have been
aligned with BD+C requirements.
All
Meter Declarations X
Sharing commitment X

 LEED O+M WE credit Water Performance: Installing whole building water meters is a simple yet
critical strategy for understanding total water use throughout the building life cycle. Tracking
water consumption on a regular basis supports effective water management and provides
performance data to help verify that building systems are operating as designed. Projects can
submit data via the Arc platform to comply with the prerequisite requirement to share whole-
project water usage data with USGBC and get started on the path to recertification.

WE Credit: Water Use Reduction
Intent
To reduce demand for water through high-efficiency fixtures and efficient landscaping practices.
Requirements
MF
Option 1. Total Water Use Reduction (1-10 points)
Reduce total indoor and outdoor water consumption by at least 20% over standard practices.
Demonstrate savings using the Water Reduction Calculator.
Points are awarded according to Table 1.
Table 1. Points for total water use reduction
Percentage
reduction Points
20% 3
25% 4
30% 5
35% 6
40% 7
45% 8
50% 9
55% 10
Projects attempting Option 1 are not eligible to earn points under Option 2. Outdoor and Indoor Water
Use Reduction.
OR
Option 2. Outdoor and Indoor Water Use Reduction (1-9points)
Path 1. Outdoor Water Use Reduction (1-3 points)
Efficient Landscaping

Landscape with plants that are native or adapted to the region. Points are awarded according to Table
2.
Table 2. Points for increasing native plantings, as percentage of total landscape area
Native or adapted plant area Points
> 25% 1
> 50% 2
> 75% 3
Lists of native plants are maintained by the Lady Bird Johnson Wildflower Center, the North American
Native Plant Society, state agencies, and local cooperative extension service offices and local native
plant conservation organizations.
Multifamily projects with pools and other outdoor water features must use WE Credit Total Water
Reduction.
AND/OR
Path 2. Indoor Water Use Reduction (6 points)
Multifamily
Each lavatory faucet or faucet aerator must be WaterSense labeled. The average rated flow volume
across all lavatory faucets must not exceed 1.5 gallons per minute (5.6 liters per minute) for 1 point
Each showerhead fixture and fitting must be WaterSense labeled. The average rated flow volume per
shower compartment must not exceed 2.0 gallons per minute (11.2 liters per minute) for 1 point, 1.75
gallons per minute (6.6 liters per minute) for 2 points
Each toilet fixture and fitting must be WaterSense labeled. The average rated flush volume across all
toilets must not exceed 1.28 gallons per flush (4.8 liters) for 1 point, or 1.1 gallons (4.1 liters) per flush for
2 points.
Each clothes washer must be ENERGY STAR certified or performance equivalent for projects outside
the U.S. (1 point). Projects in Europe may install residential appliances meeting the EU A+++ label.
For projects outside the United States, a local equivalent to WaterSense may be used.
Multifamily projects must meet the above requirements for all dwelling unit spaces and non-unit
(residential-associated and nonresidential) spaces. No additional credit is awarded if the fixtures and
fittings in non-dwelling unit spaces are more efficient than those of dwelling unit spaces.
Guidance
modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update

This new credit combines LEED v4 BD+C WE credit Outdoor Water Use Reduction and WE credit
Indoor Water Use Reduction and provides a performance pathway for compliance and a prescriptive
pathway for compliance. Requirements for water pressure testing and minimizing turf grass area were
removed to simplify credit requirements, and water leak testing was moved to EQp Interior Moisture
Management.
Option 1. Total Water Use Reduction
Step 1. Calculate total water use reduction
 Complete the indoor and outdoor water calculations in the Multifamily Water Reduction
Calculator based on the installed measures. Reduce aggregate water consumption by at least
20% from the baseline.
Option 2. Outdoor and Indoor Water Use Reduction
Path 1. Outdoor Water Use Reduction
Refer to Step 1 in the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction reference guide for WE credit Outdoor
Water use.
Step 2. Preliminary calculation to determine expected point achievement.
 This credit specifies minimum areas of native or adapted plants. The project must meet the
increased native or adapted plant area requirements to earn points.
 Calculate the areas on site that are planted with drought-tolerant native or adapted species at
the appropriate density for the region (see Further Explanation, Plant Areas). Calculate the
percentage of these areas with respect to the total softscape area on site.
% Native or Adapted Species = Native or Adapted Species Area / Total Softscape Area
 When determining the plant area for a native tree or shrub, calculate the total area under the
canopy.
 Determine the total designed landscape softscape area. Softscape includes the landscape area plus
areas that are mulched or otherwise not planted but are not hardscape.
 Exclude any undisturbed portion of the lot, public right-of-way, area under roof, and hardscapes,
such as walkways and driveways.
 Calculate the area of drought-tolerant plants as a percentage of the total softscape area. Include
only newly installed, not existing, plants (see Further Explanation, Example).
Refer to Table 2 to determine points earned. If less than 25% is landscaped with native or adapted
plants, the project earns no points.
Refer to Steps 3 - 5 in the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction reference guide for WE credit
Outdoor Water use.
Path 2. Indoor Water Use Reduction
Refer to the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction reference guide for WE credit Indoor Water use,
with the following modifications:

 Requirements for water pressure testing were removed.
 Requirements for water leak testing were moved to EQ p Interior Moisture Management
Further Explanation
International Tips
Refer to the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction reference guide for WE credit Indoor Water use,
with the following additions:
 Performance equivalent refers to both the energy and water criteria in the ENERGY STAR
product specifications, available on the ENERGY STAR website.
 The EU A+++ label for residential appliances is an acceptable alternative to ENERGY STAR. The
EU Ecodesign and Labelling framework establishes minimum performance standards for the
energy and environmental performance of appliances and products.
Campus
Group Approach
Option 1: All buildings in the group may be documented as one.
Option 2 - Path 1: All buildings in the group may be documented as one.
Option 2 - Path 2: Submit separate documentation for each building.
Campus Approach
Option 1: Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
Option 2 - Path 1: Eligible.
Option 2 - Path 2: Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
1 2, Path 2, Path
1 2
Site plan showing location and size of landscape zones, plant

list and documentation of any native and adapted plant by a X X
third-party entity (e.g. Cooperative Extension Service)
Water Budget Tool report X
Product cutsheets, manufacturer’s information X
X
Water Reduction Calculator
X
Alternative water source and controls calculations (if
applicable) X
Related Credit Tips

SS Credit Heat Island Reduction. Native or adapted trees can increase the albedo of dark surfaces and
hardscapes and shade south-facing fenestration while providing habitat and reducing reliance on turf
grass.
EA Credit Domestic Hot Water Pipe Insulation. Insulating hot water pipes reduces heat loss and can
raise water temperature, which can help conserve water by reducing the wait time for hot water.
Option 1. Projects that achieve savings of at least 60% can earn 1 additional point.

Exemplary performance is not available to projects pursuing Option 2.
Definitions
 average rated flush volume: for tank type toilets with dual-flush capabilities, the average rated
flush volume is the average of one full-flush and two reduced-flushes as specified by the
manufacturer.

 LEED O+M WE credit Water Performance: Selecting efficient fixtures, fittings and appliances in
the design phase helps ensure that projects will use less water throughout the building life cycle,
which may help improve a project’s water performance score. The use of alternative water
sources for appropriate end uses can further reduce demand for potable water and strain on the
local utility. Similarly, designing out the need for a permanent irrigation system, selecting native
or adapted plants for project landscaping and/or installing efficient irrigation systems reduces
irrigation water use throughout the building life cycle, which may improve a project’s water
performance score.

WE Credit: Water Metering
Intent
To support water management and identify opportunities for additional water savings by tracking water
consumption.
Requirements
MF
Option 1. Meter Water Subsystems (1 point)
Install permanent water meters for two or more of the following water subsystems, as applicable to the
project:
Irrigation. Meter water systems serving at least 80% of the irrigated landscaped area. Calculate the
percentage of irrigated landscape area served as the total metered irrigated landscape area divided by
the total irrigated landscape area. Landscape areas fully covered with xeriscaping or native vegetation
that requires no routine irrigation may be excluded from the calculation.
Indoor plumbing fixtures and fittings. Meter water systems serving at least 80% of the indoor fixtures
and fitting described in WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction, either directly or by deducting all
other measured water use from the measured total water consumption of the building and grounds.
Domestic hot water. Meter water use of at least 80% of the installed domestic hot water heating
capacity (including both tanks and on-demand heaters). A single makeup meter may record flows for
multiple water heaters.
Boilers. A single makeup meter may record flows for multiple boilers.
Reclaimed water. Meter reclaimed water, regardless of rate. A reclaimed water system with a makeup
water connection must also be metered so that the true reclaimed water component can be
determined.
Other process water. Meter water use of pools, and other significant water uses.
Cooling Towers. Meter cooling towers.
AND/OR
Option 2. Meter Dwelling Units (1 point)
Install a permanent water meter for each residential dwelling unit that measures total potable water use
for the unit. These meters need not be utility-owned/utility-grade.
Guidance
Behind the Intent

Beta Update

This is a new credit for LEED v4 Multifamily Midrise projects that rewards teams for installing water
submeters and water meters measuring total potable water use for each residential dwelling unit.
Refer to Steps 1-3 the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide for WE credit Water Metering, with the following
additions:
Option 2. Meter Dwelling Units
Step 1. Determine feasibility of metering dwelling units
Consider costs and benefits of installing a permanent water meter for each residential dwelling unit that
measures total potable water use for the unit.
Step 2. Select metering equipment
Dwelling unit meters may be manually read or connected to a building information system. The meters
may be equipped with data logging capability independent of a building information system. Meters do
not need to be utility-owned or utility grade.
Further Explanation
Campus
Group Approach
Campus Approach
Ineligible.
Option 2
Documentation Option 1
Water metering strategy narrative X
X
Related Credit Tips

WE Prerequisite Building-Level Water Metering. For this credit, submetered systems must be within the
boundaries of the whole-building water meter required for the related prerequisite.
WE Prerequisite Water Use Reduction. If fixtures and fittings submeters are used to earn this credit,
meter the water systems serving at least 80% of the indoor fixtures and fittings described in the related
prerequisite—either directly or by deducting all other measured water use from the measured total
water consumption of the building and grounds.
If irrigation submeters are used to earn this credit, meter the water systems serving at least 80% of the
irrigated landscaped area identified in the related prerequisite.

 LEED O+M WE credit Water Performance: Submetering water subsystems helps facility
managers track changes in water usage over time and provides the data necessary to identify
opportunities for water savings by end use, which may help improve a project’s water
performance score. Submetering is an important component of a successful water
management program; metered data enables monitoring of consumption and costs as well as
progress reporting throughout the building life cycle. Metering the total potable water use of
each residential dwelling units gives tenants the ability to understand and identify opportunities
to decrease their water usage.

EA Prerequisite: Fundamental Systems
Testing and Verification
Intent
To support the design, construction, and eventual operation of a project that meets the owner’s project
requirements for energy, water, indoor environmental quality, and durability.
Requirements
MF
Complete the following commissioning (Cx) process activities for mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and
renewable energy systems and assemblies, in accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 0-2013 and ASHRAE
Guideline 1.1–2007 for HVAC&R Systems, as they relate to energy, water, indoor environmental quality,
and durability.
 Develop the owner’s project requirements (OPR).

 Develop a basis of design (BOD).
Qualified Professional:
Engage a qualified professional with the following qualifications.
 The qualified professional must have documented commissioning process experience on at least
two building projects with a similar scope of work. The experience must extend from early
design phase through at least 10 months of occupancy;
 The qualified professional may be a qualified employee of the owner, an independent
consultant, or an employee of the design or construction firm who is not part of the project’s
design or construction team, or a disinterested subcontractor of the design or construction
team.
o Exception for 3. Fundamental Testing and Verification of Shared and Common Area
Systems: the qualified professional may be part of the project’s design or construction
team for projects where the central systems serving residential spaces are limited to
service water heating, fresh air systems, central exhaust air systems, and/or pumps and
heat exchangers used in conjunction with District Energy Systems (where the heating
and cooling are generated upstream of the building).
 The qualified professional must be engaged no later than the completion of contract
documents. Performance testing and verification for all systems in the scope of work must
commence before the completion of the construction phase.
* The qualified professional that performs verification in dwelling units (i.e. 1. Thermal Enclosure
Inspection and 2. Ducted heating and cooling systems) may be different from the qualified
professional who completes the remaining systems testing and verification scope of work.
Project teams that intend to pursue EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning should note a difference in the
qualifications: for the credit, the qualified professional may not be an employee of the design or
construction firm nor a subcontractor to the construction firm.
Systems Testing and Verification Scope of Work:

For all multifamily buildings, the qualified professional must complete the following fundamental testing
and verification tasks as applicable:
1. Thermal Enclosure Inspection
The qualified professional must verify each item on the LEED Multifamily Thermal Enclosure
Inspection Checklist. The requirements must be met for all residential dwelling units as well as for all
non-unit spaces.
• Certified PHIUS projects automatically meet the thermal enclosure inspection checklist
requirement.
Existing portions of an existing building are given the following allowances:
 Rater Design Review

2.1 High-Performance Fenestration not required for existing windows that are not being
replaced
 3.1 High-Performance Insulation not required for existing walls that aren’t impacted by
the renovation
2. Ducted heating and cooling systems
Case 1. For ducted heating and cooling systems that service a single residential unit that have
duct runs outside of the ‘compartmentalization boundary’:
The qualified professional must verify that all duct runs are fully ducted, and that duct
air leakage rates comply with one of the following two options:
Rough-in: The greater of ≤ 4 CFM25 per 100 sq. ft. of CFA or ≤40 CFM, with air
handler & all ducts, & duct boots installed. In addition, all duct boots sealed to
finished surface, Rater-verified at final.
Final: The greater of ≤ 8 CFM25 per 100 sq. ft. of CFA or ≤80 CFM, with the air
handler & all ducts, duct boots, & register grilles atop the finished surface (e.g.,
drywall, floor) installed
Exception: For a duct system with three or more returns, the total duct leakage
is permitted to be the greater of ≤ 6CFM25 per 100 sq. ft. of CFA or ≤ 60 CFM25
at ‘rough-in’ or the greater of ≤ 12 CFM25 per 100 sq. ft. of CFA or ≤ 120 CFM25
at ‘final’.
Case 2. For all other ducted heating and cooling systems, the qualified professional must
visually verify that all ducts are fully air sealed and that duct boots are sealed to the drywall in
accordance with design requirements.
3. Fundamental Testing and Verification of Shared and Common Area Systems
For buildings in which conditioned common or shared spaces are provided to the tenants (e.g. hallways,
common rooms, mail rooms, etc.) the qualified professional must complete the following fundamental
testing and verification tasks for the shared and common area systems scope of work, consistent with
ASHRAE Guideline 0-2013:
 Develop or approve systems checklists and test procedures (Section 12).

 Verify system test execution (Section 12).
 Maintain an issues and benefits log throughout the systems testing and verification process
(Section 13).

 Document all findings and recommendations and report directly to the owner throughout the
process.
4. Central HVAC Plant: Operations and Maintenance Plan
For buildings with central plant HVAC equipment (chilled water, condenser water, hot water), or
buildings with commercial and retail area that exceeds 20,000 square feet, the qualified professional
must prepare or review a current facilities requirements and operations and maintenance plan that
contains the information necessary to operate the building efficiently. The plan must include the
following:
 the occupancy schedule and equipment run-time schedules for any spaces that are not
operating continuously;
 setpoints for all HVAC equipment;
 minimum outside air requirements;
 any changes in schedules or setpoints for different seasons, days of the week, and times of day;
 a commissioning program that includes periodic commissioning requirements, ongoing
commissioning tasks, and continuous tasks for critical facilities.
5. Fundamental Commissioning of Mixed Use Projects
For a building with commercial and retail area that exceeds 20,000 square feet, the requirements above
that apply to multi-family components of the building still apply to the residential and common spaces.
In addition to those requirements, the commercial and retail spaces must complete the following scope
of work to be completed by a qualified commissioning professional:
Commissioning Process Scope

Complete the following commissioning (Cx) process activities for mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and
renewable energy systems and assemblies, in accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 0-2013 and ASHRAE
Guideline 1.1–2007 for HVAC&R Systems, as they relate to energy, water, indoor environmental quality,
and durability.
The commissioning authority (CxA) must do the following:
 Review the OPR, BOD, and project design.

 Develop and implement a Cx plan.
 Confirm incorporation of Cx requirements into the construction documents.
 Develop construction checklists.
 Develop a system test procedure.
 Verify system test execution.
 Maintain an issues and benefits log throughout the Cx process.
 Prepare a final Cx process report.
process.
Guidance
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
This new prerequisite combines requirements from LEED v4 BD+C EA prerequisite Fundamental
Commissioning and Verification and LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction EA prerequisite Minimum
Energy Performance. Requirements for systems testing and verification are organized into sections by
applicability to all projects, projects with shared or common area systems, projects with central HVAC
plants, and mixed-use projects.

Step 1. Develop owner’s project requirements
The owner, with the help of the design team and other stakeholders, should develop the initial owner’s
project requirements (OPR) in the predesign stage (see Integrative Process Credit and Further
Explanation, Owner’s Project Requirements).
 This document establishes the owner’s goals and the building’s intended function and operation.
 The owner will use this document as the foundation for all design, construction, acceptance, and
operational decisions.
 The OPR must include all systems to be commissioned plus the building envelope, even if full
envelope commissioning is not pursued.
Step 2. Develop basis of design
Create a basis of design (BOD) to provide clear technical guidance for the project. Start this in the
schematic design phase and update it throughout the design and construction process (see Further
Explanation, Basis of Design).
 The BOD is the project team’s interpretation of the OPR.
 Any revisions to the OPR should also be reflected in the BOD so that both documents align.
 The BOD must include building and site energy and water-using systems serving common
areas, dwelling units, and retail and commercial areas (including lighting systems and controls,
electrical systems, HVAC and refrigeration systems, plumbing and irrigation systems, and the
building envelope.
Step 3. Engage qualified professional
Identify a qualified professional or commissioning agent with the proper experience and credentials to
develop and implement effective systems testing and verification. The qualified professional must be
engaged no later than the completion of contract documents. Performance testing and verification for
all systems in the scope of work must commence before the completion of the construction phase.
 The qualified professional must have direct experience with at least two similar projects and
must have been involved from the early design phase through at least 10 months after
occupancy begins (see Further Explanation, Commissioning Authority Qualifications).
 Qualified professional requirements differ depending on the scope and size of the project. The
project team should engage one or more qualified professional(s) that have appropriate
qualifications for the goals of the program.
o The qualified professional completing the duct leakage testing and thermal enclosure
checklist must be a Home Energy Rating System (HERS) Rater or equivalent, OR for
projects outside the U.S., meet the following qualifications for education and
experience:
 Completion of one of the following forms of education
• An Associate or Bachelor’s degree program that includes coursework
in applied building science. If performing blower door testing and/or
duct leakage for the LEED project, the individual must provide
evidence that the Associate’s or Bachelor’s degree coursework
specifically covered these topics, or provide evidence of at least 4
hours of formal training for each relevant topic.
OR

• At least 4 hours of formal training in each of the following: building
science fundamentals, blower door testing (if being performed for the
project), air sealing inspections, insulation inspections, and duct
leakage testing (if being performed by the project).
 At least three years of professional experience in residential construction.
 Experience performing duct leakage testing and thermal enclosure checklist
inspections on at least two building projects with a similar scope of work
Note: The qualified professional performing the duct leakage testing (or duct visual
inspection) and thermal enclosure checklist for the residential dwelling units may be a
different individual than the qualified professional performing Fundamental testing of
shared and common areas systems and/or Commissioning of commercial and retail
systems.
o If the project is not pursuing Enhanced Commissioning Options 3 or 4, the qualified
professional responsible for 3. Fundamental Testing and Verification of Shared and
Common Area Systems, 4. Central HVAC Plant: Operations and Maintenance Plan, and
5. Fundamental Commissioning of Mixed Use Projects must have skills and experience
aligning with the complexity of the systems to be tested. In all cases, the qualifying
professional must have direct experience on at least two projects with similar scope
and complexity. For example, if the project has central chillers, the qualifying
professional must have previous experience functionally testing a chilled water system.
 For projects with very simple central systems, and having less than 20,000
square feet (1,860 square meters) of commercial and retail space, the qualified
professional may be part of the project’s design or construction team. This
option only applies for projects where the central systems serving residential
spaces are limited to service water heating, fresh air systems, central exhaust
air systems, and/or pumps and heat exchangers used in conjunction with
District Energy Systems (where the heating and cooling are generated
upstream of the building).
 For projects with more complex central systems serving residential spaces, the
qualified professional may not be part of the project’s design or construction
team. The qualified professional may be a qualified employee of the owner, an
independent consultant, an employee of the design or construction firm who is
not part of the project’s design or construction team, or a disinterested
subcontractor of the design or construction team.
o If the project is pursuing Enhanced Commissioning Options 3 or 4, the qualified
Commissioning Authority (CxA) may not be an employee of the design or construction
firm. The CxA must be either a qualified employee of the owner, an independent
consultatnt, or a disinterested subcontractor of the design team. The CxA must lead,
review, and oversee the Cx process for all systems to be commissioned, including both
Fundamental Verification and Testing and Enhanced commissioning activities. While a
different qualified professional may complete the duct leakage testing (or duct visual
inspection) and thermal enclosure checklist for the residential dwelling units, the

Commissioning Authority must witness some of the duct leakage testing and
completion of the thermal enclosure checklists.
Exception: For projects pursuing Enhanced Commissioning Option 5, Envelope Commissioning, the
building envelope commissioning agent (BeCxA) may be completely independent of the qualified
professional or lead CxA, and oversight of envelope commissioning activities by the lead CxA is not
required as long as the BeCxA meets all of the enhanced commissioning credit requirements for the
Commissioning Authority relative to the envelope systems that will be commissioned.
The use of the phrase “lead, review and oversee” defines a high level of participation while providing
some flexibility for fitting the process to the project.
Therefore, at a minimum, the qualified professional or lead commissioning agent should be participating
in ALL commissioning activities including BOTH fundamental and enhanced commissioning activities.
The exact level of leading, reviewing, and overseeing can vary based on individual project scenarios.
However, for enhanced commissioning, the entity selected as the qualified professional or lead CxA
must complete the following tasks at a minimum:
 Review owner’s project requirements and basis of design during the early design phase.
 Conduct commissioning design review prior to mid-construction documents.
 Confirm incorporation of Cx requirements into construction documents.
 Review contractor submittals applicable to systems being commissioned.
 Develop or approve construction checklists.
 Develop or approve an ongoing commissioning plan.
 Develop or approve a monitoring-based commissioning plan.
 Develop or approve system test procedures.
 Witness at least a portion of the mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and (if applicable) renewable
system functional testing that verifies installation and performance of commissioned systems.
Refer to ASHRAE Guideline 0 for additional guidance.
 Review an issues log throughout the Cx process. If the CxA does not directly update the log, the
CxA must approve all updates to the log on a continuous basis.
 Report findings directly to the owner throughout the process.
 Develop or approve systems manual updates and delivery.
 Verify operator and occupant training delivery and effectiveness.
 Develop or approve the summary commissioning report.
 Perform seasonal testing.
 Review building operation within 10 months after substantial completion.
Step 4. Complete fundamental testing and verification tasks.

Complete fundamental testing and verification tasks outlined in prerequisite requirements as applicable
to the project scope.
 1. Thermal Enclosure Inspection tasks are applicable to all projects.
 2. Ducted heating and cooling systems tasks are applicable to all projects that have ducts
supplying heating and / or cooling within residential dwelling units.
*Note that the qualified professional that performs verification of Tasks 1 and 2 may be different
from the qualified professional who completes the remaining systems testing and verification scope
of work.

 3. Fundamental Testing and Verification of Shared and Common Area systems tasks are
applicable to projects with shared and common area systems. Note that almost all projects have
shared or common area systems that require fundamental testing. In some cases, these systems
will be limited to façade and site lighting, while in other cases, the shared and common area
systems will comprise a significant portion of the building’s total energy-using systems.
 4. Central HVAC Plant: Operations and Maintenance tasks are applicable to projects with central
plant HVAC equipment or with commercial and retail area greater than 20,000 square feet
(1,860 square meters)
 5. Fundamental Commissioning of Mixed Use Projects tasks are applicable to projects with
commercial and retail area that exceeds 20,000 square feet (1,860 square meters). In addition
to complying with prerequisite requirements for residential and common spaces, a qualified
commissioning authority (CxA) must complete the scope of work for commercial and retail
spaces.
1. Thermal Enclosure Inspection

Step 1. Complete predrywall Inspection
 After units have been sealed and insulated but before drywall is installed, the energy rater must
perform the thermal enclosure inspection and compartmentalization inspection. Multifamily
buildings may require additional predrywall inspections, depending on how fire barriers are
installed.
 A blower door test is encouraged at this point to ensure that compartmentalization targets are
met.
 Insulation values and other items that affect energy performance should be compared with the
energy model to ensure alignment.
2. Ducted heating and cooling systems

Step 1. Perform inspections and functional testing
 A qualified professional must perform duct leakage testing or visual inspections as applicable
for any in-unit ducted heating or cooling systems. Ensure that the testing or visual inspection is
scheduled when the ducts are accessible for testing.
o Ducts distributing heating and / or cooling to a single residential unit and have duct
runs outside of the ‘compartmentalization boundary’ (e.g. in the attic or unconditioned
plenum) must be tested to confirm that the duct leakage rates meet the maximum air
leakage requirements.
o Ducts distributing heating and / or cooling to a single residential unit and have duct
runs entirely within the ‘compartmentalization boundary’ must be visually verified to
ensure that all ducts are fully air sealed and that duct boots are sealed to the drywall in
accordance with design requirements.
o Ducts distributing heating and / or cooling to more than one residential unit must be
visually verified to ensure that all ducts are fully air sealed and that duct boots are
sealed to the drywall in accordance with design requirements.

3. Fundamental Testing and Verification of Shared and Common Area Systems
Step 1. Develop systems test procedures.
 Identify all systems that must be included within the shared and common area system scope of
work
 Develop or approve systems checklists and test procedures (Section 12 in ASHRAE Guideline 0-
2013).
 Refer to the ENERGY STAR Multifamily New Construction program’s National HVAC Functional
Testing Checklist for functional test procedures on systems commonly found in multifamily
buildings.
Step 2. Conduct functional performance tests.

 Maintain an issues and benefits log throughout the systems testing and verification process
(Section 13).
Step 3. Document findings and recommendations.

process.
4. Central HVAC Plant: Operations and Maintenance Plan

Step 1. Compile current facility requirements and operations and maintenance plan
Prepare and maintain a current facility requirements (CFR) and operations and maintenance (O&M)
plan that contains the information necessary to operate the building efficiently. This information is
covered in the OPR, BOD, and functional test scripts, but more information may be taken from specific
submittals or equipment operations and maintenance manuals. The plan must include the following:
 Sequences of operation for the building
 Building occupancy schedule
 Equipment run-time schedules
 Setpoints for all HVAC equipment
 Lighting levels throughout the building
 Minimum outside air requirements
 Changes in schedules or setpoints for different seasons, days of the week, and times of day
 Systems narrative describing the mechanical and electrical systems and equipment
 Preventive maintenance plan for building equipment described in the systems narrative
 Cx program that includes periodic Cx requirements, ongoing Cx tasks, and continuous tasks for
critical facilities
5. Fundamental Commissioning of Mixed Use Projects

Refer to Steps 4 – 14 in the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide for EA prerequisite Fundamental
Commissioning and Verification.
Mixed-use projects where all of the mixed-use commercial or retail space is incomplete space are
exempt from prerequisite requirements for 5. Fundamental Commissioning of Mixed Use Projects.
Further Explanation
Thermal Enclosure Inspection, Ducted heating and cooling systems and Fundamental Testing and
Verification of Shared and Common Area Systems
Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C: Multifamily Midrise reference guide for EA prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance.

Central HVAC Plant: Operations and Maintenance Plan and Fundamental Commissioning of Mixed
Use Projects
Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide for EA prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and
Verification.
Campus
Group Approach
Campus Approach
Projects Projects
with with >
central 20,000
All
Documentation plant square feet
Projects
HVAC commercial
/ retail
Qualified Professional’s experience

X
Confirmation of OPR and BOD contents

X
List of central and common area systems receiving functional X

testing and/or commissioning
List of commercial/retail systems commissioned X
Verification of Fundamental Testing and Verification activities X

and reviews
Cx plan X
Documentation of testing and verification (including X

completed functional tests and issues summary log)
CFR, O&M plan for central HVAC plants X X
Cx report X
Thermal Enclosure Inspection report (samples from each unit X

type)
If applicable, duct leakage testing reports, or visual verification X

of duct sealing inspection report
Related Credit Tips

Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide, with the following modifications:

 EA credit Whole Building Energy Monitoring and Reporting. Meeting the related credit
requirements will help projects teams achieve the ongoing commissioning portions of this
prerequisite.
 EA credit Renewable Energy. Renewable energy systems installed on-site must be
commissioned under this prerequisite.
Referenced Standards:
 ASHRAE Guideline 0–2013, The Commissioning Process
 ASHRAE Guideline 1.1–2007, HVAC&R Technical Requirements for the Commissioning Process
 ENERGY STAR Multifamily New Construction program
 ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380-2019
 LEED Multifamily Thermal Enclosure Inspection Checklist
Connection to Ongoing Building Performance

 LEED O+M EA credit Energy Performance: Testing building systems after installation is
fundamental to ensuring that systems function as designed. The development of a
commissioning plan ensures that the building owner and facility managers have the information
necessary to operate the building efficiently.

EA Prerequisite: Minimum Energy Performance
Intent
To reduce the environmental and economic harms of excessive energy use by achieving a minimum
level of energy efficiency for the building and its systems.
Requirements
MF
Dwelling-Unit heating and cooling systems
Complete unit by unit load calculations for each unique unit type. Select equipment sizes for all
individual systems serving dwelling units to meet the following equipment selection sizing guidelines, or
next nominal size:
 Cooling Equipment:
o Single-Speed Compressor: 90-130% of total heat gain
o Two-Speed Compressor: 90-140% of total heat gain
o Variable-Speed Compressor: 90-160% of total heat gain
 Heating Equipment:
o 100-140% of total heat loss
AND
Option 1. Energy Performance Compliance
Available for projects within the scope of ASHRAE 90.1-2016.
Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2016, with errata or a USGBC-approved equivalent

standard.
ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Compliance pathways in Section 4.2.1.1 include compliance with all mandatory
provisions, and compliance with one of the following:
 Prescriptive provisions of Sections 5 through 10

 Section 11 Energy Cost Budget Method
 Normative Appendix G Performance Rating Method. When using Appendix G, the Performance
Cost Index (PCI) shall be less than or equal to the Performance Cost Index Target (PCI t ) in
accordance with the methodology provided in Section 4.2.1.1. Document the PCI, PCI t , and
percentage improvement using metrics of cost or greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions.

For projects using Normative Appendix G Performance Rating Method:
 Greenhouse gas emissions: The total greenhouse gas emissions, in terms of carbon dioxide
equivalents, shall be calculated for the baseline building performance rating and for the
proposed building performance rating, and the percentage improvement shall be determined
using carbon dioxide equivalent emissions.

US and Canada:
o use U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) regional grid mix coefficients to
calculate GHG emissions by energy source; or
o use hourly emissions profiles from U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA)
AVoided Emissions and geneRation Tool (AVERT)
International:
o use national grid mix coefficients from the International Energy Agency CO2 Emissions
from Fuel Combustion 2017 report to calculate GHG emissions by energy source
o ISO 52000-1:2017: Greenhouse gas emission factors for each building energy source
shall be determined consistently with ISO Standard 52000-1:2017 and published for the
country or region where the project is located
 Exception to Mandatory Measures requirements: For ASHRAE 90.1-2016 mandatory controls

provisions that are quantified in the Appendix G Performance Rating Method, (e.g. lighting
occupancy sensor controls, lighting daylighting controls, automated receptacle controls, etc.),
projects may model the Proposed Building Performance control parameters identically to the
Baseline Building Performance control parameters in lieu of compliance with the mandatory
provisions.
 Exceptional Calculations modeled in accordance with Section G2.5 may be modeled to

document minimum prerequisite compliance.
 Only on-site or on-campus renewable energy that meets ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2016 Section G
2.4.1 requirements for on-site renewable energy may be used to meet minimum ASHRAE
Standard 90.1-2016 performance requirements.
OR
Option 2. Prescriptive Compliance: New Building Institute Multifamily Guide
Design and construct a multifamily building according to the requirements of the New Buildings
Institute Multifamily Guide.
Comply with the mandatory provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2016 (with errata).
Comply with the thirteen requirements in the New Buildings Institute Multifamily Guide (not including
the six “Additional Efficiency Packages”).
OR
Option 3. Dwelling Unit Energy Simulation
Option 3 is available to buildings that meet one of the criteria below:
 Less than 4 habitable stories, OR

 Less than 20,000 square feet of combined retail or commercial space, OR
 At least 80% of the gross building area consists of residential dwelling units
Case 1. New Construction

Achieve a HERS Index rating that meets or exceeds the ENERGY STAR v3 HERS Index Target
(or USGBC-approved equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
Exception: If all requirements of the program are met except for the use of a credentialed HVAC
contractor, this requirement shall be considered satisfied, even though the home may not be
eligible to earn the ENERGY STAR.
When installed, at least one of the following appliances must be ENERGY STAR certified (or
performance equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) and installed in each dwelling unit:
 refrigerator;
 dishwasher; or
 clothes washer.
Case 2. Major Renovation
Achieve a HERS Index rating that meets or exceeds a HERS 85 (or USGBC-approved equivalent
for projects outside the U.S.).
When installed, at least one of the following appliances must be ENERGY STAR certified (or
performance equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) and installed in each dwelling unit:
 refrigerator;
 dishwasher; or
 clothes washer.
Guidance
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
Updated referenced standards and a new greenhouse gas emissions metric ensure that LEED continues
to be a global leadership standard for energy performance and encourage owners to directly consider
and address building carbon emissions.
ASHRAE Standard 209 provides a step-by-step methodology for applying energy modeling to inform
the design process. Project teams are encouraged, though not required, to apply the guidance in
ASHRAE Standard 209 as a best-practice approach for informing design through energy modeling.
Following the guidance in Standard 209 will help project teams document achievement of LEED EA
prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance Prerequisite, EA credit Optimize Energy Performance, and
the energy modeling requirements for IP credit Integrative Process.
Step 1. Identify energy use target for building

This step is required for all projects pursuing credit under EA credit Optimize Energy Performance, and
recommended for all other projects.

Set an energy goal for the project early in the design process. Identifying an energy goal can help
prioritize efficiency strategies, integrate systems, reduce first costs, and improve building performance.
For EA credit Optimize Energy Performance, the target must be established using one of the following
metrics:
 kBtu per square foot-year (kWh per square meter-year) of site energy use
 kBtu per square foot-year (kWh per square meter-year) of source energy use
 pounds per square foot-year (Kg per square meter-year) of greenhouse gas emissions
 energy cost per square foot-year (cost per square meter-year)
Consider using ENERGY STAR’s Target Finder to develop the EUI goal that will meet the credit
requirements.
Consider applying the guidance in ASHRAE Standard 209 Section 5.4 and Informative Appendix B
(Benchmark Information) when establishing the energy goal for the project.
Step 2. Select option for credit compliance.

Select the appropriate option in EA credit Optimize Energy Performance for the project (see Further
Explanation, Selecting an Option). Review the requirements for EA credit Optimize Energy Performance
before making a selection.
 Option 1. Energy Performance Compliance is available to projects within the scope of ASHRAE
90.1-2016, which includes multifamily structures of four or more stories above grade, nursing
homes, and mixed use structures of four or more stories above grade. For projects using this
method, a Baseline Building Performance Model and Proposed Building Performance model are
developed consistent with ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Appendix G, Performance Rating Method.
o For projects outside of the scope of ASHRAE 90.1-2016, contact USGBC if interested in
applying the ASHRAE modeling path.
 Option 2. Prescriptive Compliance New Buildings Institute Multifamily Guide is for projects
intending to apply prescriptive packages of efficiency measures according to the requirements
of the New Buildings Institute Multifamily Guide (NBI Multifamily Guide). Projects must comply
with the mandatory provisions of ASHRAE 90.1-2016 to apply these options. Projects pursuing
this option should work with the architect and engineers to assess the mandatory ASHRAE
90.1–2016 requirements and the prescriptive requirements identified in the Multifamily Guide
for the project’s climate zone. This includes an integrated bundle of thirteen measures
addressing windows, infiltration, thermal bridging, HVAC, interior and exterior lighting, water
heating and appliances. The NBI Multifamily Guide requires on-site verification of the envelope
infiltration rate through blower door testing. Visual verification of air sealing does not meet the
requirements stipulated in the NBI Multifamily Guide. Projects may achieve additional credit
under Optimize Energy Performance by including additional efficiency packages specified in
the NBI Multifamily Guide.
 Option 3. Dwelling Unit Simulation is for projects pursuing dwelling unit energy simulation
using the ENERGY STAR HERS program.
o Option 3 is a prescriptive option available for projects with less than 4 habitable
stories, less than 20,000 square feet (1858 square meters) of combined retail or
commercial space, or at least 80% of the gross building area consisting of residential
dwelling units.
o For projects that do not meet the criteria above, contact USGBC if interested in
applying the Dwelling Unit Simulation path.
o The Dwelling Unit Energy Simulation path requires preparing an energy model, known
as a HERS rating. The HERS rating uses a scale, or index, in which a home built to the
specifications of the HERS reference home (based on the 2006 International Energy
Conservation Code) achieves a score of 100, and a net zero-energy home scores 0. The

HERS index takes into account the size of building elements (window, floor, roof, and
ceiling areas) and the characteristics of mechanical systems, lights, appliances, and
insulation. The lower a home's HERS index, the more energy efficient it is compared
with the HERS reference home. Each one-point decrease in the HERS index
corresponds to an estimated 1% reduction in energy consumption compared with the
HERS reference home. Thus a home with a HERS index of 75 is 25% more energy
efficient than the HERS reference home.
o The ENERGY STAR HERS index target varies based on the size of the home and the
number of bedrooms. ENERGY STAR requires that large homes with few bedrooms be
designed and built to higher performance standards than smaller homes with more
bedrooms. Unlike the ASHRAE 90.1 modeling methodology, the HERS software
automatically establishes the reference building parameters, and identifies the HERS
Index target for the project. Therefore, it is necessary to use approved software when
pursuing this option.
 If the project is not pursuing any points under EA credit Optimize Energy Performance and is
within the scope of ASHRAE 90.1-2016, the project may also demonstrate EA prerequisite
Minimum Energy Performance compliance using ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Section 11 Energy Cost
Budget, or ASHRAE 90.1-2016 prescriptive compliance. The Energy Cost Budget option uses
energy modeling with trade-offs, but has different Baseline building modeling requirements
than the normative Appendix G performance rating method. The prescriptive option requires
compliance with the prescriptive requirements indicated in Sections 5.5, 6.5, 7.5, and 9.2.2.
Step 3. Analyze Efficiency Measures.

To achieve EA credit Optimize Energy Performance, project teams must analyze efficiency measures
during the design process, focusing on load reduction and HVAC-related strategies (passive measures)
appropriate for the facility, and account for the results during design decision making.
For projects using Option 1. Energy Performance Compliance or Option 3. Dwelling Unit Energy
Simulation, the best approach for analyzing efficiency measures is a preliminary energy model, which
evaluates heating and cooling load reduction strategies, passive HVAC strategies, and HVAC efficiency
and control strategies (see Further Explanation, Developing a Preliminary Energy Model and Further
Explanation, Modeling HVAC Systems). ASHRAE Standard 209 provides a standardized methodology
which may be used for developing preliminary energy models that are used to inform the design
process (See ASHRAE 209 Sections 6.3 - Load Reduction Modeling and 6.4 - HVAC System Selection
Modeling).
 Developing an early model of the proposed design will help the design team explore the
energy consequences of design options and will provide an early estimate of energy
performance.
 When evaluating energy usage in different scenarios, consider strategies for lighting and
daylighting, envelope, orientation, and passive conditioning and ventilating systems, in terms of
projected energy savings and capital costs as they relate to all building systems. If pursuing
the Integrative Process Credit, evaluate these parameters at a concept level early in design.
Project teams may also use past energy analyses of similar buildings or published energy modeling
results such as the NBI Multifamily Guide to guide decision making in lieu of a preliminary energy model,
though the results will be less project-specific.
Step 4. Complete unit by unit load calculations and design HVAC system.
Prior to selecting the HVAC equipment for the dwelling units, complete unit by unit load calculations for
each unique unit type. A qualified party should design the HVAC system, following Manuals J, D, and S,
to ensure proper sizing of equipment and the distribution system.

Select equipment sizes for all individual systems serving dwelling units to meet equipment selection
sizing guidelines in rating system requirements, or the next nominal size.
Follow HVAC load calculation and equipment selection sizing guidelines laid out by the EPA, specifically
in the ENERGY STAR Multifamily New Construction program. These requirements include:
 Cooling system Equipment:

o Single-Speed Compressor: 90-130% of total heat gain
o Two-Speed Compressor: 90-140% of total heat gain
o Variable-Speed Compressor: 90-160% of total heat gain
 Heating Equipment:
o 100-140% of total heat loss, or next nominal size
Parameters used in the design calculations shall reflect the unit’s actual specifications, specifically,
outdoor design temperatures, orientation, number of bedrooms, conditioned floor area, window area,
predominant window performance and insulation levels, infiltration rate, mechanical ventilation rate,
presence of MERV6 or better filter, and indoor temperature setpoints = 70° F for heating; 75°F for
cooling.
In addition, the internal loads must be within 80% to 200% of the loads listed in 2009 ASHRAE
Handbook of Fundamentals, or 80% to 150% of Manual J v8. If there are uncommon internal loads, they
can be added as supplemental calculations outside of these limits, but the mechanical engineer will have
to support their claim for adding any these additional internal loads.
If cooling design day outdoor temperatures are augmented to account for climate change, a narrative
shall be provided identifying how the cooling design day temperatures were determined.

Step 1. Determine climate zone
Identify the project’s climate zone according to ASHRAE 90.1–2016, Annex 1 (see Further Explanation,
Climate Zone Determination).
Step 2. Review and address ASHRAE mandatory requirements

Early in the design process, review the mandatory provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–
2016, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.). Read
through Sections 5.4, 6.4, 7.4, 8.4, 9.4, and 10.4 to understand how the building design must respond to
these requirements. Many mandatory requirements can easily be incorporated to the project in early
design, but are much harder to incorporate later in design and/or during construction.
 Typically, the architect is responsible for Section 5.4, Building Envelope; the mechanical
engineer and plumbing designer are responsible for Sections 6.4, HVAC, and 7.4, Service Water
Heating; and the electrical engineer is responsible for Sections 8.4, Power, and 9.4, Lighting.
Compliance with Section 10.4 requires coordination across multiple disciplines.
 Ensure that the project complies with the mandatory measures throughout the design,
construction, and commissioning process, particularly when major design decisions are
implemented.
 Confirm that compliant components are included in the final construction documents.
 If compliance with ASHRAE 90.1-2016 mandatory provisions will be a hardship for the project,
and the project intends to demonstrate compliance using Option 1: Energy Performance
Compliance, identify whether the mandatory provisions have been quantified in the Appendix G
Performance Rating Method (e.g. lighting occupancy sensor controls, lighting daylighting
controls, automated receptacle controls, etc.). For mandatory measures where Appendix G
provides a methodology for demonstrating savings between the Baseline Building Performance
(BBP) and the Proposed Building Performance (PBP), projects may model the Proposed

Building Performance control parameters identically to the Baseline Building Performance
control parameters in lieu of compliance with the mandatory provisions.
Step 3. Develop preliminary energy model or alternate energy analysis
See Step 3. Analyze Efficiency Measures, above.
Step 4. Ongoing iterations of Design Phase Energy Model

Once the HVAC system and other design parameters are established, build or update the proposed
building energy model to reflect the anticipated design (see Further Explanation, Building the Proposed
Energy Model).
 Update the proposed model to reflect changes that occur throughout the design process to
optimize energy performance and assist with design decisions.
 Ensure that all efficiency strategies are analyzed well before design documents are finalized.
 For elements or systems that cannot be readily modeled by the software or to document credit
for unregulated loads, use the Exceptional Calculation Method (see Further Explanation,
Exceptional Calculation Method and Common Issues with Energy Modeling).
 Energy costs and greenhouse gas emissions offset by on-site or on-campus renewable energy
systems count towards energy savings for compliance with the prerequisite when these
systems are included on the building permit or on a master site permit including the building
for a contiguous campus consistent with ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2016 Section G2.4.1
requirements. ASHRAE 90.1-2016 defines on-site renewable energy as “energy generated from
renewable sources produced at the building site”, which includes on-site photovoltaics
systems, wind generators, or thermal or electric generation from biofuel sourced from the
project or campus site, but does not include electric generation or thermal generation from off-
site renewable sources.
 Energy costs and greenhouse gas emissions offset by New off-site renewable energy systems
qualifying under EA credit Renewable Energy may be included in the model for achievement of
points using the greenhouse gas emissions calculation under the related credit, but may not be
included in the model for prerequisite compliance.
Build a baseline model that reflects the minimum requirements according to ASHRAE 90.1–2016,
Appendix G (see Further Explanation, Building the Baseline Energy Model).
 When modifications are made to the proposed energy model, update the baseline accordingly.
 Consider constructing the baseline model early in the design process so that the design team
can see the effect of design changes on the percentage savings relative to ASHRAE 90.1. This
will contribute toward achieving more points under the related credit.
 Use the Minimum Energy Performance Calculator to help create the baseline model. This tool
was designed to help project teams create a baseline model in alignment with Appendix G
requirements.
Update the proposed energy model as necessary to reflect final construction details and specifications
and make any necessary corresponding updates to the baseline model (see Further Explanation,
Finalizing the Energy Models).

Compare the proposed model with the baseline model to determine the anticipated energy cost and
greenhouse gas emissions savings (see Further Explanation, Energy Savings). Either metric may be used
to show prerequisite compliance.
Option 2. Prescriptive Compliance: New Buildings Institute Multifamily Guide
Comply with the thirteen requirements in the New Buildings Institute Multifamily Guide (not including
the six “Additional Efficiency Packages”).
Prepare final ASHRAE 90.1 documentation confirming compliance with the mandatory requirements of
ASHRAE 90.1-2016.
For projects pursuing Optimize Energy Performance, see Step-by-Step Guidance, Prescriptive
Compliance.
Step 1. Develop preliminary energy model or alternate energy analysis
See Step 3. Analyze Efficiency Measures, above.
Step 2. Ongoing iterations of Design Phase Energy Model
 Create a preliminary HERS model for each unit type in the project based on the preliminary
design parameters. If the projected HERS index is higher than the ENERGY STAR target for any
unit (or HERS 85 for major renovation projects), modify the design to meet the prerequisite
requirements. Analyze and incorporate additional efficiency measures as appropriate to meet
the energy use targets set for the project.
 Update the proposed model to reflect changes that occur throughout the design process to
optimize energy performance and assist with design decisions.
 Ensure that all efficiency strategies are analyzed well before design documents are finalized.
 The final energy model must include the confirmed envelope and duct leakage rates, insulation
installation grading, equipment efficiencies, and all other energy-related specifications of the
building.
Prerequisite Compliance Only – ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Section 11 Energy Cost Budget

For projects that are not pursuing EA credit Optimize Energy Performance, and are documenting
compliance using ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Section 11, Energy Cost Budget, complete the ASHRAE 90.1
Section 11 design energy cost and energy cost budget models, and complete the ASHRAE 90.1
Mandatory measure checklists and ECB forms demonstrating compliance.
Prerequisite Compliance Only – ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Prescriptive Compliance

For projects that are not pursuing EA credit Optimize Energy Performance, and are documenting
compliance using ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Prescriptive compliance, complete the ASHRAE 90.1 prescriptive
and mandatory measure checklists.
Further Explanation
ASHRAE 90.1 Calculations
For projects using ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Appendix G, Performance Rating Method, the following equations
apply:
Equation 1. Section G1.2.2: Performance Cost Index

Performance Cost Index = Proposed building performance / Baseline building performance.
where Proposed building performance and Baseline building performance are calculated in
accordance with ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Appendix G.
Equation 2. Section 4.2.1. Performance Cost Index
PCI t = [BBUEC + (BPF x BBREC)] / BBP
where:
PCI = Performance Cost Index calculated in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Section G1.2 as
described above.
BBUEC = Baseline Building Unregulated Energy Cost, the portion of the annual energy cost of a
baseline building design that is due to unregulated energy use.
BBREC = Baseline Building Regulated Energy Cost, the portion of the annual energy cost of a
baseline building design that is due to regulated energy use.
BPF = Building Performance Factor from Table 4.2.1.1. For building area types not listed in Table
4.2.1.1 use “All others.” Where a building has multiple building area types, the required BPF shall
be equal to the area-weighted average of the building area types. The Building Performance
Factors from Table 4.2.1.1 (BPF) represent the average ratio of ASHRAE 90.1-2004 versus
ASHRAE 90.1-2016 regulated energy cost for a given building type and climate. For example, a
BPF of 0.59 represents an ASHRAE 90.1-2016 regulated energy cost that is 59% of the 90.1-
2004 regulated cost for the given building type and climate. Table 4.2.1.1 lists
BBP = Baseline Building Performance.
Regulated energy use shall be determined consistent with the definitions provided in the ENERGY STAR
MFHR Simulation Guidelines Appendix G 90.1-2016 Version 1.0, December 2017: Energy used by building
systems and components with requirements prescribed in ASHRAE 90.1 Sections 5 through 10. This
includes energy used for interior lighting including lighting inside dwelling units, exterior lighting, service
hot water (SWH) heating, space heating, humidification, dehumidification, mechanical cooling, heat
rejection, cooling towers, HVAC supply, return, and exhaust fans, heat recovery fans and wheel energy,
hydronic pumping including SHW recirculation and booster pumps, elevators, in-building transformers,
and other building systems, components, and processes with requirements prescribed in Sections 5
through 10.
All other energy use shall be considered unregulated energy use.
Equations 1 and 2 adjustments for greenhouse gas emission metric:

When using Greenhouse gas emissions as the metric, replace all ASHRAE 90.1-2016 references to cost
with Greenhouse Gas Emissions (CO2 equivalent emissions). Rather than using utility rates, use the
appropriate greenhouse gas emission coefficients for each energy source (See Further Explanation,
Greenhouse Gas Emissions)
Climate Zone Determination

Determining the right climate zone for the project is essential, since the requirements are specific to
each climate zone. ASHRAE 90.1–2016 defines eight climate zones (Miami is in climate zone 1;
Anchorage is in climate zone 8) and three climate types: A (moist), B (dry), and C (marine).
To find the project’s climate zone and type, consult ASHRAE 90.1–2016, Annex 1. For projects in the U.S,
refer to the appropriate state and county in Table Annex 1-1. For projects in Canada, refer to the
province and location in Table Annex 1-2. For locations outside of the U.S. and Canada, refer to the
closest or most similar location in Table Annex 1-3.
Energy Modeler Qualifications

Refer to the LEED v4 reference guide for projects using Option 1. Energy Performance Compliance.
For projects using Option 3. Dwelling Unit Energy Simulation, the energy modeler should have
experience or training with the following:
 Basic principles of building science (i.e., viewing the home as a system)
 Thermal resistance of insulation materials
 The minimum rated features for buildings
 Blower door testing procedures
 Duct leakage testing procedures
 Variations in construction types and their ramifications
 Types and efficiencies of windows
 Types and efficiencies of heating, cooling, water heating, and lighting systems
 Types and characteristics of space conditioning and domestic hot water distribution systems
 Types of thermostatic controls
 Determination of azimuth
 Determination of air leakage
 Determination of fuels used by major appliances
 Utility rate structures
 Producing a scaled and dimensioned drawing of a home
 Calculating the area of rectangles, triangles, circles, ovals and combinations of these shapes
 Calculating the volume of boxes, pyramids, spheres, and other geometric shapes
 Completing a home energy rating checklist or entering data into a home energy rating software
program
 Completing a home energy improvement analysis or entering data into a home energy rating
software program that performs improvements analysis
 Quality assurance
Developing an ASHRAE 90.1 Preliminary Energy Model

Refer to the LEED v4 reference guide, with the following addition:
 See ASHRAE 209 Sections 6.3 - Load Reduction Modeling for further guidance.
Modeling HVAC Systems per ASHRAE 90.1

Refer to the LEED v4 reference guide, with the following addition:
 See ASHRAE 209 Section 6.4 - HVAC System Selection Modeling for further guidance.
Building the Proposed Building Performance Model
A team that has already prepared a preliminary model may update it to reflect the newest design
information throughout the project.
Create or update proposed building characteristics based on the latest information and specifications
on systems, assemblies, and equipment in the current design. This can be accomplished as early as
design development to estimate projected savings, and later updated when the construction documents
are complete. Then analyze remaining efficiency strategies that the team would like to consider before
the design documents are finalized. For example, the proposed building performance energy model
could be used to evaluate the performance and cost implications of value engineering decisions.
In most cases, the ASHRAE 90.1 proposed building performance model will exactly mirror the project
design. However, ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G indicates some specific cases where the modeled
parameters may vary from the actual design. Examples include:
1. All conditioned spaces in the proposed design, with the exception of a few space types must be
simulated as being both heated and cooled even if a heating or cooling system is not installed
(Table G3.1(Proposed)(1)(b)).

2. HVAC fans used for ventilation shall be cycled on and off to meet heating loads during
unoccupied hours, even if the systems are scheduled to remain off during unoccupied hours in
the project design (Table G3.4(Proposed)(4)).
3. Lighting in unfinished spaces shall be modeled as meeting ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Table 9.5.1
prescriptive requirements.
Building the ASHRAE 90.1 Baseline Building Performance Model
Developing the baseline building performance model is a detailed process that requires a good working
knowledge of ASHRAE 90.1–2016, Appendix G. The baseline model represents a typical design for a
building of the same size, function, and number of floors as the proposed building. It meets the
prescriptive and mandatory requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2004 for a building with standard practice
HVAC, lighting, plumbing and envelope systems.
In general, baseline building performance energy model development begins by changing the inputs for
all the components, assemblies, systems, and controls of the proposed building performance energy
model to values, types, and controls prescribed in accordance with 90.1–2016 Appendix G. Whereas
previous versions of ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G required the energy modeler to determine Baseline
parameters by referring to the prescriptive requirements in Sections 5 through 10 of the standard,
ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Appendix G is self-contained, and includes the relevant referenced requirements
within the Appendix. This should simplify the Baseline modeling process for projects using Appendix G.
Determine or update all relevant baseline inputs for the appropriate climate zone, building type, and
building area.
When developing the baseline building performance model, assure that additional HVAC system types
in addition to the predominant HVAC system type are modeled as required in G3.1.1 (b) through (h).
Spaces that are served by a different HVAC system in the proposed design due to load or schedule
variances, different building functions, or cross-contamination requirements, will also often be served by
a different system type in the baseline building due to the requirements stipulated in G3.1.1(b) through
(h). Examples include:
 Per G3.1.1(b), a security office operating 24x7 and a kitchen with high peak summer cooling
loads located in a midrise office building will each be modeled with a single zone system in the
Baseline due to peak thermal loads that differ by 10 Btu/h*sq ft or more from the average of
other spaces served by the system, and/or schedules that differ by more than 40 equivalent
full-load hours from other spaces served by the system.
 Laboratory spaces in buildings with significant laboratory exhaust will be modeled as a single
VAV system serving only those spaces per G3.1.1(d).
 A mixed use residential and non-residential building will be modeled with both residential and
non-residential system types if the total area associated with each space type exceeds 20,000
square feet per G3.1.1(b).
 A heated only warehouse space will be modeled with a heated-only system (System type 9 or
10) while the adjacent office area will be modeled with both cooling and heating per G3.1.1(e).
If the energy simulation software automates some or all the baseline generation, review the automated
baseline model inputs against the expected baseline values and confirm consistency (see Further
Explanation, Common Issues with Energy Modeling).
Preparation of the initial baseline building performance model is best undertaken during the design
development phase, after major design decisions have been made, so that modeling can evaluate
whether the project is likely to meet energy savings targets (or achieve points under the related credit).
The baseline building performance model will typically need to be updated upon completion of the final
project design.
Finalizing the ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Models

Refer to the LEED v4 reference guide, with the following modifications:
 Replace all instances of ASHRAE 90.1-2010 with ASHRAE 90.1-2016

 Baseline system heating type is dependent on climate zone rather than predominant heating
source used in the building. Baseline systems in climate zone 0 to 3A are modeled with electric
heating and baseline systems in climate zones 3B through 8 are modeled with fossil fuel heating.
ASHRAE 90.1 Model Schedules

Refer to the LEED v4 reference guide.
ASHRAE 90.1 Model Energy Savings
For EA prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and EA credit Optimize Energy Performance,
modeled energy savings must be reported on an energy cost basis using actual utility rates, and on a
greenhouse gas emissions basis using approved coefficients.
Ensure that utility rates and emissions factors are applied consistently between the baseline building
performance and proposed building performance models for each energy source, as well as for any
applicable renewable energy calculations in EA prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, EA credit
Optimize Energy Performance, and EA credit Renewable Energy.
ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Cost
Using energy cost savings as a metric for overall building energy efficiency is important for several
reasons. It aligns with the energy modeling procedures in ASHRAE 90.1–2016, Appendix G, and provides
a uniform metric for all fuel types. It captures the relative effects of various efficiency measures on
energy demand and long-term operating costs—valuable metrics for the owner in determining the
overall cost-effectiveness of selected efficiency strategies. And finally, the energy cost savings metric
can help designers understand energy consumption because in many cases, cost and environmental
impacts of each fuel source are correlated.
For prerequisite compliance on-site renewable energy that complies with ASHRAE 90.1-2016
requirements may be modeled as “free” in the Proposed energy model. Per ASHRAE 90.1-2016, to
qualify as an on-site system, the renewable energy must be generated on-site from renewable sources
produced at the building, and the system must be part of the project scope of work. For LEED, projects
that are in the scope of work for a contiguous campus development that includes the LEED project, and
are generated on the campus from on-site renewable resources produced at the campus may also be
modeled as on-site renewable system. Examples of on-site renewable energy generation include:
 A photovoltaic array located on the project site.

 A wind tower located on a contiguous campus owned by the same entity as the project
building.
 Landfill gas processed in digesters on a contiguous campus owned by the same entity as
the project building, and used to produce thermal energy in the project building.
Note: earlier versions of LEED allowed some biofuels produced off-site to qualify as on-site renewable
energy. However, based on the clarifications provided in ASHRAE 90.1-2016 for on-site renewable
energy, and the clearer distinction between on-site and off-site renewable energy in LEED v4.1, biofuels
are only considered on-site renewable systems when the renewable source is harvested on site or on a
contiguous campus, and used for on-site generation of electric or thermal energy. Furthermore, the
renewable system must be part of the LEED project scope of work (or campus development scope of
work including the project) under the ASHRAE 90.1-2016 requirements.
ASHRAE 90.1 Greenhouse Gas Emissions
LEED v4.1 incorporates greenhouse gas emissions (also referred to as CO2 equivalent emissions) as a
metric for building energy performance. Understanding greenhouse gas emissions from building energy
use and prioritizing building emissions reductions is critical for addressing climate change.
Projects in the U.S. and Canada may use the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) regional grid
mix coefficients to calculate GHG electricity emissions. For a more granular picture of greenhouse gas
emissions reduced as a result of building efficiency, renewables procurement, and demand response or

grid harmonization strategies, projects are encouraged to use hourly electricity emissions profiles in
energy model runs. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s AVoided Emissions and geneRation
Tool (AVERT) provides hourly electricity emissions data for 10 grid regions in the U.S. based on
historical patterns of actual generation. To use hourly greenhouse gas emissions, multiply the hourly
modeled electric energy consumption by the hourly emissions coefficient, and sum the total annual
greenhouse gas emissions for the energy source. Some energy software can include this hourly
emissions calculation directly into the energy model (similar to a utility rate), while other energy
software may require post-processing of hourly electric consumption to perform the simple calculation.
For non-electric sources in the U.S., the current U.S. EPA coefficients shall be used to calculate GHG
emissions by energy source.
International projects may use national coefficients from the International Energy Agency CO2
Emissions from Fuel Combustion 2017 report to calculate GHG emissions by energy source, or
determine greenhouse gas emissions factors for each building energy source based on ISO 52000-
1:2017 Energy Performance of Buildings. USGBC may accept hourly emissions data for local grid regions,
where available, on a case by case basis.
For projects that are using biofuels to generate electricity or heat within the building, contact USGBC to
discuss the appropriate method for deriving Greenhouse Gas Emission factors.
For prerequisite compliance, only renewable energy meeting the ASHRAE 90.1-2016 definition for on-
site renewable energy may be modeled for credit when using the GHG metric for compliance. For
Optimize Energy Performance credit compliance, new off-site renewable energy may also be modeled
for credit.
ASHRAE 90.1 Exceptional Calculation Method

Refer to the LEED v4 reference guide, with the following modifications:
 Replace all instances of ASHRAE 90.1–2010 with ASHRAE 90.1–2016

 Delete the first paragraph in the Additional guidance section
 Delete the Changes from earlier versions of ASHRAE and LEED section
ASHRAE 90.1-2016 versus 2010

The referenced standard for building the baseline model for this prerequisite has been updated to
ASHRAE 90.1–2016, which represents a substantial increase in efficiency from ASHRAE 90.1–2010. Some
of the major changes are described in Tables 1 and 2. Detailed changes between ASHRAE 90.1-2010 and
ASHRAE 90.1-2013 are described in ASHRAE 90.1-2013 Appendix F. Detailed changes between ASHRAE
90.1-2013 and 90.1-2016 are summarized in ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Informative Appendix H.
Table 1. Changes in ASHRAE 90.1 mandatory requirements

Building Envelope ASHRAE 90.1-2016
Requirement
Heated or Cooled Vestibule Requires heated or cooled vestibules to limit setpoint temperatures,
requirement (6.4.3.9) and automatically shut off heating when outdoor air temperature
exceeds a certain level.
Verification of Envelope Adds verification requirements for envelope components including
requirements (4.2.4, 4.2.5, insulation, air leakage, and other properties.
5.2.1, 5.2.9)
HVAC & Refrigeration ASHRAE 90.1-2016
Requirement
Refrigerators and Freezers Maximum energy consumption regulated for some commercial
(Tables 6.8.1-12 and 6.8.1-13) refrigerators and freezers
HVAC Equipment (Tables 6.8) Increased efficiencies for HVAC equipment, and increased capacity
control for some packaged equipment

Humidification and Increased control requirements prohibiting the use of fossil fuel and
Dehumidification (6.4.3.6) electricity for humidification above 30% RH and dehumidification
below 60% RH in most circumstances.
Demand Control Ventilation Reduces the occupancy threshold where DCV is required from 40
(6.4.3.8) people per 1,000 sq ft to 25 people per 1,000 sq ft
Heating and Cooling Setbacks Requires heating setback at least 10°F (6°C) below occupied heating
(6.4.3.3) setpoint, and cooling setback at least 5°F (3°C) above occupied
cooling setback.
Note: These setbacks must be part of the Baseline and Proposed

schedules modeled using the Performance method.
Optimum start control Optimum start controls required for more building types
(6.4.3.3.3)
Duct Insulation (6.4.4.1.2) Increases ductwork insulation requirements
DDC control (6.4.3.10) DDC Control required for a much larger array of building
applications
HVAC alterations (6.1.1.3.1) Requires replacement HVAC&R equipment to meet most
requirements
Pool Dehumidifier (6.4.1.1) Establishes efficiency requirements for indoor pool dehumidifier
Fault Detection (6.4.3, Adds fault detection requirements
6.4.3.12)
Power Requirement ASHRAE 90.1-2016
Automated receptacle control Expands the spaces where automated receptacle control is required
(8.4.2) and provides further details regarding acceptable methods for
receptacle controls
Electrical Monitoring (8.4.3) Adds monitoring requirements to submeter tenant energy and
electric end uses
Automated receptacle control Adds transformer performance requirements
(8.4.4)
Lighting Requirement ASHRAE 90.1-2016
Daylighting Controls (9.4.1.1) Requirements updated for areas where mandatory daylighting
controls are required.
Automatic shutoff of lighting Adds requirements for automated shutoff of lights and switched
and switched receptacles in receptacles in hotel/motel guestrooms
hotel guestrooms (9.4.1.3)
Lighting Controls (9.4.1.1) Additional lighting controls requirements including partial automatic
ON, inclusion of emergency circuits in scheduled shutoff
requirements, additional shutoff controls for exterior lighting,
increased parking garage occupancy controls.
Lighting Efficacy (9.4.1) Adds efficacy requirements for residential dwelling unit lighting
Lighting Alterations (9.1.2) Increases requirements for alterations to existing building lighting
systems
Exterior Lighting Power Reduces exterior lighting power allowances
(9.4.2)
Motor Requirement ASHRAE 90.1-2016
Motor Efficiency (10.4.1) Increases motor efficiencies
Escalators (10.4.3 and 10.4.4) Adds requirements for escalators, moving walkways, and elevators
Whole Building energy Adds requirement to monitor whole building energy use for energy
monitoring (10.4.5) supplied by a utility, energy provider, or plant not located in the
building

Table 2. Changes in ASHRAE 90.1 prescriptive requirements, 2010 to 2016
Building Envelope ASHRAE 90.1-2016

Requirement
Opaque and Fenestration More stringent insulation levels for opaque elements in most climate
Efficiencies (Tables 5.5-1 zones.
through 5.5-8)
Fenestration: More stringent U-factor requirements for most
assemblies, more stringent SHGCs in warmer climates. Additional
fenestration framing types added.
Fenestration area by Specific limitations added for fenestration area by orientation
orientation (5.5.4.5)
Fenestration Visible Minimum visible transmittance to solar heat gain coefficient ratio
Transmittance (5.5.4.6) added.
HVAC & Refrigeration ASHRAE 90.1-2016
Requirement
Heat Rejection Fan Control Fan control required for multi-cell heat rejection equipment
(6.5.5.2)
Cooling tower flow turndown Cooling towers with multiple or variable speed condenser water
(6.5.5.4) pumps have added controls requirements associated with flow rate
Small motors (6.5.3.5) Most motors under 1 hp required to be electrically commutated or
have minimum efficiency of 70%.
Boiler Turndown (6.5.4.6) Large boilers required to have minimum turndown ratio
Fan Power Allowance (Table Changes to fan power pressure adjustments. Some allowances
6.5.3.1B) previously allowed to be used for a broad range of systems such as
fully ducted return and exhaust are limited to specific systems.
Dehumidification (6.5.2.3) Requires most reheat used for dehumidification to be from
recovered or site-generated sources
Fluid Flow (6.5.4.1 through Requires automatic shutoff of pumps and boilers when fluid flow
6.5.4.3) through the chillers or boilers is not operating, reduces low flow limit
exceptions, requires variable flow in more hydronic system
applications
Computer rooms (6, 6.6) Adds requirements specific to computer rooms, including air and
water economizer requirements
Transfer air (6.5.7.1) Limits conditioned supply of transfer air between spaces
VFD Return and Relief Fans Requires VFD control of return and relief fans larger than 0.5 hp.
(6.5.4.1, 6.5.4.3)
Fan Powered VAV control Specifics control of fans in fan-powered parallel VAV boxes
Energy Recovery (Tables Revises minimum threshold for energy recovery
6.5.6.1-1 and 6.5.5.6.1-2)
Water-side economizers Requires water-side economizers for radiant cooling or passive
chilled beam systems
Lighting Requirement ASHRAE 90.1-2016
Interior Lighting Power Extensive changes to the Interior Lighting Power Density
Density (Tables 9.5.1 and 9.6.1) requirements.
Decorative Lighting (9.6.2) Reduces additional lighting allowance for decorative lighting
Table 3. Changes in ASHRAE 90.1 Performance Rating Method Requirements, 2010 to 2016

General Requirement ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Appendix G
Performance Rating Method Appendix G can be used to demonstrate code compliance

Scope (G1.1) (Previously it only applied to demonstrate above-code
performance).
Performance Rating A stable baseline that references ASHRAE 90.1-2004 prescriptive
Calculation (G1.2.2 / 4.2.1.1) values is introduced.
Performance Cost Index Target (PCI T ) is calculated using Building

Performance Factors (BPF) for each building type and climate zone
in conjunction with Baseline Building Unregulated Energy
Consumption (BBUEC) and Baseline Building Performance (BBP).
Building Performance Factors represent the ratio of regulated
energy cost for a 90.1-2016 versus a 90.1-2004 compliant building.
This allows relatively few changes to the Baseline Building modeling

methodology between code cycles, with the major change being the
BPF determinations.
Self-contained references The Baseline modeling requirements are contained within ASHRAE
90.1-2016 Appendix G, and do not require references to the
prescriptive requirements of Sections 5 through 10.
Unmodified existing building Unmodified existing building components are required to follow the
components (Table same rules as new and modified building components.
G3.1#2(Baseline))
Previously some existing building components (such as existing
building envelope components) could be modeled using existing
unrenovated performance in the Baseline and as-designed with
renovations in the Proposed.
Unfinished spaces For unfinished spaces, the proposed efficiencies, controls, lighting
power densities, etc. are modeled consistent with the ASHRAE 90.1-
2016 prescriptive requirements, and are not modeled identically to
the Baseline.
Schedules ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Appendix G
HVAC setpoint schedules Projects may adjust schedules to demonstrate credit for HVAC
(Table G3.1#4) systems that automatically provide occupant thermal comfort via
means other than direct control of air dry-bulb and wet-bulb
temperature.
Building Envelope ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Appendix G
Requirement
Vertical Fenestration Area Vertical fenestration area modeled in the Baseline is less than 40%
(Table G3.1#5(Baseline)(c)) for many building occupancies.
Credit is allowed when the proposed vertical fenestration area is

lower than the values shown in Table G3.1.1-1 for applicable building
types.
Infiltration (Table Specific infiltration rates are required to be modeled. Credit is
G3.1#5(Proposed)(b), G3.1.1.4) allowed for improved infiltration for projects performing air leakage
testing.

HVAC & Refrigeration ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Appendix G
Requirement
HVAC System Type (G3.1.1, Further clarity is provided for identifying the order of priority for
Table G3.1#10, Table G3.1.1-3, determining the Baseline HVAC system types applicable for the
Table G3.1.1-4) building.
Additional HVAC system type categorizations added for public

assembly, retail buildings up to two floors, hospitals, computer
rooms.
Baseline system heating type is dependent on climate zone rather

than predominant heating source used in the building. Baseline
systems in climate zone 0 to 3A are modeled with electric heating
and baseline systems in climate zones 3B through 8 are modeled
with fossil fuel heating.
Baseline fossil fuel heating systems shall always be modeled using

natural gas, or propane in locations where natural gas is not
available. Previous versions of Appendix G required the fuel type to
be the same in the Baseline and Proposed case.
HVAC equipment efficiencies Projects are required to model both part load and full load
(G3.1.2.1) efficiencies per Tables G3.5.1 through G3.5.6 where applicable.
A clear method is provided for calculating the modeled Baseline

cooling and heating COP for packaged equipment.
Night-time fan cycling For System 6 and 8 (Parallel fan-powered VAV terminals with
(G3.1.2.4) electric heating), the terminal unit fan and reheat coil are energized
to meet the heating unoccupied setpoint in the space rather than
the entire VAV system serving the floor.
Computer room fluid Computer room fluid economizers required for computer rooms
economizer (G3.1.2.6.1) where the Baseline system type is system 11.
Baseline Humidity Controls If the Baseline system type does not comply with humidistatic
(G3.1.3.18 and Table control requirements, then only 25% of system reheat energy shall
G3.1#10(Baseline) be included in the baseline building performance.
If the proposed design includes humidification, the baseline design

shall use adiabatic humidification
Baseline Preheat (G3.1.3.19) Preheat is required to be modeled for Baseline Systems 5 through 8,
and controlled to a fixed setpoint 20°F (11°C) less than the design
room heating temperature set point. Modeling of preheat in the
Baseline is no longer dependent on the presence of preheat in the
Proposed design.
Baseline Refrigeration (Table Refrigeration equipment is required to be modeled as specified.
G3.1#17)
Lighting Requirement ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Appendix G
LPD Modeling Method (Table All building spaces are modeled using the Space-by-Space Method.
G3.1#6(Baseline)) (Previous versions of ASHRAE allowed projects to use the space-by-
space or building-area methods).
Automated Controls (Table Control credit is modeled in the Proposed design for all spaces
G3.1#6(Proposed)) where applicable controls are included (including mandatory
controls required by 90.1-2016).

Service Water Heating ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Appendix G
Baseline System Type (Table Baseline service water heating system type is determined based on
G3.1.1-2) building type, with electric resistance point-of-use for convenience
store, electric resistance storage for most commercial applications
with low service water heating usage, and gas storage water heaters
for residential buildings and commercial applications with high
service water heating usage. In previous versions of ASHRAE, the
service water heating type was modeled identically in the Baseline
and Proposed Case
Service Water Heating Loads A specific methodology is used for determining service water
(Table G3.1#11(Baseline)(h) heating loads. Loads must be modeled identically in the baseline and
proposed case, except when calculations show savings associated
with reduced fixture flow, reduced required temperature of service
mixed water, heat recovery for makeup water, etc.
Power and Equipment ASHRAE 90.1-2016
Requirement
Computer room equipment The computer room equipment schedule is varied monthly between
schedule (G3.1.3.16) 25% and 100% of full load as noted.
Elevators (G3.9.2, Table A specific methodology is provided for calculating baseline and
G3.1#16) proposed annual elevator energy consumption, Baseline elevator
peak motor power, baseline elevator cab ventilation, and baseline
elevator lighting power density.
Additional Energy Modeling Guidance

Thoroughly review both ASHRAE 90.1–2016 and the 90.1–2016 User’s Manual. The manual presents
extended explanations and also includes examples of the concepts and requirements within the
standard.
The Pacific Northwest National Laboratory (PNNL) ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1-2016 Performance
Rating Method Reference Manual also provides detailed modeling guidance which can be used when
developing a 90.1-2016 Baseline and Proposed model
(https://www.pnnl.gov/main/publications/external/technical_reports/PNNL-26917.pdf).
The following sections of the Energy Star Multifamily High Rise Program Simulation Guidelines –
Appendix G 90.1-2016 Version 1.0 may also be used to document efficiency measures specific to
Multifamily buildings:
 Section 3.7 Schedules

 Section 6.1 Building Envelope
 Section 6.2 Infiltration
 Section 6.3 Interior Lighting. Note that credit may not be claimed for in-unit lighting except for
spaces where hard-wired fixtures are installed and provide illumination consistent with the
requirements indicated in the Energy Star Multifamily High Rise Program Simulation Guidelines.
Dwelling units shall be modeled as lit for 2.34 hours per day. No schedule-based performance
credits may be claimed for lighting inside dwelling units. Note that the common area lighting
schedules must account for any ASHRAE 90.1-2016 mandatory lighting controls.
 Section 6.4 Exterior Lighting. Note that exterior lighting schedules must account for any
ASHRAE 90.1-2016 mandatory lighting controls.
 Section 6.5 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning, including the following sections:
o Section 6.5.1 Thermostat Setpoints
o Section 6.5.2 Space Conditioning

o Section 6.5.3 Baseline HVAC System Type. The project may either follow the Energy
Star guidance which requires that common spaces essential to the building’s residential
function be modeled with the residential baseline HVAC system type, or the ASHRAE
90.1-2016 modeling rules, which allow these spaces to be classified as non-residential
(See ASHRAE Interpretation 90.1-2010-26).
o Section 6.5.4 Baseline HVAC System Capacity
o Section 6.5.5 Baseline HVAC DX System Efficiency
o Section 6.5.6 Baseline Boiler and Furnace Efficiency
o Section 6.5.7 Baseline PTHP Heating Control
o Section 6.5.8 Performance Curves
o Section 6.5.9 Proposed HVAC System Capacity and Efficiency
o Section 6.5.10 HVAC Fan System Energy
o Section 6.5.11 HVAC Distribution System
o Section 6.5.12 Mechanical Ventilation
 Section 6.6 Other Heating and Ventilation Systems
 Section 6.7 Domestic (Service) Water Heating
 Section 6.8 Receptacles and other plug loads
 Section 6.9 Elevators
 Section 6.10 Other Loads
Rating System Variations

Core and Shell
Option 1. 90.1-2016 Appendix G:
Energy savings are based on a building’s total annual energy consumption, rather than on the owner’s
scope of work, so the developer of a core and shell project may have only a limited opportunity to
improve energy savings. The thresholds for the Optimize Energy Performance Credit for projects using
the ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Appendix G path are therefore adjusted lower. Per ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Appendix
G modeling requirements, the proposed design for unfinished spaces, systems, and components shall be
modeled using the same type of system as in the Baseline, and using the ASHRAE 90.1-2016 prescriptive
requirements. Therefore, incomplete spaces are treated as “energy neutral” since the performance of
these spaces will demonstrate the savings associated with the relevant ASRHAE 90.1-2016 Building
Performance Factor.
In a typical core and shell multifamily building, the owner provides sometimes provides base-building
HVAC, whereas the tenant often installs light fixtures and indoor fan coil units. If the energy use of the
base-building HVAC accounts for only a third of the overall building energy use, the building owner
must find sufficient savings within that third needed to meet the prerequisite or require additional
savings of the tenant in the signed Tenant Sales and Lease Agreement.
Because the owner cannot control the effect of future improvements on the total energy consumption
of the core and shell project, for LEED energy modeling, items such as lighting or equipment loads for
areas that are under the tenants’ control must match the ASHRAE 90.1-2016 prescriptive requirements,
as specified by Appendix G. However, projects can claim credit for energy reductions in tenant spaces if
those reductions (such as lighting power density reductions or improved HVAC efficiency) are required
through a signed tenant sales and lease agreement or other executed legally binding document. The
signed tenant sales and lease agreement must be specific enough to assure that the savings modeled
will actually be realized once the tenant lease is complete. For example, if a Tenant Sales and Lease
Agreement requires that VRF systems with SEER 20 and 9.4 HSPF be installed in the bedrooms, savings
can be claimed in the proposed model for the bedrooms. Zoning must be identical between the baseline
and the proposed models. If HVAC zones are not defined in a tenant space, energy modelers should
follow ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Table G.3.1.8. To easily distinguish between energy use from owner and
tenant spaces, projects should model separate electric meters for tenant loads.
Option 2 (Core & Shell). Dwelling Unit Energy Simulation

The modeling rules stipulated for HERS require that an inefficient HVAC system be modeled when no
HVAC system is present. Therefore, core and shell multifamily residential buildings that do not include

the HVAC design within the project scope of work and/or do not have signed TSLAs that address the
future installation of the HVAC system are unlikely to demonstrate prerequisite compliance using
dwelling unit simulation. If the project is less than four stories and does not have HVAC installed within
the project scope of work, contact USGBC if interested in applying the ASHRAE 90.1-2016 prescriptive
or modeling path.
Documentation Energy Performance Option
90.1-2016 90.1-2016 1. 90.1 2. NBI 3.
Prescriptive ECB Appendix Prescriptive Dwelling
Compliance Compliance G Compliance Unit
(prerequisite Compliance Energy
(prerequisite only) Simulation
only)
Minimum Energy Performance X

Calculator (90.1-2016) with Appendix
G energy modeling inputs, and
confirmation of mandatory measure
compliance with 90.1-2016
Input-output reports from modeling X X

software
Description of energy utility rates for X X (if using

each energy source cost metric)
Documentation demonstrating X X
compliance with NBI Multifamily Guide
or ENERGY STAR Multifamily New
Construction
Documentation demonstrating X X X X
compliance with ASHRAE 90.1-2016
Mandatory Measures and ECB
If applicable, on-site renewable energy X X X

plans indicating location of renewable
energy system, and relevant design
details (e.g. PV module capacity,
quantity, inverter capacity, tilt,
orientation, etc. for a photovoltaic
array), and confirming that the
renewable energy is part of the project
scope of work (or campus scope of
work for a campus development)
Unit by unit load calculations for each X X X X X

unique type, and equipment selection.
Appliance list specifying products that X

are ENERGY STAR certified

HERS/ERI rating reports for each X
unique unit type
For each unit type, quantity of the unit X

in the multifamily building, and area of
the unit.
Total area of common area, parking X X X X

garage, residential dwelling units,
retail, and commercial.
 ASHRAE 90.1–2016
 ASHRAE 209-2018
 ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1-2016 Performance Rating Method Reference Manual, PNNL
2017
 New Buildings Institute Multifamily Guide
 2009 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals
 ANSI/RESNET Standard 301-2019
 Energy Star Multifamily High Rise Program Simulation Guidelines – Appendix G 90.1-2016
Version 1.0

 LEED O+M EA credit Energy Performance: Designing building systems to achieve a minimum
level of energy efficiency provides the foundation for effective energy management, reduced
greenhouse gas emissions from building energy use, and reduced operating costs throughout
the building life cycle.

EA Prerequisite: Energy Metering
Intent
To support energy management and identify opportunities for additional energy savings by tracking all
energy consumption in the building.
Requirements
MF
Install new or use existing energy meters that, in aggregate, measure all building energy consumption
(electricity, natural gas, chilled water, steam, fuel oil, propane, biomass for shared systems, etc).
Install an electricity meter for each residential unit. This meter need not be utility-owned/utility-grade.
Single room–occupancy units, transitional and temporary housing, and designated supportive housing
buildings do not need an electricity meter in each unit.
Guidance
Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C: Multifamily Midrise reference guide with the following additions and
modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
Requirements for energy meters that measure all building energy consumption and total electricity
consumption of each residential unit provides owners and tenants with energy usage data that can be
used to assess building performance and inform tenant behavior.
Step 1. Install energy meters measuring total building energy consumption.
Ensure that new or existing energy meters can, in aggregate, measure all building energy consumption
(electricity, natural gas, chilled water, steam, fuel oil, propane, biomass for shared systems, etc.).
Step 2. Install electricity meters for all residential units.
 Dwelling unit meters may be manually read or connected to a building information system. The
meters may be equipped with data logging capability independent of a building information
system. Dwelling unit electrical meters do not need to be utility-owned or utility grade.
 Single-room-occupancy units, transitional and temporary housing, and designated supportive
housing buildings do not need an energy meter in each unit. However, the whole building
energy metering requirements described in Step 1 still apply.

All
Energy metering strategy narrative X

 LEED O+M EA credit Energy Performance: Installing whole building energy meters is a simple
yet critical strategy for understanding total energy use throughout the building life cycle.
Tracking energy consumption on a regular basis supports effective energy management and
provides data to help verify that building systems are operating as designed. Projects can
submit data via the Arc platform to comply with the prerequisite requirement to share whole-
project energy usage data with USGBC and get started on the path to recertification.

EA Prerequisite: Fundamental Refrigerant
Management
Intent
To reduce stratospheric ozone depletion.
Requirements
MF
Do not use chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerants in new heating, ventilating, air-conditioning,

and refrigeration (HVAC&R) systems. When reusing existing HVAC&R equipment, complete a
comprehensive CFC phase-out conversion before project completion. Phase-out plans extending
beyond the project completion date will be considered on their merits.
Existing small HVAC&R units (defined as containing less than 0.5 pound [225 grams] of refrigerant) and
other equipment, such as standard refrigerators, small water coolers, and any other equipment that
contains less than 0.5 pound (225 grams) of refrigerant, are exempt.
Guidance
There are no substantive changes to the prerequisite requirements; refer to the LEED v4 BD+C
reference guide, with the following additions:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
This is a new prerequisite from the LEED v4 BD+C rating system.
Phaseout
All
Documentation required
equipment
Equipment type X
Refrigerant type X
CFC conversion or replacement plan X
Refrigerant leakage rate, quantify X
Phase-out completion date X
Confirmation that no new or existing equipment contains CFC’s

X

 LEED O+M EA credit Enhanced Refrigerant Management: Despite successful global adoption of
the Montreal Protocol, large volumes of CFCs and HCFCs remain in circulation and contribute to
stratospheric ozone depletion. Completing a comprehensive CFC phase-out conversion for
HVAC&R equipment reused in the project helps ensure that refrigerants are correctly disposed
of and do not escape into the atmosphere.

EA Credit: Enhanced Commissioning
Intent
To further support the design, construction, and eventual operation of a project that meets the owner’s
project requirements for energy, water, indoor environmental quality, and durability.
Requirements
MF
Select from the following options for up to 6 points.
Options 1-2: Residential Dwelling Units (1-2 points)
Applicable for multifamily buildings meeting all of the following criteria:
 The sum of the residential dwelling unit area comprises at least 60% of the total building gross
area.
 Residential dwelling unit HVAC fit-out is complete
 Central HVAC airflow to the residential dwelling units (if present) is limited to outdoor air only
Option 1. Supply Air-Flow Testing (1 point)
Perform third party testing of the measured HVAC fan airflow within the residential dwelling units to
confirm the flow is either within 10% of the installer’s measured fan airflow, or within 15% of design
HVAC fan airflow.
Test multirate or multispeed HVAC systems at the rate for which they were designed. Supply air-flow
requirements must meet the higher of the cooling or heating designed air flow for each room.
For buildings less than four stories, non-ducted and radiative systems automatically meet credit
requirements.
AND/OR
Option 2. Pressure Balancing (1 point)

For multifamily buildings less than four stories, OR for multifamily buildings where at least 60% of the
residential dwelling units have at least one bedroom:
For each bedroom, demonstrate a pressure difference of no more than 3 Pa (0.012 inch w.c) with
respect to the main body of the house when doors are closed and the air handler is operating on highest
speed.
As an alternative to the 3 Pa limit, a pressure differential ≤ 5 Pa is permitted to be used for bedrooms

with a design airflow ≥ 150 CFM.
For an HVAC system with a multi-speed fan, the highest design fan speed shall be used when verifying
this requirement.

requirements.
AND/OR
Option 3: Enhanced Commissioning (3 points)
Applicable for all buildings.
Implement, or have in place a contract to implement, the following commissioning process activities in
addition to those required under EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification.
Commissioning Authority Qualifications:

 The CxA must have documented commissioning process experience on at least two building
projects with a similar scope of work. The experience must extend from early design phase
through at least 10 months of occupancy;
 The CxA may be a qualified employee of the owner, an independent consultant, or a
disinterested subcontractor of the design team.
Commissioning Process Scope

Complete the following commissioning process (CxP) activities for mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and
renewable energy systems and assemblies in accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 0–2013 and ASHRAE
Guideline 1.1–2007 for HVAC&R systems, as they relate to energy, water, indoor environmental quality,
and durability.
The commissioning authority must do the following:
 Review the OPR, BOD, and project design.

o During the design review, review or verify unit by unit load calculations for HVAC
equipment serving each unique residential unit type. Confirm that equipment
selection for individual dwelling units meets the sizing requirements indicated in
EAp: Minimum Energy Performance.
 Develop and implement a Cx plan.
 Confirm incorporation of Cx requirements into the construction documents.
 Develop or approve system checklists and test procedures.
 Verify system test execution.
 Maintain an issues and benefits log throughout the Cx process.
 Prepare a final Cx process report.
 Document all findings and recommendations and report directly to the owner throughout
the process.
 Review contractor submittals.
 Verify inclusion of systems manual requirements in construction documents.
 Verify inclusion of operator and occupant training requirements in construction documents.
 Verify systems manual updates and delivery.
 Verify operator and occupant training delivery and effectiveness.
 Verify seasonal testing.
 Review building operations 10 months after substantial completion.
 Develop an on-going commissioning plan.
Include all enhanced commissioning tasks in the OPR and BOD.
Requirements for exterior enclosures are limited to inclusion in the owner’s project requirements (OPR)
and basis of design (BOD), as well as the review of the OPR, BOD and project design. ASTM E2947-16:
Standard Guide for Building Enclosure Commissioning provides additional guidance.
The review of the exterior enclosure design may be performed by a qualified independent member of

the design or construction team (or an employee of that firm) who is not directly responsible for design
of the building enclosure for the project.
AND/OR
Option 4: Enhanced and Monitoring-Based Commissioning (1 point)
Achieve Option 3.
AND
Develop monitoring-based procedures and identify points to be measured and evaluated to assess
performance of energy- and water-consuming systems.
Include the procedures and measurement points in the commissioning plan. Address the following:
 roles and responsibilities;

 measurement requirements (meters, points, metering systems, data access);
 the points to be tracked, with frequency and duration for trend monitoring;
 the limits of acceptable values for tracked points and metered values (where appropriate,
predictive algorithms may be used to compare ideal values with actual values);
 the elements used to evaluate performance, including conflict between systems, out-of-
sequence operation of systems components, and energy and water usage profiles;
 an action plan for identifying and correcting operational errors and deficiencies;
 training to prevent errors;
 planning for repairs needed to maintain performance; and
 the frequency of analyses in the first year of occupancy (at least quarterly).
Update the systems manual with any modifications or new settings, and give the reason for any
modifications from the original design.
AND/OR
Option 5. Envelope Commissioning (2 points)
Applicable for all buildings:
Complete the following commissioning process (CxP) activities for the building’s thermal envelope in
accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 0–2013 and ASTM E2947-16a: Standard Guide for Building
Enclosure Commissioning, as they relate to energy, air and water tightness, indoor environmental
quality, and durability.
The qualified independent member of the design or construction team responsible for building
enclosure commissioning must complete the following:
 Review contractor submittals.

 Verify inclusion of systems manual requirements in construction documents for enclosure
systems.
 For specialty enclosure systems with controls and automation:
o Verify systems manual updates and delivery.
o Verify operator and occupant training delivery and effectiveness.
o Verify seasonal testing.
o Review building operations 10 months after substantial completion.
 Develop an on-going enclosure commissioning plan for maintenance, renewal, and
revitalization cycles.

Guidance
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
Added options for testing dwelling-unit heating and cooling systems from LEED v4 BD+C Multifamily
Midrise EQ credit Balancing of Heating and Cooling Systems Minor. Updated referenced standards for
Option 3. Enhanced Commissioning. Minor text revisions to Option 5. Building Enclosure
Commissioning intend to clarify implementation for project teams.
Step 1. Select compliance path(s) for commissioning.
Review credit requirements against the project scope of work. Select one or more Options from credit
language for up to 6 points.
 Option 1. Supply-Air Flow Testing and Option 2. Pressure Balancing are available to multifamily
buildings that meet all of the following criteria:
o The sum of the residential dwelling unit area comprises at least 60% of the total building
gross area;
o Residential dwelling unit HVAC fit-out is complete; and
o Central HVAC airflow to the residential dwelling units (if present) is limited to outdoor
air only
Option 1. Supply Air-Flow Testing
Step 1. Select system
 Ductless minisplit systems automatically meet the requirements of this option without any
additional testing.
 All other systems must undergo testing.
Step 2. Test and balance ducted system

Confirm the measured HVAC fan airflow within the residential dwelling units is either within 10% of the
installer’s measured fan airflow, or within 15% of design HVAC fan airflow.
 Once construction is completed, qualified third-party inspector measures the total system
airflow at the air handler.
 Refer to the installer’s measured airflow as found in Item 3.7 of the ENERGY STAR Multifamily
New Construction National HVAC Functional Testing Checklist, and design HVAC fan airflow as
found in Item 5.2 of the ENERGY STAR Multifamily New Construction National HVAC Design
Report.
requirements.
Option 2. Pressure Balancing
Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C: Multifamily Midrise reference guide Step-by-Step for Pressure Balancing in
EQ credit Balancing of Heating and Cooling Distribution Systems, with the following additions and
modifications:

 As an alternative to the 3 Pa limit, a pressure differential ≤ 5 P a is p erm itted to b e u sed fo r
bedrooms with a design airflow ≥ 150 C F M .
 For an HVAC system with a multi-speed fan, the highest design fan speed shall be used when
verifying this requirement.
requirements.
Option 3. Enhanced Commissioning

Refer to the Step-by-Step guidance in the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide for EA prerequisite
Fundamental Commissioning and Verification and credit Enhanced Commissioning.
Option 3. Enhanced Commissioning incorporates all of the LEED v4.1 BD+C Fundamental
Commissioning requirements as well as the LEED v4.1 BD+C enhanced commissioning requirements.
The CxA must lead, review, and oversee the Cx process for all systems to be commissioned, including
both Fundamental Verification and Testing and Enhanced commissioning activities. The CxA must be
either a qualified employee of the owner, an independent consultant, or a disinterested subcontractor of
the design team.
Option 4. Enhanced and Monitoring-Based Commissioning, Option 5. Envelope Commissioning

Refer to the Step-by-Step guidance in the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide for credit Enhanced
Commissioning.
Further Explanation
Option 1. Supply Air-Flow Testing, Option 2. Pressure Balancing
Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C: Multifamily Midrise reference guide for EQ credit Balancing of Heating and
Cooling Distribution Systems.
Option 3. Enhanced Commissioning, Option 4. Enhanced and Monitoring-Based Commissioning,

Option 5. Envelope Commissioning
Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide for EA credit Enhanced Commissioning, with the following
modification:
Building Enclosure Commissioning Basics

 See ASTM E2947 – 16: Standard Guide for Building Enclosure Commissioning and ASTM E2813-
12: Standard Practice For Building Enclosure Commissioning for additional guidance regarding
envelope systems testing equipment and procedures.
Documentation Options Option Option Option
1, 2 3 4 5
Confirmation of CxA as independent from design and X X

X
construction team
X X
List of systems to be commissioned X
Supply air-flow test results X
Pressure balancing test results X

X
Verification of CxA activities and reviews X X
X
Cx Plan X X

List of all tasks complete as part of Cx activities X
X X
Documentation of testing and verification X X
X
Cx report including issues summary log X X
X
Training outline and participation list X X
X
Confirmation of systems manual delivery X X
X
Ongoing Cx plan X X
X
Inclusion of monitoring and tracking in Cx plan X
Inclusion of envelope in Cx plan X
Referenced Standards:
 ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380-2019
 ENERGY STAR Multifamily New Construction
 ENERGY STAR Multifamily New Construction HVAC Functional Testing Checklist
 ASHRAE Guideline 0–2013, The Commissioning Process
 ASHRAE Guideline 1.1–2007, HVAC&R Technical Requirements for the Commissioning Process
 ASTM E2947 – 16: Standard Guide for Building Enclosure Commissioning
 ASTM E2813-12: Standard Practice for Building Enclosure Commissioning
Exemplary Performance:
Option 1. Supply Air Flow Testing
Have the total supply air-flow rates in each room verified by a qualified energy rater using a flow hood
with doors closed, or another acceptable method, per RESNET or ACCA Quality Installation
Specifications. Supply air-flow rates must be within +/- 20% (or +/- 25 cfm or 11 lps) of calculated values
from ACCA Manual J.
 Install a ducted system with air control dampers in each duct run. The dampers must be
accessible at project completion to allow for adjustment during testing and balancing. For best
efficiency, locate the control dampers as close as possible to the air handler rather than next to
the registers.
 Once construction is completed, a qualified energy rater or qualified third-party inspector
measures the airflow at each register to verify system performance. The final airflow must be
within +/– 20% of total flow (or +/– 25 cfm or 11 lps) of design, per Manual D (Table 1). Opening
or closing registers to adjust airflow is not acceptable.
 Most projects must install dampers in every duct to meet the airflow requirements.

 LEED O+M EA credit Energy Performance: Testing dwelling unit heating and cooling systems
ensures that installed systems function as designed and may help save energy over the project
life cycle. Enhanced building commissioning expands the fundamental commissioning process
to provide further oversight and verification of mechanical systems, which ensures ongoing
building quality control and operations and may help improve the project’s energy performance
score. Monitoring-based commissioning is a powerful strategy for tracking building performance

in real time. Building enclosure commissioning provides quality assurance for enclosure systems
design and installation and provides the foundation for energy efficiency throughout the
building life cycle.

EA Credit: Optimize Energy Performance
Intent
To achieve increasing levels of energy performance beyond the prerequisite standard to reduce
environmental and economic harms associated with excessive energy use.
Requirements
MF
Establish an energy performance target no later than the schematic design phase. The target must be
established using one of the following metrics:
 kBtu per square foot-year (kWh per square meter-year) of site energy use
 kBtu per square foot-year (kWh per square meter-year) of source energy use
 pounds per square foot-year (Kg per square meter-year) of greenhouse gas emissions
 energy cost per square foot-year (cost per square meter-year)
Analyze efficiency measures during the design process and account for the results in design decision
making. Use energy simulation of efficiency opportunities, past energy simulation analyses for similar
buildings, or published data (e.g., Advanced Energy Design Guides) from analyses for similar buildings.
Analyze efficiency measures, focusing on load reduction and HVAC-related strategies (passive
measures are acceptable) appropriate for the facility. Project potential energy savings and holistic
project cost implications related to all affected systems.
Choose one of the options below.
Demonstrate a Performance Cost Index (PCI)1 below the Performance Cost Index Target (PCI t )
calculated in accordance with Section 4.2.1.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2016, Appendix G,
Table 4.2.1.1. For mixed use buildings, the required PCI shall be calculated by using an area weighted
average of the building types.
Calculate the PCI, PCI t , and percentage improvement using metrics of cost and greenhouse gas (GHG)
emissions. For each energy source serving the building, the GHG emission factors must be identical for
the Baseline and Proposed building models.
LEED points are calculated based on the project percent improvement PCI below the PCI t using metrics
of cost and GHG emissions. Total points have been divided equally between the metrics of energy cost
and greenhouse gas emissions. Points are awarded according to Table 1 and Table 2.
For project percent improvement for the cost metric, on-site renewable energy may be subtracted from
proposed energy cost prior to calculating proposed building performance per ASHRAE Standard 90.1-
2016 Section G 2.4.1.

Table 1. Points for percentage improvement in energy performance – % Cost PCI below PCI t (1-9
points)
Multifamily Points
2% 1
5% 2
10% 3
15% 4
20% 5
25% 6
30% 7
35% 8
40% 9
45% EP
On-site renewable energy may be subtracted from proposed greenhouse gas emissions prior to
calculating proposed building performance per ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2016 Section G 2.4.1. New off-
site renewable energy as defined in EA credit Renewable Energy may be subtracted from proposed
greenhouse gas emissions prior to calculating proposed building performance.
Table 2. Points for percentage improvement in energy performance – % Greenhouse Gas Emissions
PCI below PCI t (1-9 points)
Multifamily Points
2% 1
5% 2
10% 3
16% 4
24% 5
32% 6
40% 7
50% 8
65% 9
80% EP
OR
Option 2. New Buildings Institute Multifamily Guide (1–13 points)

Design and construct a multifamily building according to the requirements of the New Buildings
Institute Multifamily Guide. Meeting the requirements of any of the Additional Efficiency Packages
allows for the awarding of additional points.
Savings above ASHRAE 90.1-2016 can be found in Table 3. Use scoring for the metrics of cost and
greenhouse gas emissions in Tables 1 and 2, above, to determine points.
Table 3. Percent Above ASHRAE 90.1-2016
Climate Zone CZ 0, 1, CZ 2B, CZ 3A, CZ 4C, 5 CZ 6, 7, 8

2A 3B, 3C 4A, 4B
Base Multifamily Guide 16% 17% 24% 17% 22%
+ High Performance Thermal Envelope 18% 22% 28% 26% 32%
+ Ground Source Heat Pump 20% NA 26% 20% 25%
+ Radiant Heating & Cooling 24% 21% 28% 25% 30%
+ High Efficiency Heat Pump 16% 17% 29% 28% 33%
+ Heat Recovery Ventilation NA NA NA 25% 30%
+ Heat Pump Water Heater 30% 31% 33% 27% 26%
Certified Passive House projects are deemed equivalent to the NBI Base Multifamily Guide + High
Performance Thermal Envelope.
OR
Design and construct a building whose modeled annual energy usage achieves an average HERS index
rating of 70 or better, or whose HERS index rating is at or below the ENERGY STAR HERS Index Target
(or USGBC-approved equivalent for projects outside the U.S.). Points are awarded according to Table 4.
Table 4. Points for achieving HERS index ratings
HERS points
below ENERGY
HERS STAR Reference
index Index Target Points
70 0 5
68 2 6
66 4 7

64 6 8
62 8 9
60 10 10
58 12 11
56 14 12
54 16 13
52 18 14
50 20 15
46 24 16
40 30 17
25 45 18
10 (EP) 60 (EP) EP
Case 2. Major Renovation
HERS
index Points
84 1
80 2
76 3
73 4
70 5
68 6
66 7
64 8
62 9
60 10
58 11
56 12

54 13
52 14
50 15
46 16
40 17
25 18
10 (EP) EP
Guidance
Behind the Intent
Beta Update
Updated referenced standards and a new greenhouse gas emissions metric for projects using whole
building energy modeling ensure that LEED continues to be a global leadership standard for energy
performance and encourages owners to directly consider and address building carbon emissions.
Revised prescriptive options. Require design phase analysis for all Optimize Energy Performance
options, including prescriptive and performance options.
See EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance.
Assure that the additional Optimize Energy Performance requirement credit requirements are met:
 Establish an energy use intensity (EUI) target no later than schematic design using one of
the required metrics noted
 Analyze efficiency measures during the design process, focusing on load reduction and
HVAC-related strategies (including passive measures) appropriate for the facility, project
potential energy savings and holistic project cost implications, and account for the results in
design decision making.
These requirements apply regardless of whether the project is using a performance path (Option 1 or
Option 3) or prescriptive path (Option 2) to document credit compliance.
The best approach for analyzing efficiency measures is a preliminary energy model, which evaluates
heating and cooling load reduction strategies, passive HVAC strategies, and HVAC efficiency and
control strategies (see EA prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Further Explanation, Developing a
Preliminary Energy Model and Further Explanation, Modeling HVAC Systems). ASHRAE Standard 209
provides a standardized methodology which may be used for developing preliminary energy models
that are used to inform the design process (See ASHRAE 209 Sections 6.3 - Load Reduction Modeling
and 6.4 - HVAC System Selection Modeling).
Projects may also opt to use modeling analyses previously performed for similar projects to meet the
design phase analysis requirements.

Further Explanation
Calculations
See Minimum Energy Performance, Further Explanation, Calculations for calculation of the Performance
Cost Index (PCI) and Performance Cost Index Target (PCI t ) using units of cost and GHG emissions.
For Table 1:
Percent Cost PCI below PCI t = 1-PCI/PCI t
For Table 2:
Calculate PCI and PCIt using metrics of greenhouse gas emissions instead of cost.
Percent GHG Emissions PCI below PCI t = 1-PCI/PCI t
If a project consists of Major Renovation or Healthcare and New Construction, use Equation 1 to
determine the appropriate percentage improvement target from Table 1 or Table 2 (points for
percentage improvement in energy performance).
Equation 1. Target energy savings for additions to existing buildings
Target percentage = {(existing floor area / total floor area) x target percentage of savings for
Major Renovation or Healthcare} + {(new floor area / total floor area) x target percentage of
savings for New Construction}
Applying Renewable Energy Savings
Only projects pursuing Option 1 or Option 3 of this credit may count savings from renewable energy
systems.
Option 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Appendix G
For both the metrics of cost and greenhouse gas emissions, calculate the total amount of energy
generated by the on-site system and convert this value into the equivalent cost or greenhouse gas
emissions offset using the same utility rates and/or Greenhouse gas emission coefficients per energy
source used for purchased energy (see Further Explanation, Equivalent Cost of Renewable Energy).
Calculate the equivalent cost or greenhouse gas emissions offset directly in the energy model through
the simulation software, or subtract it from the final energy cost savings calculation.
For the metric of greenhouse gas emissions, projects may also subtract GHG emissions offset by new
off-site renewable energy as defined in EA credit Renewable Energy from proposed greenhouse gas
emissions prior to calculating proposed building performance. For off-site renewable systems with zero
carbon emissions (such as photovoltaic systems, wind turbines, or passive solar thermal energy systems,
calculate the total amount of energy generated by the system and convert this value into equivalent
greenhouse gas emissions using the same national or regional grid emissions factors used for the fuel
replaced by the renewable energy system; use hourly grid emissions factors where available. Apply the
equivalent greenhouse gas emissions directly to the energy model through the simulation software, or
subtract it from the final greenhouse gas emissions savings calculation.
Option 3. Dwelling Unit Simulation

Incorporate renewable energy consistent with the methodology established in the HERS modeling
requirements.
Equivalent Cost of Renewable Energy
Option 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Appendix G.

The equivalent cost of the usable energy system can be calculated in two ways, virtual rate or actual
utility tariff plus demand rates.
Virtual rate. The project team may use the virtual energy rate determined by the proposed energy
model used for EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. The virtual rate accounts for both
consumption and demand charges. Project teams that use the Energy Information Administration’s
average energy prices must use the virtual rates to determine the renewable energy system cost.
Actual rate plus demand. Calculate the expected savings in both consumption and demand charges,
based on the rates charged by the utility that serves the project. If a project is served by a utility that
uses time-dependent valuation to set rates, the team may use those rates but must provide hourly
calculations for the value of generated energy. Some energy modeling software may calculate the
savings from renewable energy systems if the utility rates include consumption, demand, time-
dependent valuation, time-of-use, ratchets, and other factors.
For renewable energy sources priced on a basis other than per unit of energy, the project team must
account for all the costs associated with the source, such as delivery costs and annual fees. For
example, a project that uses heat generated from geothermal steam needs to account for all the
equipment, maintenance, and labor costs associated with the geothermal system throughout the year.
In addition to the documentation required for EA prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, the
following documentation is required for credit compliance
Documentation Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option

4
Narrative or report that includes: X X X X
• The energy target set for the project, the

date the energy target was set, and
confirmation the target was set no later
than schematic design
• A summary of the design phase energy
analysis performed for the project including
how the results were used for design
decision making
Target Finder results and summary X
Greenhouse gas emissions calculations that include X (where

credit for new off-site renewable energy (as applicable)
applicable)
NBI Multifamily Guide compliance tables X
HERS/ERI rating reports for each unique unit type X
ENERGY STAR Multifamily New Construction X

certification report
 ASHRAE 90.1–2016
 ASHRAE 209-2018

 ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1-2016 Performance Rating Method Reference Manual, PNNL
2017
 New Buildings Institute Multifamily Guide
 2009 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals
 ANSI/RESNET Standard 301-2019

 LEED O+M EA credit Energy Performance: Designing for higher levels of energy efficiency helps
decrease building operating costs and reduces the environmental and economic harms
associated with excessive energy use throughout the building life cycle; this may help improve
the building’s energy performance score.

EA Credit: Whole Building Energy
Monitoring and Reporting
Intent
To support energy management and identify opportunities for additional energy savings by tracking
building-level energy use.
Requirements
MF
Install new or use existing energy meters that can be aggregated to measure all building energy
consumption (electricity natural gas, chilled water, steam, fuel oil, propane, biomass for shared systems,
etc). Projects must demonstrate the ability to collect aggregate energy consumption for each fuel type.
Utility-owned meters capable of aggregating building-level resource use are acceptable.
Commit to sharing with USGBC the resulting energy consumption data and electrical demand data (if
metered) for a five-year period beginning on the date the project accepts LEED certification. At a
minimum, energy consumption must be tracked at one-month intervals. Prepare a guidance document
for the responsible party, describing the methodology for aggregating and reporting the monthly data
based on the specific metering configuration of the building.
This commitment must carry forward for five years until the building changes ownership or lessee.
Guidance
Beta Update
Modified LEED v4 BD+C EA credit Advanced Energy Metering requirements to reward whole-building
aggregation of energy uses and reporting energy performance data to USGBC.
Step 1. Identify all energy sources that serve building
Identify all sources of energy delivered to the building. Sources of energy that must be metered include
all energy supplied by a utility company or campus central plant, such as the following:
 Electricity
 Natural gas, synthetic natural gas, propane, fuel oil, diesel fuel, other fossil fuels
 Biofuels
 District chilled water, steam, and hot water
This credit does not require metering of locally generated sources of energy that are dedicated to the
project building, such as the following:
 Solar photovoltaic–generated electricity

 Wind-generated electricity
 Solar hot water generation for domestic hot water or heating hot water

Step 2. Determine scope of utility company metering
If all energy provided to the building is supplied by one or more utility companies and the utility meters
provide monthly consumption data, those meters meet the prerequisite requirements. However, the
project team may have little influence on the location and function of utility company meters, so the
building owner should confirm the following with the utility company:
 Location: where the meter will be located (e.g., inside the building, or under or above ground
outside)
 Accessibility: how the building manager will reach the meter, or have access to the aggregated
whole building energy use data from the utility
 Reporting: how the meter will be read (e.g., manually or via remote transmission)
If the utility company restricts access to the meter or uses proprietary remote reporting technology, the
project team may meet the credit requirements by tracking energy usage through monthly billing.
However, the project team must be able to demonstrate that they are capable of accessing the
aggregated monthly data per fuel source for all residences and common, commercial, and retail areas.
To collect more frequent or accurate data, the team may elect to install a private meter downstream of
the utility company meter.
Step 3. Determine number, type, and location of all meters

If the project is not served by a utility company, or if the project uses multiple sources of energy,
additional meters may be required. Identify the location of primary building-level meters for each
energy source. If the project shares utility meters with other buildings or includes energy sources that
are not metered by the supplier, install submeters that will provide the required data.
 Projects may use a single meter at the utility entrance or multiple submeters that account for whole
building energy use in aggregate.
 Areas within the project boundary that are served by separate utility feeds, such as parking
garages, must also be metered.
 Some projects may elect to use multiple submeters to gain more insight into energy uses.
 Select locations with easy access for reading and maintenance.
 There are no requirements for the type of meters except that they be permanent, and they allow
the data to be accessed or reported in intervals at least monthly.
 Meters installed by the owner must be maintained and calibrated per the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Whole-building energy metering automatically meets the credit requirements.
Step 4. Create energy monitoring and reporting guidance document

Prepare a guidance document that describes the methodology for aggregating and reporting the
building’s monthly energy consumption data based on the specific metering configuration of the
building.
Deliver the guidance document to the party responsible for aggregating and reporting the data to
USGBC.
Step 5. Track energy consumption data

Begin tracking energy use when the project achieves LEED certification or at occupancy, whichever
occurs first.

 Measure and record energy consumption on at least a monthly basis (see Further Explanation,
Measurement Intervals).
 Consider tracking building occupancy, use, and maintenance concurrently to help place energy use
data in context and understand anomalies in usage patterns.
Step 6. Share whole-building energy consumption

Commit to sharing with USGBC the whole-project energy usage data acquired from permanent installed
meters in accordance with the prerequisite requirements. The project owner must commit to sharing
energy use data with USGBC for five years in one of two ways:
 USGBC-approved data template

 Third-party data source
To see the most recent list of data-sharing pathways, visit USGBC’s credit library, at usgbc.org/credits.
All
Energy metering strategy narrative X
Letter of commitment X
Confirmation of data sharing source X

 LEED O+M EA credit Energy Performance: Submetering energy subsystems helps facility
managers track changes in energy usage over time and provides the performance data
necessary to identify opportunities for energy savings by end use. Submetering is an important
component of a successful energy management program; metered data enables monitoring of
consumption and costs as well as progress reporting throughout the building life cycle.

EA Credit: Grid Harmonization
Intent
To increase participation in demand response technologies and programs that make energy generation
and distribution systems more efficient, increase grid reliability, and reduce greenhouse gas emissions.
Requirements
MF
Design building and equipment for participation in demand response programs through load shedding
or shifting. On-site electricity generation does not meet the intent of this credit.
Case 1. Demand Response Program Available and Participation (2 points)
 Participate in an existing demand response (DR) program and complete the following activities.
Design a system with the capability for real-time, fully-automated DR based on external
initiation by a DR Program Provider. Semi-automated DR may be utilized in practice.
 Enroll in a minimum one-year DR participation amount contractual commitment with a qualified
DR program provider, with the intention of multiyear renewal, for at least 10% of the annual on-
peak electricity demand. On-peak demand is determined under EA Prerequisite Minimum
Energy Performance. The on-peak demand may vary based on the utility climate and pricing
structures.
 Develop a comprehensive plan for meeting the contractual commitment during a Demand
Response event.
 Include the DR processes in the scope of work for the commissioning authority, including
participation in at least one full test of the DR plan.
 Include the DR program and any installed technologies in the building systems manual.
 Initiate at least one full test of the DR plan.
Case 2. Demand Response Capable Building (1 point)
Have infrastructure in place to take advantage of future demand response programs or dynamic,
real-time pricing programs and complete the following activities.
 Install interval recording meters with communications and ability for the building
automation system to accept an external price or control signal.
 Develop a comprehensive plan for shedding at least 10% of the annual on-peak electricity
demand. On-peak demand is determined under EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance.
 Include the DR processes in the scope of work for the commissioning authority, including
participation in at least one full test of the DR plan.
 Include the DR program and any installed technologies in the building systems manual.
 Contact local utility representatives to discuss participation in future DR programs.
AND/OR
Case 3. Load Flexibility and Management Strategies (1-2 points)
Analyze the building’s annual load shape and peak load based as calculated for EA prerequisite
Minimum Energy Performance. Review the regional grid load profile using the metric of peak load or

peak carbon emissions. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) AVoided Emissions and
geneRation Tool (AVERT) provides regional grid emissions data; local utilities may also provide this
data.
Coordinate review of building load shape and peak load with review of the regional grid profile to
identify the best value load management strategies that the building can provide.
Implement one or more of the load flexibility and management strategies described below for a
maximum of up to two points. All projects must install interval recording meters with communications
and the ability for the building automation system to accept an external price signal.
Load Flexibility and Management Strategies:
 Peak Load Optimization: demonstrate that strategy reduces on-peak load by at least 10% as
compared to peak electrical demand (1 point)
 Flexible Operating Scenarios: demonstrate that strategy moves at least 10% of peak load by a
time period of 2 hours (1 point)
 On-site thermal and/or electricity storage: demonstrate that strategy reduces on-peak load by
at least 10% as compared to peak electrical demand (1 point)
 Grid resilience technologies: project served by utilities with resilience programs in place, which
leverage strategies such as islanding and part-load operation, automatically achieve this credit
(1 point)
Include installed technology in the scope of work for the commissioning authority. Include load
flexibility and management strategies and installed technologies in the building systems manual.
Contact local utility representatives to discuss participation in future DR programs and to inform utility
of building load flexibility and management strategies.
Guidance
Behind the Intent

As the number of distributed energy resources, or grid-connected power generation from individual
buildings, increases, the utility must integrate these resources while continuing to manage overall grid
capacity and generation. Too much distributed generation that is not integrated into the energy system
can impair grid operation. Buildings have the opportunity to support effective grid management by
designing on-site electricity systems that are integrated components of the energy system, serving as
resources for the grid rather than disruptors.
In addition to participation in a utility’s demand response program, projects can install storage
technologies and implement operational strategies that support effective grid management and
increase grid reliability. Eligible technologies may include battery storage, flywheel energy storage, or
thermal energy storage; load management strategies may include load shifting or flexible operating
scenarios.
Beta Update
This is a new credit from the LEED v4.1 BD+C rating system. Updates from LEED v4 EA credit Demand
Response intend to address projects where no demand response program is available from the local
utility and recognize new distributed energy resources technologies and grid harmonization strategies.

Refer to Steps 1 – 5 in the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide for EA credit Demand Response, with the
following addition:
Step 6. Include demand response in commissioning and in building systems manual

Coordinate with the CxA to include a review of the DR plan in the commissioning of the building’s
system test procedures, to verify the ability to handle an externally initiated demand response event.
The Cx plan must include at least one performance test of the full DR plan to verify that all equipment
responds as planned and that all responsible parties understand their roles.
Include demand response program and any installed technologies in the building systems manual.
Case 1. Demand Response Program Available
Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide, with the following addition:
Step 2. Initiate at least one full test of the DR plan.

Execute at least one performance test of the full DR plan as defined in the Cx plan. All relevant DR
operations team members must participate, and address and mitigate any issues identified as a result of
the performance test.
Case 2. Demand Response Program Not Available
Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide.
Case 3. Load Flexibility and Management Strategies
Step 1. Analyze building load shape
Analyze building load shape as calculated for EA prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance; compare
building load shape with the regional grid profile using the metric of peak load or peak carbon
emissions. Use the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s AVoided Emissions and geneRation Tool
(AVERT) provides regional grid emissions data, or contact the local utility to request this data.
Step 2. Identify highest-value strategies
Based on the analysis of building load shape, peak load and regional grid peak load or peak carbon
emissions, identify storage technologies or load management strategies that the building can implement
at the lowest cost while providing the greatest value to the grid.
Step 3. Implement strategies
Implement one or more of the strategies identified during step 2.
Eligible strategies include peak load optimization, or reducing on-peak load by at least 10% compared to
peak electrical demand, or flexible operating scenarios, where a building moves at least 10% of its peak
load by a time period of 2 hours. Additionally, the project may install on-site thermal energy storage for
heating and cooling and/or electricity storage capable of reducing on-peak load by at least 10% as
compared to peak electrical demand. On-site storage enables the building to store energy and use it
during peak demand times, increasing annual energy savings and reducing strain on the grid.
If a project is served by a utility with a resilience program in place that leverages strategies such as
islanding or part-load operation, the project can automatically earn 1 point under this credit by
providing documentation of the utility resilience program in place.

Step 4. Include load flexibility and management system in commissioning and in building systems
manual
Coordinate with the CxA to include a review of the load management system and supporting
technologies in the commissioning of the building’s system test procedures. The Cx plan must include at
least one performance test of the full system to verify that all equipment operates as planned and that
all responsible parties understand their roles.
Include the system and any installed technologies in the building systems manual.
Step 5. Contact local utility

Contact the local utility or service provider to express interest in participation in a future demand
response program, and to inform the utility of building load flexibility and management strategies.
Further Explanation
Grid Harmonization
Energy efficient and grid-interactive buildings save money and resources while supporting broader grid-
scale decarbonization. Savings to building owners accrue from a combination of demand charge
reductions, lower annual energy use, utility incentives, and increase building resilience.
Documentation Case 1 Case 2 Case 3
Proof of enrollment in DR program X
Evidence of ability to shed 10% of on-peak demand X X X
Confirmation that system is capable of receiving and
X X X
acting on external signal
Action plan for meeting reduction requirement during
X X X
event
Inclusion of DR in CxA systems testing plan X X X
Inclusion of DR and/or grid harmonization technologies in
X X X
building systems manual
Documentation of one full test of the DR plan X
Narrative or report that includes: summary of building
annual load shape and regional grid profile analysis;
X
description of building load flexibility and/or management
strategies implemented
Documentation of grid resilience program or technologies
X
serving the project, as applicable

 Participation in a demand response program enables projects to support efficient energy
generation and distribution systems, increase grid reliability, and reduce greenhouse gas
emissions. For projects where no demand response program is available, implementing load
flexibility and management strategies can help to achieve the same outcomes and support
effective electrical grid management.

EA Credit: Renewable Energy
Intent
To reduce the environmental and economic harms associated with fossil fuel energy and reduce
greenhouse gas emissions by increasing self-supply of renewable energy and the use of grid-source,
renewable energy technologies and carbon mitigation projects.
Requirements
MF
Use on-site renewable energy systems, procure renewable energy offsite, or purchase Energy Attribute
Certificates (EACs) or carbon offsets to meet or offset annual building greenhouse gas emissions.
Projects may choose one or more strategies for renewables procurement from the categories below.
Points achieved in each category may be added for up to a total of 5 points.
Environmental benefits of all procurement must be retained by the project.
All off-site qualifying resources must be contracted, owned, or leased for at least 15 years.
Existing off-site renewables, EACs and carbon offsets must be procured from projects that have come
online or been built within the last 15 years.
Table 1. Points for Renewables Procurement
Green-e
New Existing
On-Site Certified: EACs EACs & Carbon
Points Off-Site Off-Site
Renewables & Carbon Offsets
Renewables Renewables
Offsets
1 2% 20% 60% 100% 150%
2 6% 40% 80% 200%
3 15% 60% 100% 300%
35% 80%
4
60% 100%
5
EP 100%
New Off-site Renewables: built within the last year or contracted prior to renewable energy project
development.

Existing Off-site Renewables: contracted from an existing renewable energy provider.
Guidance
Behind the Intent

Renewable energy criteria in v4.1 have been expanded to recognize the variety of procurement
strategies that help to add renewable energy to the grid. Renewable energy generation can translates
to greenhouse gas emission reductions and offer local environmental benefits by reducing air pollution
and increasing resilience. Renewable energy produced on-site protects projects from energy price
volatility while reducing wasted energy lost in transmission.
Additionally, the voluntary market can be an effective catalyst for encouraging energy generators and
utility companies to develop clean energy sources and help address climate change.
Purchasing energy attribute certificates (EACs) allows buildings that use nonrenewable power to create
market demand for renewable energy and support the development of renewable infrastructure.
Beta Update
This new credit combines Green Power and Renewable Energy Production into one credit, recognizing
the wide spectrum of renewable energy procurement. The credit adds new categories of renewables
and updates performance requirements. The credit structure incentivizes self-supply of renewable
energy, development of new renewables, and real carbon emissions reductions, and provides further
opportunities for building and portfolio owners to select the renewable procurement strategies that are
most appropriate for the project application.
Step 1. Explore opportunities for renewables procurement.
(See Further Explanation, Renewable Resource Procurement options)
Step 2. Compare requirements for renewable energy systems and off-site methods of procurement.
 Carefully evaluate the space requirements (for on-site systems), costs, financial incentives, and
efficiencies for each potential renewable technology or contract.
 Local funding, financing, and incentives for renewable generation projects may be available for
certain technologies and may be a significant factor. When considering funding options, ensure
that the terms of the contract will address all renewable attributes to be retained by the project.
 For on-site systems, excess energy, beyond the building’s energy demand at a given point, can
be sold to the utility company (net metering). The building owner receives the market rate,
however, and cannot charge a premium for the renewable energy. In effect, the grid serves as a
storage system and frees the project from hosting a storage system on site. Alternatively,
project teams may consider including a storage system to increase resiliency and facilitate
further control of building energy costs,
 Tying into an existing community system or creating a community system may lower cost
barriers through economies of scale, because unit costs may decrease as system sizes increase.
Community systems can also take advantage of time-shifted demand: one building that is
occupied during the day and another building that is occupied at night could both take
advantage of the same biofuel-fired heating system.
 For buildings that are part of a portfolio of buildings,
 Renewable energy may be available from a third-party system, or the project team may enter an
arrangement in which a third party owns a system that serves the project. In such cases, project

teams must take additional steps to ensure that the arrangement continues for the contract
period required in the credit, and that the renewable attributes are retained throughout the
duration of the contract
Undertake a cost-benefit analysis to understand the financial and environmental benefit of all available
options.
Step 3. Set target for renewable energy procurement.
Select one or more procurement strategies, for a total of up to 5 points. Each procurement strategy
must meet or exceed the minimum target for offsetting annual building greenhouse gas emissions
specified in the credit language.
To establish the target renewable energy system size for the project, estimate the annual greenhouse
gas emissions for the project.
Projects that use the Option 1. Energy Performance Compliance Path to achieve EA Credit Optimize
Energy Performance must base annual greenhouse gas emissions on the whole-building simulation
results for the Proposed Building Performance model (see Further Explanation, Example 1).
Projects that use the ASHRAE 90.1-2016 prescriptive option to achieve EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance, or use Option 2. NBI Multifamily Guide or Option 3. Dwelling Unit Energy Simulation to
achieve EA credit Optimize Energy Performance must use the U.S. Department of Energy’s Commercial
Buildings Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS) data to estimate annual energy use (see Further
Explanation, Example 2 ). Select “Lodging” building type for residential and associated common areas,
and additional building types for retail or commercial space.
Review credit point thresholds and establish the renewable procurement goals for the project.
Step 4. Finalize Renewable Energy Procurement.

Purchase and install the renewable energy systems, and/or finalize the contract to procure renewable
energy, EAcs, and/or carbon offsets. Assure that the contract is signed by both parties, and that the
contract terms confirm all credit requirements. For on-site and off-site renewable energy system(s),
review the contract to confirm that the renewable system(s) are scheduled to be operational at the time
of building occupancy. On-site renewable systems must also be commissioned per the requirements of
LEED EA prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification and EA credit Enhanced
Commissioning, as applicable.
Further Explanation
Calculations
Total building annual greenhouse gas emissions
Use Equation 1 to estimate the total building annual greenhouse gas emissions. Projects that use whole-
building simulation to comply with EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance must use the results of the
model in this calculation. Projects that use the prescriptive path to achieve EA Credit Optimize Energy
Performance (Option 2 or 3) must use the U.S. Department of Energy’s Commercial Buildings Energy
Consumption Survey (CBECS) data to estimate annual energy use.
Equation 1: Total annual greenhouse gas emissions

𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶2𝑒𝑒𝑇𝑇 = ∑i EnergySourcei × CO2eCoeff𝑖𝑖
Where:
• CO2e T is the total building annual greenhouse gas emissions before accounting for
renewable resources

• EnergySource i is the annual energy consumption of each energy source serving the project
(e.g. kWh/year Electricity or therms/year of Natural Gas)
• CO2eCoeff i is the CO 2 equivalent emissions coefficient per unit of energy generated,
consistent with the coefficients from EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance (e.g.
metric tons of CO 2e per kWh for regional grid electricity, or metric tons of CO2e per therm
of natural gas)
Use Equation 2 to estimate the annual greenhouse gas emissions offset by renewable energy for on-site
and off-site renewables with zero carbon emissions. Apply the equation separately to calculate
greenhouse gas emissions offset for on-site renewable energy, new off-site renewable energy, existing
off-site renewable energy, green-e certified EACs and carbon off-sites, and other EACs and carbon
offsets as applicable:
Equation 2: Annual greenhouse gas emissions offset by renewable energy, EACs, and carbon offsets
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶2𝑒𝑒𝑅𝑅 = ∑i RenewableSourcei × CO2eCoeff𝑖𝑖
Where:
• CO2e R is the annual greenhouse gas emissions offset by renewable energy
• RenewableSource i is the annual energy offset by each renewable source serving the project
(e.g. kWh/year Electricity)
• CO2eCoeff i is the CO 2 equivalent emissions coefficient per unit of energy generated for the
energy source replaced by the renewable energy, consistent with the coefficients from EA
Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance (e.g. metric tons of CO 2e per kWh for regional
grid electricity, or metric tons of CO2e per therm of natural gas)
For renewable energy systems with some carbon emissions (such as biofuel), contact USGBC to discuss
the calculation methodology.
Use Equation 3 to estimate the annual percentage greenhouse gas emissions offset through renewables.
Apply the equation separately to calculate percentage greenhouse gas emissions offset for on-site
renewable energy, new off-site renewable energy, and existing off-site renewable energy as applicable.
Equation 3. Percentage greenhouse gas emissions offset through renewables
% greenhouse gas emissions offset through renewables = CO2e R / CO2e T
Equation 4. Percent emission reduction from EACs and Carbon Offsets
CO2e R,EACs /(CO2e T – CO2e R,Onsite – CO2e R,NewOffsite – CO2e R,ExistingOffsite )
For projects with a contract length of less than fifteen years, use Equation 5 to prorate the annual
renewable energy purchase, annual EAc purchase, and/or carbon offset purchase:
Equation 5: Proration of off-site renewables, EACs, and Carbon Offsets
Equivalent Annual Purchase Amount = Annual Purchase Amount x Contract Length / 15
For bulk purchase, length of contract should be entered as 1 year.
Sum of points from multiple procurement sources

Using Table 1. add up the applicable points from equation 2, for on-site renewables and new and
existing off-site renewables; and equation 4 for EACs and carbon offsets (either Green-e or other), for a
total not to exceed 5 points plus 1 additional exemplary performance point if 100% of emissions are
offset using on-site renewable sources.
Renewable Energy Considerations

The renewable energy credit seeks to increase overall demand for renewable energy and the use of
grid-source renewable energy and carbon mitigation projects, with the goal of supporting broader grid-
scale decarbonization. Criteria rewards renewable energy investments that have a high probability of
causality (i.e. support development and installation of new renewables) and demonstrate long-term
commitment. Project teams should follow a hierarchy for selecting renewable energy sources to meet
credit requirements:
 First, on-site generation;
 second, local generation, such as community solar or wind, in instances where it will have a
beneficial decarbonizing impact;
 third, offsite generation projects with high probability of causality, e.g. power purchase
agreements;
 fourth, renewables from an existing renewable energy project, e.g. utility green tariff or
direct access to wholesale markets
 last, energy attribute certificates (EACs) and/or carbon offsets
The U.S. EPA’s Guide to Purchasing Green Power provides additional information on the process of and
strategies for procuring renewable energy.
On-Site Renewable Energy System Considerations

On-site renewable energy generation, when combined with careful consideration of building energy
time of use and grid peak demand, and storage in some grid regions, can reduce annual greenhouse gas
emissions, increase building resilience, and support effective grid management.
To qualify as an on-site system, the renewable energy must be generated on-site from renewable
sources produced at the building or contiguous campus site. Examples of on-site renewable energy
generation include:
 A photovoltaic array located on the project site.

 A wind tower located on a contiguous campus owned by the same entity as the project
building.
 Landfill gas processed in digesters on a contiguous campus owned by the same entity as
the project building, and used to produce thermal energy in the project building.
Note: earlier versions of LEED allowed some biofuels produced off-site to qualify as on-site renewable
energy. However, based on the clarifications provided in ASHRAE 90.1-2016 for on-site renewable
energy, and the clearer distinction between on-site and off-site renewable energy in LEED v4.1, biofuels
are only considered on-site renewable systems when the renewable source is harvested on site, and
used for on-site generation of electric or thermal energy.
Only usable energy generated from the on-site renewable system shall be considered towards the on-
site renewable energy contribution. Usable energy is defined as the output energy from the system less
any transmission and conversion losses, such as standby heat loss, losses when converting electricity
from DC to AC, or waste heat in a cogeneration system that is exhausted to the atmosphere during
periods of low thermal demand. Excess energy, beyond the building’s energy demand at a given point,
can be sold to the utility company (net metering).
A project team should use web resources and other tools available to determine the feasibility of
renewable systems, given the project site’s climate, context, and infrastructure. Consider the features of

the site, such as solar availability, wind patterns, and other renewable energy sources, and any seasonal
or daily variations in its supply. Certain project types may have special opportunities: office or university
campuses typically have available land, for example, and warehouse projects may have large roof areas.
Match the project’s energy needs with renewable energy output when selecting a renewable system.
For example, a sunny site is a good candidate for solar thermal hot water, but this type of renewable
resource is most cost-effective if the building has a constant demand for hot water. Accordingly, a hotel
or a multifamily project may be a better match for a solar thermal hot water system than an office
complex.
Daily and seasonal variations in loads also factor into the investigation of renewable energy. For
example, a residential project with low daytime electricity demand may require battery storage to
benefit from a photovoltaic (PV) array; an office building with high daytime demand may not.
On-site renewable systems must be installed and commissioned prior to LEED construction phase
project submission to qualify for on-site renewable energy generation credit.
New Off-Site Renewables

New off-site renewables are defined as those that have come online within the last year or contracted
for the building project (or for a portfolio of building projects or tenant improvement spaces) prior to
the development of the renewable energy project in which the project is investing.
The renewable energy system must be operational at the time of LEED project construction phase
submittal to earn credit.
Community renewable energy cooperatives, larger-scale investments, such as direct, voluntary

purchases in the form of power purchase agreements (PPAs), virtual PPAs, or renewable energy
investment trusts, qualify as new off-site renewables provided documentation demonstrates that they
meet the criteria described above. Contracts for these investments must indicate the specific system
used to generate the renewable energy, with sufficient information available to confirm the renewable
system generation capacity and allocation of the EACs (see Further Explanation, Renewable Attributes).
Investment in new off-site renewables creates new renewable energy supply and displaces energy and
emissions from fossil fuel-powered generators, particularly in regions where the grid mix is a higher
percentage of fossil fuels.
To qualify as a new renewable system, the contract length shall be a minimum of fifteen years, or the
annual energy renewable energy generation shall be prorated based on the contract term length. A
commitment to renew does not qualify as a new renewable resource.
Existing Off-Site Renewables
Existing off-site renewables are defined as those contracted from an existing renewable energy provider
or off-site renewable systems that were contracted for the building after the renewable system came
online and came online more than one year before building occupancy.
Existing off-site renewables, which include utility green tariff programs or direct access to wholesale
markets, may be more widely available depending on project location or budget. Investment in existing
renewable resources and utility programs remains an important strategy for sustaining market demand
for renewables and ensuring financial viability of existing projects.
The contract length shall be a minimum of fifteen years, or the annual energy renewable energy
generation shall be prorated based on the contract term length. Alternatively, for utility green tariff
programs where a fifteen-year contract is not available, project teams may show compliance with the
fifteen year minimum contract term by demonstrating that the project has an executed contract for the

maximum contract length available (with a minimum of one year), and the building owner must provide
a signed letter of commitment indicating that the project will continue to renew the renewable contract
or engage in an alternate renewable energy contract for a total of fifteen years.
The contract for existing renewable contracts shall confirm that all contributing renewable resources
have come online or been built within the last fifteen years to qualify for credit compliance.
Energy Attribute Certificates and Carbon Offsets

The contract for EACs and carbon offsets shall confirm that all contributing renewable resources or
carbon offsets are from projects that have come online or been built within the last fifteen years to
qualify for credit compliance.
To earn up to three points under the credit, projects may purchase EACs and carbon offsets meeting
the Green-e Renewable Energy Standard or the Green-e Climate Standard with an annual purchase
amount that offsets 100% to 300% of total annual greenhouse gas emissions for a total of fifteen years.
Projects not using Green-e certified products can earn one point under the credit by purchasing annual
EACs and carbon offsets that offset 150% of total annual greenhouse gas emissions for a total of fifteen
years. These must be certified under an eco-label developed by an independent organization with
transparent accounting process and standards in place which address the following:
 Verifiable chain of custody
 Verifiable age of renewable energy
 Tracking of GHG reductions from eligible projects
 Mechanism to prevent double-counting
 Third party–verified retail transaction
The executed contract must specify the purchasing goals and is valid for the duration indicated in the
credit requirements, or includes a bulk purchase amount with the total purchase amount matching the
total annual amount indicated in the credit requirements multiplied by fifteen years.
All of the above procurement strategies play an important role in reducing global greenhouse gas
emissions. Leveraging a combination of procurement strategies can send important demand signals and
spur further investment in renewables markets globally.
Documentation On-site system Off-site
Renewables
Renewable system rated capacity X X
Calculations to determine energy generated X X
Calculations to determine greenhouse gas emissions avoided X X
from renewable generation or off-site procurement
Documentation of annual greenhouse gas emissions X X
Confirmation of renewable attribute ownership X
(if owned by
building owner)
Contract indicating duration and renewable attribute ownership X X
(if owned by 3rd
party)
Contract indicating percentage ownership, lease, or allocation of X (New)
new off-site renewable system, and specific location of new off-
site system

If selling EACs for on-site system, contract and Green-e X
certification for EAC or carbon offset purchase for a minimum of
fifteen years
Calculations showing renewable electricity, EACs, or carbon X
offsets for targeted point threshold
Purchase letter or contract of commitment showing renewable X
electricity, EACs, or carbon offsets for targeted point threshold
and confirmation of the age of system
Eco-label documentation showing label development, transparent X
accounting processes and standards, if not Green-e certified

 LEED O+M EA credit Energy Performance: Investments in renewable energy throughout the
building life cycle can help reduce building greenhouse gas emissions and improve the
building’s energy performance score, increase market demand for renewables, and support the
growth and financial feasibility of new renewable energy projects.

EA Credit: Enhanced Refrigerant Management
Intent
To reduce ozone depletion and support early compliance with the Montreal Protocol while minimizing
direct contributions to climate change.
Requirements
MF
Option 1. No Refrigerants or Low-Impact Refrigerants (1 point)
Do not use refrigerants, or use only refrigerants (naturally occurring or synthetic) that have an ozone
depletion potential (ODP) of zero and a global warming potential (GWP) of less than 50.
OR
Option 2. Calculation of Refrigerant Impact (1 point)
Select refrigerants that are used in heating, ventilating, air-conditioning, and refrigeration (HVAC&R)
equipment to minimize or eliminate the emission of compounds that contribute to ozone depletion and
climate change. The combination of all new and existing base building and tenant HVAC&R equipment
that serve the project must comply with the following formula:
IP units SI units
LCGWP + LCODP x 105 ≤ 100 LCGWP + LCODP x 105 ≤ 13
Calculation definitions for LCGWP + LCODP x Calculation definitions for LCGWP + LCODP x
10 5 ≤ 100 10 5 ≤ 13
(IP units) (SI units)
LCODP = [ODPr x (Lr x Life +Mr) x Rc]/Life LCODP = [ODPr x (Lr x Life +Mr) x Rc]/Life
LCGWP = [GWPr x (Lr x Life +Mr) x Rc]/Life LCGWP = [GWPr x (Lr x Life +Mr) x Rc]/Life
LCODP: Lifecycle Ozone Depletion Potential LCODP: Lifecycle Ozone Depletion Potential
(lb CFC 11/Ton-Year) (kg CFC 11/(kW/year))
LCGWP: Lifecycle Direct Global Warming LCGWP: Lifecycle Direct Global Warming
Potential Potential
(lb CO 2 /Ton-Year) (kg CO 2 /kW-year)
GWPr: Global Warming Potential of Refrigerant GWPr: Global Warming Potential of Refrigerant

(0 to 12,000 lb CO 2 /lbr) (0 to 12,000 kg CO 2 /kg r)
ODPr: Ozone Depletion Potential of Refrigerant ODPr: Ozone Depletion Potential of Refrigerant
(0 to 0.2 lb CFC 11/lbr) (0 to 0.2 kg CFC 11/kg r)
Lr: Refrigerant Leakage Rate Lr: Refrigerant Leakage Rate

(2.0%) (2.0%)
Mr: End-of-life Refrigerant Loss Mr: End-of-life Refrigerant Loss

(10%) (10%)
Rc: Refrigerant Charge Rc: Refrigerant Charge

(0.5 to 5.0 lbs of refrigerant per ton of gross (0.065 to 0.65 kg of refrigerant per kW of AHRI
AHRI rated cooling capacity) rated or Eurovent Certified cooling capacity)
Life: Equipment Life Life: Equipment Life

(10 years; default based on equipment type, (10 years; default based on equipment type,
unless otherwise demonstrated) unless otherwise demonstrated)
For multiple types of equipment, calculate a weighted average of all base building HVAC&R equipment,
using the following formula:
IP units SI units
[ ∑ ( LCGWP + LCODP x 105 ) x Qunit ] [ ∑ ( LCGWP + LCODP x 105 ) x Qunit ]
≤ 100 ≤ 13
——————————————————Qtotal ——————————————————
Qtotal
Calculation definitions for Calculation definitions for

[ ∑ (LCGWP + LCODP x 10 5) x Qunit ] / Qtotal [ ∑ (LCGWP + LCODP x 10 5) x Qunit ] / Qtotal
≤ 100 ≤ 13
(IP units) (SI units)
Qunit = Gross AHRI rated cooling capacity of an Qunit = Eurovent Certified cooling capacity of
individual HVAC or refrigeration unit (Tons) an individual HVAC or refrigeration unit (kW)
Qtotal = Total gross AHRI rated cooling capacity Qtotal = Total Eurovent Certified cooling
of all HVAC or refrigeration capacity of all HVAC or refrigeration (kW)
Guidance

There are no substantive changes to the credit requirements; refer to the LEED v4 reference guide, with
the following additions:
Beta Update
This is a new credit from the LEED v4 BD+C rating system.
Further Explanation
Option 2
Confirmation that only no or low-impact refrigerants are used
X
Equipment type X
Refrigerant charge calculations (VRF systems only) X
Equipment cooling capacity X
Provide refrigerant equipment schedule or GreenChill certification X

(commercial refrigerant systems)
Equipment quantity X
Refrigerant type X
Refrigerant charge (plus supporting documentation, if applicable) X
Equipment life (plus supporting documentation, if applicable) X
Leak test results (commercial refrigeration systems only) X

LEED O+M EA credit Enhanced Refrigerant Management: Effective refrigerant selection and
management, especially at the point of disposal, is a critical strategy for addressing climate change and
minimizing the release of building-related emissions into the atmosphere. Additionally, careful
consideration of refrigerants used in HVAC&R equipment can improve performance and reduce
operating costs throughout the building life cycle.

EA Credit: Domestic Hot Water Pipe Insulation
Intent
To reduce energy consumption and the burden on water supply and wastewater systems by increasing
the efficiency of hot water distribution.
Requirements
MF
Install at least R-4 insulation on all domestic hot water piping, including subslab pipes. Insulation on all
piping elbows and tees must adequately insulate changes in direction.
Run buried piping in a slab or below grade through a protective, waterproof raceway, channel, sleeve, or
path whose internal dimensions and changes of direction are large enough that the piping and insulation
can be removed and replaced without damaging the piping’s dimensional integrity.
The waterproof sleeve is not required for below-grade piping if the insulation manufacturer stipulates
that the pipe insulation will maintain its insulating value in underground applications in damp soil when
installed according to the manufacturer's instructions. This exception does not apply to piping that runs
through or under building slabs.
Guidance
modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
Efficient hot water distribution and performance test options were removed from LEED v4 BD+C:
Multifamily Midrise EA credit Efficient Hot Water Distribution system, and the credit was renamed.
Step 1. Specify pipe insulation thickness and installation requirements
 A minimum of R-4 insulation on all hot water pipe is required.
 For best performance, specify that pipe insulation be as thick as the pipe diameter, up to a
maximum of 2 inches (50 mm).
 Identify any impediments to complete and continuous insulation, such as where pipes pass
through fire-rated walls.
Step 2. Install Insulation

 Insulation must be continuous along the entire length of pipe from the point that it exits the
heater to point that it reaches the fixture. It must sealed at all seams and joints with adhesive,
solvent, or tape, per the manufacturer’s instructions.
 Pay special attention to sealing at elbows, Ts, and all joints between lengths of insulation.

 Drill sufficiently large holes through structural members so that insulation can be installed
along the entire length of pipes.
Step 3. Verify installation.

 Inspect the insulation and confirm that it meets the requirements at the predrywall inspection.
Further Explanation
All
Manufacturer’s cut-sheet for hot water pipe insulation X

 LEED O+M WE credit Water Performance: Insulating hot water pipes reduces heat loss and can
raise water temperature, which can help conserve water by reducing the wait time for hot
water.

MR Prerequisite: Storage and Collection
of Recyclables
Intent
To reduce the waste that is generated by building occupants and hauled to and disposed of in landfills.
Requirements
MF
Provide dedicated areas accessible to waste haulers and building occupants for the collection and
storage of recyclable materials for the entire building. Collection and storage areas may be separate
locations. Research local recycling programs and determine which materials will be stored separately on
site, which may be reused via donation, which may be commingled into a single stream and separated
off site. Recyclable materials separated on and off site can include mixed paper, corrugated cardboard,
glass, plastics, metals and organic waste. Take appropriate measures for safe collection, storage and
disposal of batteries, mercury containing lamps and electronic waste to the extent possible.
Guidance
Please refer to the LEED v4 reference guide for BD+C for additional guidance for this prerequisite, with
the following additions and modifications made for v4.1 residential rating system:
Further Explanation
All
Verification of recycled material types X
Narrative describing recycling storage and collection strategies X
Floor plans indicating recycling storage and collection areas X

 LEED O+M MR prerequisite Waste Performance: A similar prerequisite with modified
requirements for existing buildings is required for the O+M v4.1 rating system and is a strategy
that can help achieve the MR prerequisite Waste Performance.

MR Prerequisite: Construction and Demolition
Waste Management Planning
Intent
To reduce construction and demolition waste disposed of in landfills and incineration facilities by
recovering, reusing, and recycling materials.
Requirements
MF
Develop and implement a construction and demolition waste management plan:
 Establish waste diversion goals for the project by identifying at least five materials (both
structural and nonstructural) targeted for diversion.
 Specify whether materials will be separated or comingled and describe the diversion strategies
planned for the project. Describe where the material will be taken and how the recycling facility
will process the material including expected diversion rates for each material stream.
Provide a final report detailing all major waste streams generated, including disposal and diversion
rates.
Alternative daily cover (ADC) does not qualify as material diverted from disposal. Include materials
destined for ADC in the calculations as waste. Land-clearing debris is not considered construction,
demolition, or renovation waste that can contribute to waste diversion.
Guidance
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
Minor updates were made to clarify the requirements for a waste management plan and estimating
diversion in this prerequisite. In response to numerous public comments, clarifications have been made
for how to count site separated versus commingled recycling as material streams in LEED and
additional guidance has been provided on how to account for waste prevented through source
reduction as a possible strategy in a waste management plan.
Further Explanation
Effective Construction Waste Management Strategies
Refer to LEED v4 reference guide with the following clarifications and additions:
Commingled, source separated and counting material streams
Feedback from version 4 and public comment has shown that additional clarifications are needed
regarding the contribution of commingled waste as “material streams.” The following paragraphs
provide clarifications about commingled waste in LEED that is applicable to this prerequisite and the
M&R Credit: Construction & Demolition Waste Management.

Each source separated material sent to an individual recycler who processes that single material is
considered one material stream; materials sent to commingled facilities for mixed-recyclable processing
are considered one stream.
For a project to be able to count off-site sorted materials as multiple material streams, the following
must be met:
 Project team collects multiple materials on the jobsite (often in one bin)
 The materials are taken to a location where they are separated prior to being processed or
otherwise sent for recycling
 Each material that is sent to separate recyclers or processors are considered separate material
streams. For example, wood separated and sent to wood recycling directly can count as one
unique stream. If mixed materials are sent to a commingled recycling processor, that counts as
one stream even if they are made up of multiple materials.
 Each material stream must be measured by weight or volume (and converted to a consistent
format) and included in the Waste Management Plan.
Commingled recycling facilities must be regulated by a local or state authority. Note that regulatory
authorities often do not regulate recycling rates of facilities. To determine the commingled facility
recycling rate, projects must use an average diversion rate for the facility that generally corresponds to
the time materials were generated on the project and sent to the facility. The average recycling rate for
the facility must exclude ADC. Commingled materials that are processed in the same way (i.e. over the
same recycling line) are counted as one “stream” in LEED, even if the processing facility separates the
output into multiple materials for recovery after processing.
Since commingled recycling counts as one stream, projects are encouraged to seek additional material
streams through waste prevention and diversion. Successful projects have implemented the following
strategies to count as material streams in LEED:
 Quantify waste prevention design and construction techniques that result in source reduction.
 Stage collection bins onsite to correspond with construction phases and contractor schedules. If
one trade is onsite for a defined period that has a recyclable waste stream, consider having a
single bin for that type of waste instead of—or in addition to—a commingled bin (examples
include a bin for concrete recycling during demolition, or separate bins for drywall, wood
framing, or roofing waste during those phases).
 Salvage components from the project renovation and reuse them in the project or for other
projects.
 Donate surplus materials.
 Participate in manufacturer take-back programs for products like ceiling tiles or flooring.
 Work with subcontractors and/or finish material suppliers to eliminate or recycle packaging
waste and take-back extra materials.
All of the above strategies count as material streams. Multiple bins for source separated materials are
not required throughout construction for them to count as a material stream, nor must they be
significant portions of the total project waste generation. Material streams should account for 5% of
project waste, but that requirement is negotiable for challenging project situations.
In all cases, trash, ADC, and incineration do not count as material streams since they are not forms of
waste diversion.
Counting waste prevention techniques/source reduction as a material stream
Reducing waste by thoughtful design results in the reduction of waste at the source. Stopping waste
before it is created is always higher priority than managing waste after construction, and therefore
LEED v4.1 allows projects to quantify waste prevention through design.

 Source reduction strategies should be incorporated into the design of the project and outlined
in the CWM plan. These strategies include reusing existing materials and components, design for
modular construction sizes and techniques, specify reduced packaging from vendors, design for
industry-standard measurements, eliminate unnecessary finishes, and prefabrication of
components or assemblies.
 Calculate waste prevented through source reduction as compared to standard practice.
Estimate the amount of materials that would have been required for the system or finish, plus
any extras, and estimate an amount that would have gone to waste through typical construction
practices. For example, many projects order 10%-15% extra materials for finishes, and some
portion of that extra supply likely would end up as waste. Source reduction should be provided
on a weight or volume and included as a part of the CWM plan.
Waste recovery strategies
After exploring source reduction strategies to prevent waste, determine strategies for on-site and off-
site waste collection during construction and consider the infrastructure needed for implementation.
Projects may use a combination of on-site separation and commingled collection, depending on what is
appropriate for the project location, material stream, and available facilities and haulers.
 Identify diversion options for materials and locate recyclers or organizations that provide
diversion options for the material streams targeted. Confirm each facility can accept the types
of materials the project plans to send for recycling. Estimate a diversion rate for the
facility/organization receiving the material stream, including ADC amounts for commingled
recyclables.
 Incineration of some C&D materials may be considered diversion for international projects only
if reuse and recycling methods are not readily available in the project’s location; this must be
included in the CWM plan.
o Wood-derived fuel, or wood combustion, is considered diversion and not subject to the
additional requirements for other forms of incineration.
o See MR Credit Construction & Demolition Waste Management for additional details on
waste-to-energy.
 Using a recycling facility for which recycling rates have been independently certified by a third
party, such as the Recycling Certification Institute (recyclingcertification.org) provides
assurance that diversion rates are accurate and that materials is actually being diverted from
landfill. See MR Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Management for more information on
third-party validated C&D recycling facilities.
All
Construction waste management plan X
Total construction waste X

that can help achieve the MR prerequisite Waste Performance.

MR Credit: Building Life-Cycle Impact
Reduction
Intent
To encourage adaptive reuse and optimize the environmental performance of products and materials.
Requirements
MF
Demonstrate reduced environmental effects during initial project decision-making by reusing existing
building resources or demonstrating a reduction in materials use through life-cycle assessment. Achieve
one of the following options.
Option 1. Historic Building Reuse (5 points)
Maintain the existing building structure, envelope, and interior nonstructural elements of a historic
building or contributing building in a historic district. To qualify, the building or historic district must
be listed or eligible for listing in the local, state, or national register of historic places. Do not
demolish any part of a historic building or contributing building in a historic district unless it is
deemed structurally unsound or hazardous. For buildings listed locally, approval of any demolition
must be granted by the local historic preservation review board. For buildings listed in a state
register or the U.S. National Register of Historic Places (or local equivalent for projects outside the
U.S.), approval must appear in a programmatic agreement with the state historic preservation office
or National Park Service (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
Any alteration (preservation, restoration, or rehabilitation) of a historic building or a contributing

building in a historic district on the project site must be done in accordance with local or national
standards for rehabilitation, whichever are applicable. If building is not subject to historic review,
include on the project team a preservation professional who meets U.S. federal qualifications for
historic architects (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.); the preservation professional
must confirm conformance to the Secretary of Interior’s Standards for the Treatment of Historic
Properties (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
OR
Option 2. Renovation of Abandoned or Blighted Building (5 points)
Maintain at least 50%, by surface area, of the existing building structure, enclosure, and interior
structural elements for buildings that meet local criteria of abandoned or are considered blight. The
building must be renovated to a state of productive occupancy. Up to 25% of the building surface
area may be excluded from credit calculation because of deterioration or damage.
OR
Option 3. Building and Material Reuse (1–4 points)

Materials contributing toward this credit may not contribute toward MR Credit Building Product
Disclosure and Optimization - Sourcing of Raw Materials. Path 1 or Path 2 (a/b) may be attempted
but combining Path 1 and Path 2 to achieve points is not allowed.
Path 1: Maintain A Combination Of Structural And Non-Structural Elements (2-4 points)
Reuse or salvage building materials from off site or on site as a percentage of the surface area, , as
listed in Table 1. Include structural elements (e.g., floors, concrete), enclosure materials (e.g., skin,
framing), and permanently installed interior elements (e.g., walls, doors, floor coverings, ceiling
systems, etc). Exclude from the calculation window assemblies and any hazardous materials that are
remediated as a part of the project.
Table 1. Points for reuse of building materials
Percentage of completed Points BD&C (Core

Points BD&C
project surface area reused and Shell)
25% 2 2
50% 3 3
75% 4 5
OR
Path 2a: Maintain Existing Walls, Floors and Roofs (1-3 points):
Maintain the existing building structure (including floor and roof decking) and envelope (the exterior
skin and framing, excluding window assemblies and nonstructural roofing materials).
Percent of existing walls, floors and roof reuse Points
25% 1
50% 2
75% 3
AND/OR
Path 2b: Maintain Interior Nonstructural Elements (1 point)
Use existing interior nonstructural elements (e.g. interior walls, doors, floor coverings and ceiling
systems) in at least 33% (by area) of the completed building, including additions.
OR
Option 4. Whole-building Life-Cycle Assessment (1-4 points)

For new construction (buildings or portions of buildings), conduct a life-cycle assessment of the
project’s structure and enclosure and select one or more of the following paths below to earn up to
4 points:
Path 1: Conduct a life cycle assessment of the project’s structure and enclosure (1 point).
Path 2: Conduct a life cycle assessment of the project’s structure and enclosure that demonstrates a
minimum of 5% reduction, compared with a baseline building in at least three of the six impact
categories listed below, one of which must be global warming potential (2 points).
Path 3: Conduct a life cycle assessment of the project’s structure and enclosure that demonstrates a
minimum of 10% reduction, compared with a baseline building, in at least three of the six impact
categories listed below, one of which must be global warming potential (3 points).
Path 4: Meet requirements of Path 3 and incorporate building reuse and/or salvage materials into
the project’s structure and enclosure for the proposed design. Demonstrate reductions compared
with a baseline building of at least 20% reduction for global warming potential and demonstrate at
least 10% reduction in two additional impact categories listed below (4 points).
For Paths 2, 3 and 4 listed above, no impact category assessed as part of the life-cycle assessment
may increase by more than 5% compared with the baseline building. Include a narrative of how the
life cycle assessment was conducted and if applicable for paths 2, 3 and 4 what changes were made
to proposed buildings in order to achieve the related impact reductions.
The baseline and proposed buildings must be of comparable size, function, and operating energy
performance as defined in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. The service life of the
baseline and proposed buildings must be the same and at least 60 years to fully account for
maintenance and replacement. Use the same life-cycle assessment software tools and data sets to
evaluate both the baseline building and the proposed building, and report all listed impact
categories. Data sets must be compliant with ISO 14044.
Select at least three of the following impact categories for reduction:
 global warming potential (greenhouse gases), in kg CO2e;

 depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer, in kg CFC-11e;
 acidification of land and water sources, in moles H+ or kg SO2e;
 eutrophication, in kg nitrogen eq or kg phosphate eq;
 formation of tropospheric ozone, in kg NOx, kg O3 eq, or kg ethene; and
 depletion of nonrenewable energy resources, in MJ using CML / depletion of fossil fuels in
TRACI
Guidance
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
In response to public comments and project team inquiries, updates in v4.1 include a greater focus on
reducing embodied carbon of building structures and enclosures. Changes to this credit are intended to
incentivize reuse of existing buildings and components, as well as make building reuse calculations
simpler. Further, if buildings cannot be re-used wholly, changes to the lifecycle analysis option of the
credit encourage projects to conduct whole building life cycle assessment as an integral design
component for many more buildings.

LEED v4 credit Option 1 (Historic Building reuse) and Option 2 (Renovation of Abandoned and Blighted
Building) are unchanged for v4.1. Credit Option 3 (Building and Material Reuse) now includes two
pathways (2a and 2b) for calculating building reuse. These changes essentially restore the LEED v2009
credit pathways (MR c1.1: Building reuse – maintain existing walls, floors and roofs; and MR c1.2: Building
reuse – maintain interior nonstructural elements) that provided simpler, more prescriptive calculations.
Projects that have experienced difficulty in selecting and demonstrating a combination of structural and
non-structural reuse in v4 now have the option of selecting either one or both types of re-use (structural
and/or non-structural interior) depending on project scope.
Credit Option 4, Whole Building Life Cycle Assessment, now has an entry pathway that rewards the
effort to conduct a whole building life-cycle assessment without having to demonstrate specific impact
reductions. Further, a second point is now possible for showing 5% reductions compared to a baseline
for three impact categories including global warming potential (GWP). The third point in this option
remains unchanged to the v4 WBLCA credit requirements (10% reductions compared to the baseline in
three impact categories including GWP). Finally, to greater reward embodied carbon reductions
through reuse, project teams can now earn up to four points in Credit Option 4 by incorporating large-
scale building reuse and/or salvaged materials into a project’s structure and enclosure and perform a
life cycle assessment that shows at least a 20% reduction in global warming potential and at least 10%
reduction in two other impact categories.
Option 3: Building and Material Reuse
Refer to LEED v4 reference guide with the following additions and modifications:
New general guidance for v4.1 applicable to both Paths 1 and 2:

Identify non-structural and structural elements of the existing space (e.g. walls, doors, floor coverings
and ceiling systems etc.) that can be retained separately and in combination to select best
pathway/approach for re-use (Path 1 or Path 2). Path 1 is the same as current LEED v4 Building and
Material re-use credit requiring on site or off site reuse for both structural and interior non-structural
elements. Path 2 is the same as LEED v2009 Building reuse credits but with slight modifications to some
thresholds: Maintain Existing Walls, Floors and Roofs and Maintain Interior Non-Structural Elements.
Path 2 has two parts: Path 2a (to be used for existing structure reuse) and Path 2b (to be used for
interior nonstructural reuse). Path 1 or Path 2 may be attempted but combining Path 1 and Path 2 to
achieve points is not allowed.
Option 4: Whole Building Life Cycle Assessment

Step 1: Collect information needed to perform life cycle assessment of structure and enclosure of
the building
Follow standard process associated with performing a typical whole building life cycle assessment. In
general this can be broken down into 1) Define goal and scope of assessment 2) Collect information
about materials and scenarios 3) Perform calculations for impacts using reliable LCA assessment tools
4) Understand and interpret results 5) Document process and produce detailed assessment reports.
Ensure that the scope of the analysis is a cradle-to-grave assessment which includes environmental
impacts associated with the life-cycle stages for the building structure and enclosure. Follow LEED v4
reference guide for minimum requirements for LCA related to products, functional equivalence, service
life and system boundary under Step 1.
Further Explanation
Calculations
Option 3: Building and Material Reuse
Path 1 Calculations
Follow Option 3. Building and Material Reuse LEED v4 reference guide Steps 1, 2 and 3. The original
LEED v4 Building and Material Reuse concept and calculation is unchanged (use Equation 2, LEED v4
credit Option 3: Building and Material Reuse).

Equation 2. Percentage of existing building reuse
Existing building reuse = Surface area reused on-site + Surface area reused from off-site x 100
Existing building surface area – hazardous materials area
Path 2 Calculations
Refer to LEED v2009 implementation guidance for Building Reuse credits with the following
modifications:
Choose if you will be maintaining a certain percentage (25%, 50% or 75% for 1, 2 or 3 points) of the
existing building structure (including floor and roof decking) and envelope (the exterior skin and
framing, excluding window assemblies and nonstructural roofing materials) AND/OR calculate how to
use existing interior nonstructural elements (e.g. interior walls, doors, floor coverings and ceiling
systems) in at least 33% (by area) of the completed building, including additions (for 1 point). If the
reuse area is close to a credit threshold, recall that off-site salvaged material can be purchased and
counted into the design calculation as reuse. Once the scope of all reuse and salvaged materials is
determined, ensure that all areas intended for reuse are well-defined and incorporated into the design
and construction.
If the project will reuse part of an existing building, inventory the existing conditions. The architect
should develop a floor plan showing the location of existing structural components, exterior and party
walls, and exterior windows and doors. The drawings must be detailed enough to determine the surface
area of all elements to be reused.
Confirm that the elements designated for reuse can be reused and take the necessary steps to acquire
or retain and maintain them. Projects that incorporate part of an existing building but do not meet the
requirements for this credit may apply the reused portion toward the achievement of MR Credit
Construction and Demolition Waste Management, or MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and
Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials, Leadership Extraction Practices. To apply the reused portion
as Construction and Demolition diversion, determine an approximate weight or volume for existing
building elements and include those as distinct material stream(s) in the calculations. To apply the
reused portion as Leadership Extraction Practices, determine the cost of each material. This cost will be
the actual cost paid or, if the material came from on-site, the replacement value. The replacement value
can be determined by pricing a comparable material in the local market; exclude labor and shipping. If a
project team receives a discount from a vendor, the replacement value should reflect the discounted
price as opposed to the list value. When the actual cost paid for the reused or salvaged material is
below the cost of an equivalent new item, use the higher value (actual cost) cost of the new equivalent
item in the calculations. When the cost to reclaim an item found on-site is less than the cost of an
equivalent new item, use the cost of the new item (or replacement cost).
Path 2a Calculations
Refer to v2009 Section 6, Calculations for MR c1.1 (Building re-use: Maintain Walls, Floors and Roof).
This credit is based on the surface areas of major existing structural and envelope elements. Structural
support elements such as columns and beams are considered part of the larger surfaces they support,
so they are not quantified separately. Prepare a spreadsheet listing all envelope and structural elements
within the building. Quantify each item, listing the square footage of both the existing area and the
retained area. Determine the percentage of existing elements that are retained by dividing the square
footage of the total retained materials area by the square footage of the total existing materials area.
Take measurements as if preparing a bid for construction of a building. For structural floors and roof
decking, calculate the square footage of each component. For existing exterior walls and existing walls
adjoining other buildings or additions, calculate the square footage of the exterior wall only and

subtract the area of exterior windows and exterior doors from both the existing and the reused area
tallies. For interior structural walls (e.g., shear walls), calculate the square footage of 1 side of the
existing wall element. Table 1 provides an example of the calculations for Path 2a.
Table 1. Sample Building Structure and Envelope Reuse Calculation for Path 2a.
Existing Reused Percentage

Structure/Envelope Element Area (sq Area (sq Reused
ft) ft) (%)
Foundation/slab on Grade 11,520 11,520 100
2nd floor Deck 11,520 10,000 87
1st floor interior structural Walls 240 240 100
2nd floor interior structural Walls 136 136 100
Roof Deck 11,520 11,520 100
North Exterior Wall (excl. windows) 8,235 7,150 87
South Exterior Wall (excl. windows) 8,235 8,235 100
East Exterior Wall (excl. windows) 6,535 6,535 100
West Exterior Wall (excl. windows) 6,535 5,820 81
Total 64,476 61,156 95
Exclude the following items from this calculation: nonstructural roofing material, window assemblies,
structural and envelope materials that are deemed structurally unsound, hazardous materials, and
materials that pose a contamination risk to building occupants.
Path 2b Calculations
Refer to LEED v2009 Section 6, Calculations for MR c1.2 (Building Reuse: Maintain Interior Non
Structural Elements)
Existing building reuse = Area (sq ft) of all retained interior non-structural elements x 100
Total area (sq ft) of interior non-structural elements
Fixed items, such as nonstructural walls and doors, are included in this credit and count toward the
percentage of reuse.
Option 4: Whole Building Life Cycle Assessment

Refer to LEED v4 reference guide with the following modifications and additions:
This option now has four thresholds outlined in four pathways. To achieve one point, the project must
conduct a compliant lifecycle assessment of the project’s structure and enclosure. To earn additional
points, the proposed building must demonstrate a reduction in global warming potential and in two of
five other impact categories when compared to a baseline building and include a narrative to explain
the changes being made to proposed buildings in order to achieve the impact reductions (see credit
requirements).
Within Option 4, choose Path 1 (whole building life cycle analysis of the project) and/or Path 2, 3 or 4
(comparative whole-building life cycle analysis) as outlined in credit requirements. Note that for Path 1,
project teams must complete a standard Whole Building Life Cycle Assessment (WBLCA) and report
the impact categories in a WBLCA report, however there are no thresholds for reductions necessary to
earn this point.
For Path 2, 3 and 4 as mentioned above, project teams must conduct a comparative WBLCA analysis
and include a narrative summarizing differences between baseline and proposed building that
contribute to the differences in LCA results. Points can be achieved as follows:

 2 points – demonstrated impact reduction of at least 5% in Global Warming Potential and at
least 2 other impact categories.
 3 points – demonstrated impact reduction of at least 10% in Global Warming Potential and at
least 2 other impact categories.
 4 points – demonstrated impact reduction of 20% in Global Warming Potential and at least 10%
in at least 2 other impact categories. This option must also incorporate building reuse and/or
salvaged materials as a part of the proposed structure or enclosure design. Strategies that
offset significant amounts of embodied GWP include reuse of foundations, concrete structures,
metal systems, and other high-impact structural materials. Reuse elements may be from on-site
or off-site, and should be modeled following guidelines for small scale reuse (see Further
Explanation, Small Scale Reuse in LEED v4), these guidelines should also be used for large scale
reuse incorporation in Path 4 for LEED v4.1.
Life-cycle impact measures or indicators

Refer to LEED v4 reference guide with the following additions:
Reporting of impact category results: Report impacts in units of “per square foot”, rounded to the
nearest 10-4 for all six impact categories.
1 2 3 4
Documentation of historic designation status

X
Narrative describing demolition (if any)
X
Documentation of how additions and alterations (if any)
X
meet local review board requirements
Narrative describing abandoned or blighted status
X
Structural reused elements table and calculations (Option 3,
X X
Path 1)
Interior non-structural reused elements table and
calculations (Option 3, Path 2) X X
WBLCA report for structure and enclosure of building (Path X

1)
WBLCA report that includes description of LCA X
assumptions, scope and analysis process for baseline
building and proposed building, life cycle impact
assessment summary showing outputs of proposed building
with % change from baseline building for all impact
categories in a narrative form indicating which path was
pursued and how reductions were achieved (Paths 2-4)

 LEED O+M MR prerequisite Waste Performance: The concept above is a collection of strategies
that can help achieve MR prerequisite Waste Performance in the O+M v4.1 rating system.

MR Credit: Environmentally Preferable
Products
Intent
To increase demand for products or building components that minimize material consumption through
recycled and recyclable content, reclamation, or overall reduced life-cycle impacts.
Requirements
MF
Option 1. Environmentally Preferable Products (1-6 points)
Use products that meet one or more of the following criteria. At least 70% of each compliant building
component (listed in Table 2), by weight or volume, must meet one of the requirements below. A single
component that meets more than one criterion does not earn additional credit.
 The product contains at least 25% reclaimed material, including salvaged, refurbished, or reused
materials. For renovation projects, existing components are considered reclaimed. Wood by-
products can be counted as reclaimed material. These include items from secondary
manufacturers; felled, diseased, or dead trees from urban or suburban areas; orchard trees that
are unproductive and cut for replacement; and wood recovered from landfills or water bodies.
 The product contains at least 25% postconsumer or 50% preconsumer content.
 Wood products must be Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certified, or USGBC-approved
equivalent.
 Bio-based materials. Bio-based products must meet the Sustainable Agriculture Network’s
Sustainable Agriculture Standard. Bio-based raw materials must be tested using ASTM Test
Method D6866 and be legally harvested, as defined by the exporting and receiving country.
Exclude hide products, such as leather and other animal skin material.
 Concrete that consists of at least 30% fly ash or slag used as a cement substitute.
 Extended producer responsibility. Products purchased from a manufacturer (producer) that
participates in an extended producer responsibility program or is directly responsible for
extended producer responsibility.
Table 2. Maximum points for compliant building components
Component Points
Floor covering* 70%+ for 1pt
Insulation** 70%+ for 1pt
Framing/Structural Systems 70%+ for 1pt
Drywall, interior masonry walls 70%+ for 1pt
Concrete: cement and / or aggregate 70%+ for 1pt

Roofing 70%+ for 1pt
Siding 70%+ for 1pt
Doors (not including insulated doors or garage 70%+ for 1pt

door)
Windows 70%+ for 1pt
Cabinets 70%+ for 1pt
Countertops (kitchens and bathrooms) 70%+ for 1pt
Interior trim 70%+ for 1pt
Decking or patio material 70%+ for 1pt
* Floor areas with no floor covering ((i.e., exposed sealed concrete) automatically meet credit
requirements
** Excluding HVAC and pipe insulation. Exterior rigid foam products may be omitted from credit
calculations.
OR
Achieve one or more of the options below, for a maximum of 6 points.
Option 2. BPDO - Environmental Product Declarations (1-2 points)
Path 1: Environmental Product Declaration (EPD)

Use at least 20 different permanently installed products sourced from at least five different
manufacturers that meet one of the disclosure criteria below. (10 different permanently installed
products from three different manufacturers for CS and Warehouses & Distribution centers).
 Life-cycle assessment and environmental product declarations.

o Products with a publicly available, critically reviewed life-cycle assessment conforming
to ISO 14044 that have at least a cradle to gate scope are valued as one whole product
for the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
o Product-specific Type III EPD -- Internally Reviewed. Products with an internally

critically reviewed LCA in accordance with ISO 14071. Products with product-specific
internal EPDs which conform to ISO 14025, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930 and have at least
a cradle to gate scope are valued as one whole product for the purposes of credit
achievement calculation.
o Industry-wide Type III EPD -- Products with third-party certification (Type III), including
external verification, in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant
by the program operator. Products with industry-wide EPDs, which conform to ISO
14025, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930 and have at least a cradle to gate scope are valued
as one whole product for the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
 Environmental Product Declarations which conform to ISO 14025 and EN 15804 or ISO 21930
and have at least a cradle to gate scope.
o Product-specific Type III EPD -- Products with third-party certification (Type III),
including external verification and external critical review in which the manufacturer is

explicitly recognized as the participant by the program operator are valued as 1.5
products for the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
 USGBC approved program – Products that comply with other USGBC approved environmental
product declaration frameworks.
AND/OR
Path 2. Multi-Attribute Optimization (1 point)

Use products that comply with one of the criteria below for 10%, by cost, of the total value of
permanently installed products in the project or use at least 10 permanently installed products sourced
from at least three different manufacturers. Products will be valued as below.
Life Cycle Impact Reduction Action Plan (value at 50% by cost or ½ product)
The manufacturer has produced a product specific LCA using EN 15804 or ISO 21930 for the
product and has provided a publicly available action plan to mitigate or reduce life cycle
impacts over time. The action plan must be product-specific (not company, manufacturer or
brand), and must include the following information:
o Description of the LCA conducted including the dataset, software or platform used by
manufacturer to complete the analysis.
o Identification of the largest life cycle impact areas identified in the analysis and a
narrative description of the impact areas targeted for reduction in the action plan.
o Description of specific steps anticipated in implementation of the action plan. Include
proposed changes in formulation or manufacturing processes that are planned as part
of impact reduction strategy.
o Specific dates and a full timeline for completion of all the steps described in the action
plan.
Life Cycle Impact Reductions in Embodied Carbon.
Products that have demonstrated environmental impact reductions for the specified functional unit
based on a current third-party EPD or verified LCA that conforms to the comparability requirements
of ISO 14025 and ISO 21930.
 The comparative analysis must show impact reduction in the global warming potential (GWP)
impact category and must include a narrative describing how reductions in impacts were
achieved. The published comparisons must be third-party verified (value at 100% by cost or 1
product).
 The comparative analysis must show impact reduction(s) of at least 10% in the global warming
potential (GWP) impact category and must include a narrative describing how the impact
reductions were achieved. The published comparisons must be third-party verified (value at
150% by cost or 1.5 products).
 The comparative analysis must show impact reduction(s) of at least 20% in the global warming
potential (GWP) impact category, and demonstrate at least 5% reduction in two additional
impact categories. A narrative describing how the impact reductions were achieved is required.
The published comparisons must be third-party verified (value at 200% by cost or 2 products).
Impact categories:
 global warming potential (greenhouse gases), in CO2e;

 depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer, in kg CFC-11e;
 acidification of land and water sources, in moles H+ or kg SO2;
 eutrophication, in kg nitrogen equivalent or kg phosphate equivalent;
 formation of tropospheric ozone, in kg NOx, kg O3 eq, or kg ethene; and
 depletion of nonrenewable energy resources, in MJ using CML / depletion of fossil fuels in
TRACI

USGBC approved program -- Products that comply with other USGBC approved multi-attribute
frameworks.
For credit achievement calculation, products sourced (extracted, manufactured, purchased) within 100
miles (160 km) of the project site are valued at twice their base contributing cost (or number of
products), up to a maximum of 200% of cost, or 2 products.
Option 3. BPDO - Sourcing of Raw Materials (1-2 points)
Path 1. Responsible Sourcing of Raw Materials (2 points)

Use products sourced from at least three different manufacturers that meet at least one of the
responsible sourcing and extraction criteria below for at least 20%, by cost, of the total value of
permanently installed building products in the project (1 point).
Use products sourced from at least five different manufacturers that meet at least one of the
responsible sourcing and extraction criteria below for at least 40%, by cost, of the total value of
permanently installed building products in the project (2 points).
 Extended producer responsibility. Products purchased from a manufacturer (producer) that

participates in an extended producer responsibility program or is directly responsible for
extended producer responsibility. Products meeting extended producer responsibility criteria
are valued at 50% of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
 Bio-based materials. Bio-based raw materials other than wood must be tested using ASTM Test
Method D6866 and be legally harvested, as defined by the exporting and receiving country.
Exclude hide products, such as leather and other animal skin material.
o Bio-based products that meet the criteria above: value at 50% of cost multiplied by the
biobased content of the product for the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
o Bio-based products that meet the Sustainable Agriculture Network’s Sustainable
Agriculture Standard: value at 100% of cost multiplied by the biobased content of the
product for the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
 Wood products. Wood products must be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council or
USGBC-approved equivalent. Products meeting wood products criteria are valued at 100% of
their cost for the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
 Materials reuse. Reuse includes salvaged, refurbished, or reused products. Products meeting
materials reuse criteria are valued at 200% of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement
calculation.
 Recycled content. Products meeting recycled content criteria are valued at 100% of their cost
for the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
o Recycled content is the sum of postconsumer recycled content plus one-half

the preconsumer recycled content, based on weight.
o The recycled fraction of the assembly is then multiplied by the cost of assembly to
determine the recycled content value.
 USGBC approved program. Other USGBC approved programs meeting responsible sourcing
and extraction criteria.
For credit achievement calculation, products sourced (extracted, manufactured, purchased) within 100
miles (160 km) of the project site are valued at twice their base contributing cost (or number of
products), up to a maximum of 200% of cost, or 2 products.

Option 4. BPDO – Material Ingredients (1-2 points)
Path 1. Material Ingredient Reporting (1 point)
Use at least 20 different permanently installed products from at least five different manufacturers that
use any of the following programs to demonstrate the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1%
(1000 ppm). (10 different permanently installed products from at least three different manufacturers for
CS and Warehouses & Distribution centers)
 Manufacturer Inventory. The manufacturer has published complete content inventory for the
product following these guidelines:
o A publicly available inventory of all ingredients identified by name and Chemical Abstract
Service Registration Number (CASRN) and/or European Community Number (EC Number).
o Materials defined as trade secret or intellectual property may withhold the name and/or
CASRN/EC Number but must disclose ingredient/chemical role, amount and hazard
score/class using either:
 Greenscreen List Translator (LT) score and/or Full GreenScreen Benchmark
(BM)
 The Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labeling of Chemicals
rev.6 (2015) (GHS)
• The hazard screen must be applied to each trade secret ingredient and
the inventory lists the hazard category for each of the health hazards
included in Part 3 of GHS (e.g. “GHS Category 2 Carcinogen”).
 Health Product Declaration. The end use product has a published and complete Health Product
Declaration with full disclosure of known hazards in compliance with the Health Product
Declaration open Standard.
 Cradle to Cradle. Product has Material Health Certificate or is Cradle to Cradle Certified™ under
standard version 3 or later with a Material Health achievement level at the Bronze level or
higher. Declare. The Declare product label must meet the following requirements:
o Declare labels designated as Red List Free or Declared.
o Declare labels designated as LBC Compliant that demonstrate content inventory to 0.1%
(1000 ppm).
 ANSI/BIFMA e3 Furniture Sustainability Standard. The documentation from the assessor or
scorecard from BIFMA must demonstrate the product earned at least 3 points under 7.5.1.3
Advanced Level in e3-2014 or 3 points under 7.4.1.3 Advanced Level in e3-2012.
 Product Lens Certification
 Facts – NSF/ANSI 336: Sustainability Assessment for Commercial Furnishings Fabric at any
certification level.
 USGBC approved program. Other USGBC approved programs meeting the material ingredient
reporting criteria.
Any compliant reports above with third-party verification that includes the verification of content
inventory are worth 1.5 products for credit achievement calculations.
AND/OR
Path 2: Material Ingredient Optimization (1 point)

Use permanently installed products from at least three different manufacturers that document their
material ingredient optimization using the paths below. Choose either 10 compliant products, or select
products that constitute at least 10%, by cost, of the total value of permanently installed products in the
project.
Material Ingredient Screening and Optimization Action Plan (value at 50% by cost or ½ product)
 The manufacturer has screened the product to at least 1,000 ppm and has provided a publicly
available inventory and completed a detailed action plan to mitigate or reduce known hazards

following the principles of green chemistry. The action plan must be product-specific (not
company, manufacturer or brand), and must include the following information:
o Description of the screening or assessment platform used by manufacturer to complete

the material ingredient screening and analysis.
o Identification of the specific green chemistry principles targeted for implementation in
the action plan.
o Description of specific steps anticipated in implementation of the action plan. Include
proposed changes in formulation or manufacturing processes that are planned as part
of green chemistry optimization strategy.
o Specific dates and a full timeline for completion of all the steps described in the action
plan.
Advanced Inventory & Assessment (value at 100% by cost or 1 product):
 The end use product meets the requirements of any of the following:
o Manufacturer Inventory or Health Product Declaration: The product has demonstrated a
chemical inventory to at least 0.01% by weight (100 ppm) with no GreenScreen LT-1
hazards or GHS Category 1 hazards. The HPD or Manufacturer Inventory must be third
party verified.
o Manufacturer Inventory or Health Product Declaration: The product has demonstrated a
chemical inventory to at least 0.01% by weight (100 ppm) and at least 75% by weight of
product has been assessed using GreenScreen Benchmark assessment. The remaining 25%
by weight of product has been inventoried. The GreenScreen assessment must be publicly
available. The HPD or Manufacturer Inventory must be third-party verified.
o Declare labels designated as Red List Free that are third-party verified.
o Product has Material Health Certificate or is Cradle to Cradle Certified™ under standard
version 3 or later with a Material Health achievement level at the Bronze level or higher.
Material Ingredient Optimization (value at 150% by cost or 1.5 products)
 The end use product has demonstrated a product inventory and assessment of ingredients
using any of the following programs:
o Manufacturer Inventory or HPD: The product has demonstrated a chemical inventory to at

least 0.01% by weight (100ppm) and at least 95% by weight of product is assessed using
GreenScreen Benchmark assessment. No Benchmark 1 hazards (BM-1) are present in the end
use product. The remaining 5% by weight of product not assessed has been inventoried and
screened using GreenScreen List Translator and no GreenScreen LT-1 hazards are present in
the end use product. The documents must be third party verified
o Cradle to Cradle. Product has Material Health Certificate or is Cradle to Cradle
Certified™ under standard version 3 or later with a Material Health achievement level at the
Silver level or higher.
International Alternative Compliance Path – REACH Optimization (value at 100% of cost or 1 product)
 End use products and materials have fully inventoried chemical ingredients to 100 ppm and
assess each substance against the Authorization List – Annex XIV, the Restriction list – Annex
XVII and the SVHC candidate list, (the version in effect June 2013,) proving that no such
substance is included in the product. If the product contains no ingredients listed on the REACH
Authorization, Restriction, and Candidate list.
USGBC approved program.
 Products that comply with USGBC approved building product optimization criteria for material
ingredient optimization and/or advanced inventory & assessment pathways.
For credit achievement calculation, products sourced (extracted, manufactured, purchased)

within 100 miles (160 km) of the project site are valued at twice their base contributing cost (or

number of products), up to a maximum of 200% of cost, or 2 products.
Guidance
Refer to LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction reference guide for Option 1 of this credit
(Environmentally Preferable Products or EPP) and refer to LEED v4 BD+C reference guide for Options 2,
3, 4 of this credit (Building Product Disclosure and Optimization or BPDO credits)
Behind the Intent

Beta Update for Option 1 (EPP)
This credit rewards the use of environmentally preferable materials and has been updated since the
LEED v4 reference guide. As with LEED v4, the credit takes a prescriptive approach to selecting
components that have significant effects on the life-cycle of a building and has some minor
modifications for v4.1. However, the threshold of compliance has been decreased in the v4.1 credit from
90% to 70% to increase market accessibility and better reflect the diversity of the product categories.
Thus, the product category table has been slightly restructured for additional components as well as
modified from LEED v4 to reward less materials use in the base floor (sealed concrete, no floor
covering) directly for 1 point and now requires 70% of compliance for all other listed product categories
for 1 point each (instead of previous 90% compliance). Finally, the environmentally preferable attribute
for concrete in the product has been retained to consist of 30% fly ash or slag as cement substitute,
however the previous additional requirement to include recycled content or reclaimed aggregate in the
same product has been removed to simplify this attribute.
Refer to LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction reference guide for implementation guidance of this
credit option.
Beta Update for Option 2 (BPDO- EPDs)

The prevalence of EPDs has grown significantly since LEED v4 was introduced in 2012. While uptake of
Path 1 for Option 2 of this credit (BPDO- EPDs) continues to increase in many regions, a significant
number of product categories lack PCRs and many manufacturers do not have accompanying EPDs.
Furthermore, Path 2 has been difficult to achieve due to the significant effort to investigate supply
chains and the time it takes to reformulate products and develop comparable EPDs. Therefore, changes
were made in v4.1 to simplify the selection of products with life cycle assessment data and increase the
ability to select optimized products in LEED.
For Path 2, partial weightings for life cycle assessment reporting formats have been removed to simplify
project team selection and review of life cycle impact disclosures. All compliant product-specific LCAs
and EPDs are now worth one whole product, with one exception: third party certified type III EPDs with
external critical review are valued more (1.5 products) to reward highest quality EPDs. In addition, the
number of products threshold for credit achievement has been reduced for BD&C - Core and Shell and
Warehouse and Distribution Center projects because of their reduced project scopes. In all cases, the
Exemplary Performance option for Path 1 has been updated to reflect these changes.
For Path 2, new pathways are intended to reward initial first steps, leadership in life cycle impact
reductions, and optimized products that have lowered embodied carbon and other impacts. The cost
threshold has been lowered significantly from 50% to 10% to provide a more reasonable achievement
threshold. In addition, Path 2 now offers an alternative metric for achievement if percent of cost is not
preferred: procure 10 products from at least three different manufacturers. Manufacturers that do not
have comparable lifecycle data will find an entry-level pathway in Path 2 that rewards “action plans” for
those who demonstrate initiative towards reducing life cycle impacts.
Finally, the limitation previously set on contribution of structure and enclosure materials towards total
percent by cost of eligible products has been removed.
Step-by-Step Guidance for Path 2 EPDs

Select which path(s) to pursue. Path 1 is based on number of products, but Path 2 can be cost-based or
number of products. Consider which metric to pursue because products may contribute to both Paths 1
and 2. Path 1 rewards the selection of products having product-specific declarations, industry wide
EPDs, or product specific type III EPDs. Products must be sourced from multiple manufacturers as
indicated in credit requirements.
Path 1: Environmental Product Declarations
Step 1: Specify and select compliant products

Follow LEED v4 reference guide for how to start specifying products with available life cycle
assessments or environmental product declarations. Note that if a single EPD covers multiple
formulations or product types but reports only combined impact results, that EPD can only count as 1
product.
Step 3: Count compliant products and materials and compile documentation

Follow LEED v4 guidance keeping in mind that products with EPDs meeting more than one criterion are
now all equally weighted at the same valuation factor (not combined factor) with the exception of Type
III EPDs that include external verification and external critical review which are valued as 1.5 products.
Also, note that the requirement for EPDs applies to the final unit of purchase—that is, entire product
assemblies, not individual components. For example, a window shade that is only sold with attached
metal hardware and mounting system cannot separately count the fabric, metal housing, or fasteners as
individual EPDs. Or, a metal stud wall system that can only be installed with the appropriate clips and
fastening system are considered one product because the system only functions as a whole.
Path 2: Multi-attribute Optimization
Step 3: Calculate compliance
With the data collected in a tracking tool or the calculator provided by USGBC, use Equation 1
(see Further Explanation, Calculations) to calculate the total number of products that comply with
Option 1 requirements. This equation calculates compliance based on the number of products, not their
cost. Product-specific LCAs and various types of compliant EPDs are valued at 1 product, with the
exception of third-party externally verified EPDs that are valued at 1.5 products for credit achievement
purposes.
For cost-based compliance calculation: Purchase 10%, by cost, of permanently installed products that
meet at least one of the requirements listed in Path 2. Compliant products must be sourced from at
least 3 different manufacturers. Calculate compliant materials using Equation 2 and the data collected
in the tracking tool (see Further Explanation, Calculations). For the number of products compliance
calculation: Choose products that sum to at least 10 products from 3 or more manufacturers that meet
at least one of the requirements listed in Path 2. Track products using the credit calculator or an offline
tool and calculate the number of products based on attributes and multipliers. Note: in v4.1 there is no
limit/cap on structure and enclosure materials towards contributing to the value of compliant building
products.
Further Explanation
Calculations
Refer to LEED v4 reference guide with the following modifications to the equations – Equation 1 for
Path 1 and Equations 2 and 3 for Path 2 (note that calculations for LEED v4 Equation 3 for alternative
structure and enclosure limit are no longer applicable to this v4.1 credit).

Equation 1: Total number of products with environmental product declarations (Path 1)
Total # of products = { # of products with product specific declarations/industry specific
}+{
declarations/internally verified type III EPDs* X 1 # of Type III EPDs with external verification
and external critical review X 1.5}

Equation 2: Percentage of multi-attribute optimization materials cost (Path 2)
% of materials cost = { product cost of materials with Life-Cycle impact reduction action plan X 50% X
location valuation factor}+{ product cost of materials with any Third-Party verified impact
reductions in GWP impact category X 100% X location valuation factor }+ { product cost of
materials with Third-Party verified impact reductions with a minimum of 10% reduction in GWP impact
category X 150% X location valuation factor } +{ product cost of materials with Third-Party verified
impact reductions with a minimum of 20% reduction in GWP impact category and a minimum of 5%
reduction in 2 other impact categories x 200% X location valuation factor }

Equation 3: Total number of products with multi-attribution optimization (Path 2)
Total # of products = { # of products with impact reduction action plans X 0.5 X location valuation
factor}+{ # of products with any Third-Party verified impact reductions in GWP impact category

X 1 X location valuation factor }+{ # of products with Third-Party verified impact reductions with a
minimum of 10% reduction in GWP impact category x 1.5 X location valuation factor } +{# of products
with Third-Party verified impact reductions with a minimum of 20% reduction in GWP impact category
and a minimum of 5% reduction in 2 other impact categories X 2 X location valuation factor }

Where,
 Product cost = cost of the product contributing toward credit. For assemblies, the cost amount
contributing toward credit is based on weight (see MR Overview, Determining Product Cost,
also see below product valuation for Path 2 under Further Explanation).
 Location valuation factor = multiplier for the extraction, manufacture, and purchase location
(see MR Overview, Location Valuation Factor). Note: no single product may contribute more
than 200% of cost.
Path 1: Additional Guidance for Type III EPDs
Third party certified (Type III) EPDs have been split into two categories for LEED v4.1: those with
internal critical review, and those with external review and verification. LEED v4.1 introduces a new ISO
standard to help guide best practices in critical review by referencing ISO 14071 which provides
additional guidelines for conducting a critical review of any type of LCA study and the competencies
required for the review. Any Type III EPD (whether internally or externally reviewed) must follow the
guidelines of ISO 14071 for reviewer and panelist qualifications and reporting consistency.
Externally critically reviewed and externally verified type III EPDs now are rewarded a multiplier of 1.5
“products” for credit calculation purposes. An EPD is considered externally verified if a person
conducting the third-party verification is independent and outside of the organization (as per ISO 14025
and EN 15804 or ISO 21930) in which the EPD is developed.
Documentation of Product-Specific Declarations: Summary Sheets
In addition to the documentation outlined below under Required Documentation, product-specific

declarations must provide a cover or summary sheet for LEED v4.1. The summary sheet must include:
 All requirements outlined in LEED v4 reference guide for this section

 The name/credentials of person(s) conducting the life cycle assessment
 The type of LCA software used to conduct the assessment;
 Date of assessment with period of validity or expiration date of life cycle assessment,
 URL link to the publicly available version of the document.
Documentation of EPDs: Summary Sheets
In addition to the documentation outlined below under Required Documentation, industry-wide EPDs
must provide a separate cover or summary sheet for LEED v4.1. The summary sheet must include:
 All requirements outlined in LEED v4 reference guide for this section

 The name/credentials of person(s) conducting the life cycle assessment
 The type of LCA software used to conduct the assessment;
 Date of assessment with period of validity or expiration date of life cycle assessment,

 A reference to the valid PCR
 Names of global regions covered under the EPD
 URL link to the publicly available version of the document.
Path 2 Multi-attribute Optimization guidance (new for v4.1)
Additional requirements for Action Plan Optimization Pathway:
 The manufacturer has conducted a life-cycle assessment of the product or product type,
obtained results for the product in any of the life-cycle impact reporting formats per EPD Path 1,
and has generated a publicly available narrative covering life cycle assessment analysis with
results. Both the narrative and life cycle assessment report (LCA or EPD) must be submitted for
compliance to this option.
 Specifically, the publicly available narrative must include:
o A table or otherwise summary of the largest life cycle impacts of their products
throughout the product life cycle, which includes GWP impact result reporting at a
minimum.
o Date of creation of the action plan as well as date of expiration (a maximum of 3 years
for the plan).
o A written narrative describing immediate actions that will be pursued to reduce the
overall life cycle impacts of their products within the 3 year timeframe.
 Examples are projected changes on sourcing more local materials to reduce
shipping impacts, reduction in energy usage to manufacturer the product within
the manufacturing phase, an anticipation that the product will be designed to
use less energy in its use phase, etc.
 The accompanying LCA or EPD must meet all the requirements of the life cycle assessment
reporting formats per Path 1 credit requirements and documentation requirements of product
specific declarations or EPDs.
 An action plan complete with all the requirements stated above earns 50% by cost or 0.5
product valuation.
Additional requirements for Third-Party Verified Multi-attribute Optimization Pathways:
 A manufacturer has previously conducted a life cycle assessment or published an industry wide
or product specific EPD in accordance to Path 1 Requirements above.
 A manufacturer has conducted a second life cycle assessment or published a second industry
wide or product specific EPD in accordance to Path 1 Requirements above for the same product
type or product after making improvements towards impact reductions and has performed a
comparative analysis of the results between the two life cycle assessments per comparability
guidelines in ISO 14025, section 6.7.2 or EN 21930, section 5.5. Note that these requirements are
for conducting a comparative analysis towards impact reductions and must not be used to
make comparative assertions towards environmental claims for the product or product type.
 The comparative analysis with stated impact reductions with narrative must cover:
o Validation Period and type of assessment methodology document for previously
conducted/published as well as most current life cycle assessment or environmental
product declaration.
o LCA software details, LCA practitioner details and program operator details involved in
development of both life cycle assessments.
o Expiration date of the comparative analysis (valid up to 3 years from the second life-
cycle assessment conducted).
 Explanation of the actions taken in the third-party certified narratives must include deliberate
decisions taken to reduce life-cycle impacts of the product type or product. For example,
having a simple energy grid emissions factor update or LCA software update is not a valid
narrative for impact reductions. However describing an update made to the product supply
chain for manufacturing that now includes suppliers located significantly closer to the main
manufacturer, thereby reducing transportation impacts during product manufacturing
processes, would be an acceptable change to reflect in the second life cycle assessment.
Product valuations:

 For third party verified comparison narratives explaining any percent impact reduction in GWP
via current life cycle assessment or EPD compared with previous life cycle assessment or EPD,
value at 100% by cost or 1 product.
 For third party verified comparison narratives explaining 10% impact reduction in GWP via
current product specific externally verified Type III EPD compared with a previous externally
verified Type III EPD of same product based on same PCR, value at 150% by cost or 1.5 products.
 For third-party verified comparison narratives explaining 20% impact reduction in GWP and at
least 5% reduction in two additional impact categories via current product specific externally
verified Type III EPD compared with a previous externally verified Type III EPD of same product
based on same PCR, value at 200% by cost or 2 products.
 No single product may contribute more than 200% of cost.
Third-Party Verification Program Requirements for Life Cycle Impact Reporting, Comparisons and
Narrative:
 The third-party verification and certification program must conduct their operations in
compliance with ISO 17065 or have been certified to ISO 17065.
 The verifier will confirm that the output document was conducted in compliance with the
requirements as listed above.
 The third-party verifier of the life cycle comparisons and narratives must be completely
independent from the individual that created the LCA, or reviewed the EPD to be in compliance
with the PCR.
 The verifier must be qualified to conduct verification of life-cycle assessment reports,
comparisons and narrative.
 The verifier must receive regular training on the verification process and updates to the
program regularly to ensure consistency of verification.
 The program must have a database of publicly available third-party verified products to meet
these requirements as listed above.
 The program must have a written third-party verification process and procedure that is updated
regularly with a process to implement updates and changes to verifiers of the program that is
publicly available.
Notes on Calculations:
 All product reports must be valid at the time the product was purchased for the project.
Behind the Intent for Option 3 (BPDO- Sourcing of Raw Materials)

Beta Update
Option 1 of this credit in LEED v4 was intended to focus on improving the knowledge gaps and
encourage best practices in raw materials sourcing and extraction. However, lack of specific enough
Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) reports have made achievement of this credit challenging. The
intent of this credit option is still a priority and USGBC plans to move Option 1: Raw Material Source and
Extraction Reporting to the Pilot Credit Library where it can be refined and updated.
By removing Option 1, Option 2 is now worth two points in version 4.1, and the title has changed to
“Responsible Sourcing of Raw Materials.” Minor updates have been made to the credit criterion to
better reward embodied carbon, renewable bio-based materials, and foster circular economies through
recycling and reuse. Finally, the limitation on structure and enclosure materials has been removed.
These changes are intended to increase uptake of these important material attributes and continue our
efforts to refine best practices in materials extraction and sourcing.

For v4.1, projects no longer have to choose between the raw material source reporting option
(previously Option 1) and optimized sourcing option (previously Option 2), hence projects should follow
LEED v4 reference guide exclusively for leadership extraction practices (henceforth referred to as
responsible sourcing of raw materials) and choose between the two new thresholds of 20% by cost (for
1 point) or 40% by cost (for 2 points) for the sourced products.
Further Explanation
Calculations
Equation 1 and Equation 3 (for alternative structure and enclosure limit) in the Reference Guide are no
longer applicable to this credit. Instead, use Equation 2: Percentage of responsibly sourced products for
applicable product cost, criterion valuation factor and location valuation factor with the following
modifications in criterion valuation factor of different sourcing attributes:
Product cost = cost of product contributing toward credit.
Criterial valuation factor = multiplier assigned to each sourcing criterion:
 Bio-based products meeting basic criteria, value 0.5, by cost; bio-based products meeting
Sustainable Agriculture Standard, value 1.0 by cost.
 Wood products certified to FSC standards, value 1.0 by cost (no change).
 Reused materials, value 2.0 by cost. Calculate cost according to the MR Credit Building
Lifecycle Impact reduction, Option 3.
 Recycled content:
o Postconsumer recycled materials, value 1.0 by cost (no change)
o Pre-consumer recycled materials, value 0.5 by cost (no change)
o Recycled content is the sum of postconsumer recycled content plus one-half the pre-
consumer recycled content, based on weight. The recycled fraction of the assembly is
then multiplied by the cost of assembly to determine the recycled content value.
 Location valuation factor: multiplier for extraction, manufacture and purchase location is 200%
(no change)
 Extended Producer Responsibility is valued at 50%; valuation factor is 0.5 (no change)
Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR)
Follow LEED v4 reference guide with the following additional specifications for the two basic types of
EPR programs:
 EPR claims must be made in accordance to ISO 14021.

 The manufacturer and/or programs have provided documentation showing participation in any
of the following EPR platforms to contribute to LEED:
o Manufacturer Based Programs:
 A narrative from the manufacturer describing the nature of the program, where
the materials can be collected, and where the materials go upon collection.
 A state recognized program.
o Third-party program:

 A narrative from a manufacturer or third-party entity that includes language on
how the third-party is directly responsible for the take back of materials. Within
this narrative includes:
 Collection facility locations.
 Description of how materials are processed.
 Fate of materials after they are processed.
Documentation for wood and bio-based products: Documentation requirements and guidance for wood
remains unchanged. For bio-based products, follow additional specifications as below:
 Products with bio-based claims must be made in accordance to ISO 14021.

 Manufacturers/Programs must provide documentation on the specific product that includes:
o Confirmation the ASTM D6866 test method was conducted which validates the percent
by weight of bio-based material within the product.
o The type of bio-based raw material used within the product.
o Confirmation that this raw material was legally harvested via exporting and receiving
country.
Calculating bio-based material contributions

 Calculate bio-based content using this formula:
o 50% * percent by weight of bio-based material in total product * Cost of Material
 If the bio-based raw materials meet the Sustainable Agricultural Networks Sustainable
Agricultural standard use this formula:
o 100% * percent by weight of bio-based material in total product* Cost of Material
Recycled Content: Follow LEED v4 reference guide with the following additional specifications:
Calculating recycled content contributions:

 Calculate product recycled content using this formula:
o [% Pre Consumer * 50%] + [% Post Consumer * 100%] * Cost of Material
Behind the Intent for Option 4 (BPDO- Material Ingredients)

Beta Update
Changes were made in v4.1 to reduce barriers for achievement while maintaining the overall approach to
the Materials Ingredients credit:
 Path 1 maintains the threshold of 20 products for most BD+C project types but now will allow
project teams to meet the credit via 10 products instead of 20 for less material intensive BD+C-
C&S and BD+C-warehouse projects. Products with Path 1 compliant reporting methodologies or
labels with third-party verification of content inventory will be worth 1.5 products.
 The current cost threshold for Path 2 (25% by cost) is reduced to 10% by cost and a newer
product number metric (which currently exists for Path 1) is added as an additional pathway for
Path 2.
 A restructuring of Path 2 will reward manufacturers at multiple steps along the path towards
product material ingredient optimization. The new format provides a stepwise approach
towards leadership for materials ingredient screening, assessment and optimization.
 Previous Option 3: Product Manufacturer Supply Chain Optimization has been removed from
the rating system and pilot credit requirements as well as guidance moved to the Pilot Credit
Library where it will be refined for possible incorporation back into the rating system in the
future.

 The limitation previously set on structure and enclosure materials for cost calculation has been
removed.
Follow LEED v4 reference guide with the following modifications:
Path 2 Material ingredient optimization requires 10% of permanently installed products by cost to meet
at least one of the paths listed in the credit requirement. Previous Option 3 requirements and guidance
are no longer applicable.
Path 1. Material Ingredient Reporting
Step 2. Specify and select compliant products
Specify at least 20 products, from at least five different manufacturers for BD&C projects (with the
exception of BD&C- Core and Shell and Warehouse projects, for these project types only 10 products
from three different manufacturers need to be specified).
Path 2. Material Ingredient Optimization
Step 3: Calculate product and material costs and compile documentation
Equation 2 (formerly for product supply chain optimization) is no longer applicable. Therefore,
determine the total value of compliant products (under Further Explanation, Calculations) using
Equation 1 for compliance based on product cost, or use the new Equation 2 below for product number
compliance for material ingredient optimization. LEED v4 Equation 3 for alternative structure and
enclosure percentage limit is no longer applicable.
Further Explanation
Refer to LEED v4 reference guide with the following modifications (Note that LEED v4 Equations 2
(supply chain optimization) and 3 (Alternative structure and enclosure limit) are no longer applicable for
use in the newer credit, and Equation 2 for v4.1 Material Ingredients credit refers to newer product
number metric for Path 2.
Calculations
Use Equation 1 or Equation 2 for Path 2 Material Ingredient Optimization (also see Further Explanation,
Material Ingredient Optimization)
Equation 1. Percentage of compliant materials’ cost (Path 2)
% of materials cost = { product cost of materials with Action Plans X 50% X location valuation
factor }+{ product cost of materials meeting the requirements in section Advanced Inventory and

Assessment X 100% X location valuation factor }+ { product cost of materials meeting the
requirements in section Material Optimization x 150% X location valuation factor }

Equation 2: Total number of products (Path 2)
Total # of products = { # of products with Action Plans X 0.5 X location valuation factor}+{ #
of products with materials meeting the requirements in section Advanced Inventory and Assessment X 1
X location valuation factor }+{ # of products with materials meeting the requirements in section
Material Optimization x 1.5 X location valuation factor }

Where,
 Product cost = price charged to the project owner for the product. Each product can be
counted only once, even if it meets the requirements of multiple programs.
 Program valuation factor = multiplier assigned to each compliance program:
• Material Ingredient Screening and Optimization Action Plan:

o All ingredients screened to 1000 ppm, publicly available inventory and detailed
action plan for product to mitigate hazard flags, value at 50% by cost or ½ product.
• Advanced Inventory and Assessment
o A third party-verified HPD or Manufacturer Inventory to 100 ppm level (with no GS
LT-1 or GHS Category 1 hazards in end use product), value at 100% by cost or 1
product.
o A third-party verified HPD or Manufacturer Inventory to 100 ppm with at least 75%
by weight of product assessed and remaining 25% inventoried, publicly available
Green Screen report, value at 100% by cost or 1 product.
o Third-party Verified Red List Free Declare Label, value at 100% by cost or 1 product.
o Cradle to Cradle—Product has Material Health Certificate or is Cradle to Cradle
Certified™ under standard version 3 or later with a Material Health achievement level
at the Bronze level or higher, value at 100% by Cost or 1 Product.
o For international projects: A REACH compliance document validating full inventory
of product to 100 ppm level and assessment of all substances in end use product
(no ingredients listed on any of three REACH lists), value at 100% by cost or 1
product.
• Material Ingredient Optimization
o A third-party verified HPD or Manufacturer Inventory to 100 ppm with at least 95%
by weight of product assessed and remaining 5% inventoried (with no GS LT-1 or GS
BM-1s in end use product), value at 150% by cost or 1 product.
o Cradle to Cradle—Product has Material Health Certificate or is Cradle to Cradle
Certified™ under standard version 3 or later with a Material Health achievement level
at the Silver level or higher, value at 150% by cost or 1.5 products.

Material Ingredient Reporting

Manufacturer’s Inventory
Follow LEED v4 reference guide for this section with following modifications:
If the specific ingredient cannot be disclosed for proprietary reasons, the manufacturer may withhold
the name and CASRN or EC number but still provide ingredient role/function in product, amount as a
percent of total product content (or ppm), and hazard score/class using Green Screen (GS) List
Translator, GS Benchmark, or Globally Harmonized System (GHS) for Classification and Labeling of
Chemicals v2015. Report hazard levels and hazard endpoints that result in scoring the ingredient as
Benchmark 1 using full Green Screen. It is not necessary to report hazards associated with higher
Benchmark levels or LT-UNK (Unknown) using GS List Translator.
 For reporting of proprietary ingredients in a manufacturer inventory via GHS pathway (Global
Harmonized System of Classification and Labeling of Chemicals Category rev. 6 or higher)
o The hazard screen must be applied to each trade secret ingredient and the inventory
lists the hazard category for each of the health hazard included in Part 3 of GHS (e.g.
“GHS Category 2 Carcinogen”).
o Identify in the inventory all hazard classes for which a classification cannot be made
because there is insufficient data for a particular endpoint (data gaps):
 For a product manufacturer, this is like GS-LT UNK per the GreenScreen LT
pathway.
 A GHS compliant manufacturer inventory will specify either a category hazard
for the substance or state there is insufficient data for the particular endpoint in
a statement “insufficient data” next to the chemical.
Health Product Declaration Open Standard

Follow LEED v4 reference guide for this section with the following modifications and additions:
HPDs can now be generated via the HPD online builder available on the HPDC website. While third-
party verification of HPDs is not required in LEED, HPDs that are content verified by a valid third party
process are valued at 1.5 products. The third party verification status of HPDs can be confirmed on the
summary page of a completed HPD.
Qualifying HPDs developed under the Open Standard version 2.0, 2.1 or subsequent versions of the
standard are eligible for documenting credit achievement if the HPD is still valid at the time that the
product is purchased and used on a project. Version 1.0 HPDs are currently expired in the marketplace
and will not contribute to this LEED v4.1 credit unless compliant products were purchased during the
time the HPD was valid.
Cradle to Cradle (C2C) Certified and C2C Material Health Certificate

Refer to LEED v4 reference guide for this section with the following modifications:
The credit requirements for v4.1 are aligned with the latest version of the C2C standard v3 and C2C v2.1.1
is no longer applicable.
The C2C Material Health Certificate uses material health assessment methodology of the C2C certified
product standard to encourage awareness of chemicals in products and supply chains and contribute
more specifically towards safer chemicals/greener chemistry within the C2C program. C2C Material
Health Certificate can be obtained individually or as part of the C2C program and the requirements for
both are identical. Both C2C Certified and C2C Material Health assessment are third-party verified claims
that count as 1.5 products for the purpose of LEED v4.1 credits.

Declare label
Declare labels are issued by the International Living Future Institute (ILFI) and generated via ILFI’s
Declare portal website or other tools. While third-party verification of Declare labels is not required in
LEED, Declare labels that are content verified by a valid third party process are valued at 1.5 products
for credit achievement calculations.
There are primarily three kinds of Declare labels: ‘LBC Red List Free,’ ‘LBC Compliant’ and ‘Declared.’
Products that receive the status of “LBC Red List Free” are 100% disclosed down to 100ppm level and
do not contain any Red List chemicals. Products that receive the status of “Declared” are also 100%
disclosed down to 100ppm level, but may contain one or more Red List ingredients that are not covered
by an existing LBC temporary exception. All building products carrying LBC Red List Free and Declared
status meet LEED v4.1 requirements for disclosure. However, some products that receive the status of
“LBC Compliant” may rely on one or more exceptions allowed in the program that may not satisfy the
requirements for LEED credit achievement purposes. For example, some products that utilize
Temporary Exception I10-E4 may withhold some proprietary ingredient information of up to 1% of
product ingredients, while some other LBC compliant products may use that exemption to exclude or
withhold less than 0.1% of product ingredients information (and therefore meet the requirements of the
LEED credit). Product specifiers must closely review the labels to ensure they meet the LEED
requirement.
Third-Party Verification Program Requirements for Material Ingredient Reporting and Optimization
 Qualifying third-party verification and certification programs must conduct their operations in
compliance with ISO 17065 or have been certified to ISO 17065.
 The verifier will confirm that the output document was conducted in compliance with the
requirements of the LEED credit.
 The verification process must cover an additional step of verifying the reliability of content
inventory of the product as well as verifying product compliance to required thresholds in LEED.
 The third-party verifier of the material ingredient documents must be independent from the
individual that created the documents.
 The verifier must be qualified to conduct verification of material ingredient documents.
 The material ingredient reporting program must provide training for the verifier on the
verification process and updates to the program regularly to ensure consistency of verification.
 The program must have a database of publicly available third-party verified products that meet
the applicable LEED credit requirements.
 The program must have a written third-party verification process and procedure that is updated
regularly with a process to implement updates and changes to verifiers of the program that is
publicly available.
Material Ingredient Optimization

Refer to LEED v4 reference guide for this section with the following modifications and additions:
Under the newly structured Path 2, several different pathways can be used as starting points or
frameworks for documenting substitution of problematic substances such as the screening and
optimization action plan, manufacturer inventory, HPD (material transparency initiative from HPDC),
Declare (product transparency label from ILFI), Green Screen (a program of Clean Production Action),
Cradle to Cradle Certified and the European Union’s REACH program (for international projects only).
Path 2 goes beyond Path 1’s reporting requirement and encourages the use of products that have
extensive screening and inventory of their ingredients as well as thorough assessment for potential
health impacts and optimization of the ingredient chemistry. In order to achieve these goals, Path 2 has
been re-structured into three main compliance pathways: Material Ingredient Screening and
Optimization Action Plan (valued at 50% by cost or 0.5 product), Advanced Inventory and Assessment

(valued at 100% by cost or 1 product) and finally, Material Ingredient Optimization (valued at 150% by
cost or 1.5 products).
Additional GreenScreen related guidance for Path 2 with GreenScreen Benchmark 1 for
manufacturers and suppliers
Refer to LEED v4 reference guide for this section with the following modifications:
Under Path 2 in LEED v4 previously, the two levels of compliance—GS List Translator and GS full
assessment—were weighted at 100% of cost and 150% of cost, respectively. The newer requirements for
Path 2 in LEED v4.1 (Advanced Inventory and Assessment and Material Ingredient Optimization) that
place a more deliberate focus on the concept of ingredient assessment beyond screening, now explicitly
reward GS Benchmark assessments for 75% by weight of product (for 100% by cost) or for 95% by
weight of product (for 150% by cost) and require the remaining percentage by weight product in both
cases to be screened using GS List Translator.
Additional Guidance - Material Ingredient Screening and Optimization Action Plan Pathway for
Manufacturers and Project teams (new for v4.1)
 The manufacturer has conducted a screening or assessment to determine ingredient hazard

scores/classes within each product, identified specific opportunities for improvements via any
of the material ingredient reporting formats per Path 1, and has generated a publicly available
narrative covering the product analysis of its ingredients and an action plan to address specific
improvement areas. Both the narrative and ingredient screening/assessment report must be
submitted for compliance to this option.
 Specifically, the publicly available narrative must include:
o Date of creation of the action plan as well as date of expiration of the plan (a maximum
of 5 years from the date of creation).
o Contact information of the organizational representative responsible for implementation
and success of the proposed action plan.
o A written narrative describing immediate and long-term actions that will be pursued to
reduce hazards within their products and which principle(s) of green chemistry related
to material ingredients are being adopted by the organization to make the changes
within the 5 year timeframe.
 Examples of action plans can include: identifying planned manufacturing or
formulation changes; proposed changes in manufacturing processes; and
describing how those changes are expected to achieve the end goal of safer
chemistry for the individual products.
 The principles of green chemistry are those created by Paul Anastas and John
Warner, www.warnerbabcock.com/green-chemistry/the-12-principles
 An action plan complete with all the requirements stated above earns 50% by cost or 0.5
product valuation.
Additional Guidance - Advanced Inventory and Assessment Pathway for Manufacturers and Project
teams (new for v4.1)
 Manufacturer Inventory or Health Product Declaration (with no GreenScreen List Translator-1

hazards)
o The product must demonstrate a chemical inventory to at least 0.01% by weight (100
ppm) with no GreenScreen LT-1 hazard scores or GHS Category 1 hazards.
o Since this pathway is an intermediate step towards full optimization and places greater
emphasis on advanced inventory and assessment rather than major substitution or
elimination of chemicals, GS scores of List Translator- probable carcinogens (LT-P1) and
List Translator- Unknown (LT-UNK) are allowed to be reported as is for the ingredients
and do not need to be resolved further by the manufacturer in order for this document
to be compliant with LEED v4.1 requirements.
o Products utilizing the GHS pathway must display no Category 1 hazards for each
ingredient down to 100 ppm levels. If there is no endpoint for a chemical, the
manufacturer will simply need to display “no hazard endpoint” in their manufacturer

inventory disclosure document. This reporting must be different from reporting of a
data gap, if there is insufficient data available for a particular endpoint, the
manufacturer will need to report “Insufficient data” for the particular endpoint of that
ingredient/chemical.
o Chemicals with form specific hazards or special conditions must follow the special
conditions guidelines in manufacturer inventory/HPDs, these must be available on HPDC
website.
o The HPD or Manufacturer Inventory must be third party verified by an approved third-
party verifier/assessor via either HPDC or Clean Production Action and meet the third-
party verification requirements as specified above.
 Manufacturer Inventory or Health Product Declaration (with 75% by weight of product
assessed)
o At least 75% by weight of the product to 100ppm level for ingredients must be assessed
using the GreenScreen Benchmark methodology.
o Since this pathway is an intermediate step towards full optimization and places greater
emphasis on advanced inventory and assessment rather than major substitution or
elimination of chemicals, the document must show that 75% by weight of the chemistry
within the overall product has been assessed using a full GreenScreen Benchmark
Assessment methodology. For the remaining 25% by weight of the product,
GreenScreen List Translator scores of ingredients (i.e. preliminary GS List Translator
screening) associated with their chemistry has been conducted.
o GreenScreen assessment reviews must be conducted via an approved GreenScreen
Profiler and the Health Product Declaration or Manufacturer Inventory must be third-
party verified by an approved verifier that meets the third-party verification
requirements as stated above.
o Any GreenScreen assessments that resolve unknown and/or probable hazard scores
must be made available to the public or the industry, either online in a free directory or
through subscription to a common industry database.
 Third-Party Verified Red List Free Declare Labels
o Product content inventory must also be verified as part of the third party verification
process and the third party verified label must be publicly available.
o Must be verified via an approved third-party verifier/assessor meeting the third party
verification requirements stated above.
 Cradle to Cradle Bronze Certification or Material Health Certificate at a Bronze level
version 3 or later with a Material Health achievement level at the Bronze level.
o Third-party verifiers/auditors must meet the third-party verification requirements stated
above.
 International Compliance Path- REACH pathway
o For international project teams, product has documentation from manufacturer or
supplier in form of signed letter showing a full inventory of ingredients for the product
down to 100 ppm and an assessment of these ingredients against Authorization List,
Restriction List and SVHC List (no ingredients in end use product from any of the three
lists).
o Documentation can be optionally verified by third-party verifier that must meet the
third party verification requirements stated above.
Additional Guidance - Material Ingredient Optimization Pathway for Manufacturers and Project
teams (new for v4.1)
 Manufacturer Inventory or HPD (with 95% by weight of product assessed)

o At least 95% by weight of the product to the 100ppm level for constituents must be
assessed using the GreenScreen Benchmark methodology.
o Since this pathway requires full optimization in the form of major substitution or
elimination of most hazardous chemicals in the product, the document will display that
at least 95% by weight of the chemistry within the overall product has been assessed
against full GreenScreen Benchmark Assessment methodology (with no BM-1 hazards in
end use products) as opposed to just List Translator score hazards (LT-1, LT-P1, LT-
UNK). The remaining 5% by weight of product not assessed has been inventoried and

screened using GreenScreen List Translator and no GreenScreen LT-1 hazards are
present in the end use product.
o GreenScreen assessments must be conducted via an approved GreenScreen Profiler and
the Health Product Declaration or Manufacturer Inventory must be third-party verified
by an approved third-party verifier that meets the third-party verification requirements
as stated above.
 Cradle to Cradle Silver or higher Certification or Material Health Certificate at a Silver level
version 3 or later with a Material Health achievement level at the Silver level.
o Third-party verifiers/auditors must meet the third-party verification requirements stated
above.
Option 1. Environmentally Preferable Products
Option 1
Documentation
Provide product literature that demonstrates installed products meet credit
X
requirements.
Option 2. Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Environmental Product Declarations
Option 2,
Option 2,
Documentation Path 2
Path 1
MR Building Product disclosure and optimization calculator or equivalent
tracking tool, EPD/LCA reports and compliant summary documents for
X
products contributing toward credit.
Manufacturer impact reduction action plan with narrative and/or third X

party verified comparative analysis with narrative explaining how impact
reductions thresholds were met, associated baseline
MR Building Product disclosure and optimization calculator or equivalent X

tracking tool and documentation of compliance with USGBC approved
program.
Option 3. Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Sourcing of Raw Materials
Option 3
Documentation
MR Building Product disclosure and optimization calculator or equivalent tracking
X
tool
Documentation of product claims for credit requirements or other USGBC-

approved program
Option 4. Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Material Ingredients
Option 4,
Option 4,
Documentation Path 2
Path 1

MR Building Product disclosure and optimization calculator or equivalent
tracking tool, documentation of chemical inventory through HPD, labels for
C2C, Declare, ANSI/BIFMA, Product lens, Facts, manufacturers’ lists of
X
ingredients with GS or GHS reports for proprietary ingredients or other
USGBC approved programs.
Manufacturer material ingredient screening/assessment associated with X

individual product action plan in a detailed narrative for each product
and/or third party verified manufacturer inventory/HPD with GreenScreen
assessments and/or third party verified labels such as Declare, C2C and/or
manufacturers/suppliers’ list of ingredients, assessment and declaration for
REACH or third party verified REACH labels.
MR Building Product disclosure and optimization calculator or equivalent X

tracking tool.
Option 1 Exemplary Performance: EPP

Projects that achieve the maximum 6 points allowable in this credit can earn up to 1 additional point for
purchasing additional products that meet the requirements.
Option 2 & Option 4 Exemplary Performance: EPDs, Material Ingredients

Path 1: Purchase at least 40 qualifying permanently installed building products from ten different
manufacturers that meet the credit criteria (Purchase at least 20 products from five different
manufacturers for Core and Shell and Warehouse & Distribution Centers).
Path 2: Purchase at least 20% by cost or 20 compliant products from five different manufacturers of
permanently installed building products that meet the credit criteria.
Option 3 Exemplary Performance: (BPDO- Sourcing of Raw Materials)

Purchase at least 60%, by cost, of the total value of permanently installed building products that meet
the credit criteria.
Refer to the LEED v4 reference guide, with the following additions and modifications:

LEED O+M MR prerequisite Waste Performance, MR prerequisite Purchasing Policy, and MR credit
Purchasing: A similar credit having some of the above requirements for existing buildings is required for
the O+M v4.1 rating system and is a strategy that can help achieve MR prerequisite Waste Performance,
MR prerequisite Purchasing Policy, and MR credit Purchasing.

MR Credit: Construction and Demolition
Waste Management
Intent
To reduce construction and demolition waste disposed of in landfills and incineration facilities by
recovering, reusing, and recycling materials.
Requirements
MF
Recycle and/or salvage nonhazardous construction and demolition materials. Calculations can be by
weight or volume but must be consistent throughout.
Exclude excavated soil, land-clearing debris from calculations. Include materials destined for alternative
daily cover (ADC) in the calculations as waste (not diversion). Include wood waste converted to fuel
(biofuel) in the calculations; other types of waste-to-energy are not considered diversion for this credit.
However, for international projects that cannot meet credit requirements using reuse and recycling
methods, waste-to-energy systems may be considered waste diversion if the European Commission
Waste Framework Directive 2008/98/EC and Waste Incineration Directive 2000/76/EC are followed
and Waste to Energy facilities meet applicable European Committee for Standardization (CEN) EN 303
standards.
Option 1. Diversion (1–2 points)
Path 1a. Divert 50% and Three Material Streams (1 point)
Divert at least 50% of the total construction and demolition material; diverted materials must
include at least three material streams.
OR
Path 1b. Divert 50% using Certified Commingled Recycling Facility and One More Material
Stream (1 Point)
Divert at least 50% of the total construction and demolition material; diverted materials must
include at least two material streams. All commingled recycling is required to be one of the streams
and must be sent to offsite sorting facility (ies) certified by the Recycling Certification Institute or
approved equivalent.
OR
Path 2a. Divert 75% and Four Material Streams (2 points)
Divert at least 75% of the total construction and demolition material; diverted materials must include
at least four material streams.

OR
Path 2b. Divert 75% using Certified Commingled Recycling Facility and Two More Materials
Streams (2 points)
Divert at least 75% of the total construction and demolition material; diverted materials must include at
least three material streams. All commingled recycling is required to be one of the streams and must be
sent to offsite sorting facility (ies) certified by the Recycling Certification Institute or approved
equivalent.
OR
Option 2. Reduction of Total (Construction And Demolition) Waste Material (2 points)
Salvage or recycle at least 75% renovation and demolition debris (not including ADC) and utilize onsite
waste minimizing design strategies for new construction activities. Achieve the waste generation
threshold outlined below and create a narrative describing how the project is addressing waste
prevention and/or achieving waste generation thresholds via design strategies.
Do not generate more than 7.5 pounds of construction waste per square foot (36.6 kilograms of waste
per square meter) of the building’s floor area for all Residential Multifamily projects.
Guidance
Beta Update
Changes in v4.1 seek to make this credit more achievable for tight urban jobsites, encourages better
accounting for recycling reporting, and rewards source reduction goals based on project type data.
These changes respond to concerns from users and public comment proposals that find on-site waste
separation difficult.
Additional updates clarify when waste-to-energy can count as diversion for international projects. The
changes also incorporate and modify the popular Pilot Credit 87 for Verified Construction & Demolition
Recycling Rates into the credit and define the minimum requirements for a commingled facility certified
recycling rate. Finally, the total waste generation pathway has been expanded to account for demolition
and renovation waste and differing thresholds for project types that generate less waste overall.
See the changes for v4.1 to MR Prerequisite: Construction and Demolition Waste Management Planning
for addition guidance on defining material streams, how to account for on-site and off-site commingled
recycling, and documenting waste prevention.
Refer to LEED v4 BD+C reference guide with the following modifications:
Option 1, Path 1 and Path 2 now include additional diversion thresholds using certified commingled
recycling facilities. Choose between Path 1a and Path 1b (for 1 point) or Path 2a and Path 2b (for 2
points) if the goal is waste diversion. Choose Option 2 (for 2 points also) if the goal is waste reduction
via waste prevention strategies in the design phase.
Option 1. Diversion
Step 1: Implement CWM plan
Path 1b and 2b: Using Certified Recycling Facilities

The newer credit pathways using certified recycling facilities allow project teams to reduce the number
of required material streams by one if they take all commingled recyclables to a facility that has
achieved third party verification of their recycling rates. These facilities support accurate reporting and
nationally consistent metrics for recycling rates.

Requirements for USGBC Approved Certified Recycling Facilities:
Projects must utilize a recycling facility that processes and recycles commingled (mixed) construction
and demolition waste materials that has received independent third-party certification of their recycling
rates. Qualified third-party organizations who certify facility average recycling rates include these
minimum program requirements:
 The certification organization follows guidelines for environmental claims and third-party oversight,
including ISO/IEC 17065:2012 and relevant portions of the ISO 14000 family of standards.
 The certification organization is an independent third party who continuously monitors "certified"
facilities to ensure that the facilities are operating legally and meeting the minimum program
requirements for facility certification and recycling rates.
 Certification organizations shall certify to a protocol that was developed on a consensus basis for
recycling facility diversion rates that is not in a draft or pilot program.
 The methodology for calculating facility recycling rates must be:
o Developed with construction and demolition recycling industry stakeholders and be specific
to the construction and demolition recycling industry;
o Must include a methodology that is applicable across broad regions (i.e. nationally); and,
o A published and publicly available standard.
 Data submitted by the facilities to the certification organization in support of the recycling rate is
audited. The audit includes, at a minimum: the evaluation of recyclable sales records, verification of
facility sales into commodity markets, an assessment of downstream materials and how these
materials are managed after they leave the site, monitoring off-site movement of materials, and a
review of the facilities' customers weight tags information.
 Facilities submit data to the certification organization that supports the recycling rate, such as a
mass balance recycling rate (tons in/tons out) for a twelve month period, or quarterly sorts
completed and verified by an independent third party entity.
 Breakdown of materials (by type and by weight), including analysis of supporting data relating to
amounts (in tons) and types of materials received and processed at the facility.
 At a minimum, the third-party certifying organization conducts an on-site visit of the Facility for the
first year certification, with subsequent site visits occurring at least once every two (2) years, unless
additional visits are deemed necessary by the certification organization. The site visit will examine:
o How materials enter, are measured, deposited, processed/sorted and exit facility,
o Conduct interviews with key personnel, and discuss how materials are managed after they
leave the site
o Confirm equipment types and capacity,
o Observe and verify load/materials sorting and accuracy,
o Verify use and accuracy of scales including calibration frequency.
 Diversion rates shall adhere to these requirements:
o Measurements must be based on weight (not volume), using scales.
o Diversion Rates must be available on a website and viewable by the general public.
o Methodology for calculating diversion and recycling rates must be publicly available and
applicable to national or country-level accounting standards for construction and
demolition waste recycling facilities.
 Facility recycling data submitted to certification program will be analyzed for recycling rates using a
mass balance formula or quarterly sorts completed and verified by an independent third party
entity.
 Final recycling rate will include overall facility diversion rates with and without ADC/Beneficial
Reuse, and will include separate recycling rates by material type as well as combined average
including wood derived fuel/bio-fuel separate from other waste to energy or incineration end-
markets.
Presently, the Recycling Certification Institute's Certification of Real Rates (CORR) protocol meets the
above requirements.
Option 2: Reduction of Total Waste

Step 2: Calculate Total Waste Reduction
Replace Step 2 (Calculate total waste reduction) with the following:
Option 2 has updated thresholds for achievement for projects and also includes requirements to
document waste prevention techniques undertaken on the project. A narrative, provided in the LEED
form, must describe strategies in design and construction to reduce waste from being generated on the
jobsite (See LEED v4 reference guide, Further Explanation, Source Reduction for more guidance on
source reduction strategies).
In addition to preventing waste, the project must also recycle at least 75% of all renovation and
demolition waste (not including ADC), and not generate more than the required amount per square foot
of the building’s completed floor area.
Under Option 2, exclude on-site reused materials from the generation numbers. Materials reused on site
are not considered waste for the purposes of calculating this option only.
Further Explanation
Waste-to-Energy
Refer to LEED v4 reference guide with the following modifications:
Waste-to-energy is not a widely-used strategy for construction and demolition waste management in
the United States and it is not considered an acceptable means of diversion for projects within the US.
For projects outside the US where waste-to-energy markets for construction and demolition materials
may be more common, projects may be eligible to count waste-to-energy as diversion under the
Alternative Compliance Path for International Projects (see International Tips section below).
Note: The combustion of wood materials resulting from recycling processing (also known as “wood-
derived fuel” or “biomass”) is classified as an acceptable means of diversion for projects both in the US
and internationally, and is not considered waste-to-energy for LEED Project diversion reporting
purposes.
International Tips
Alternative Compliance Path for International Projects: Waste-to-Energy
In locations where reuse is not possible and/or recycling markets are not sufficient, Waste-to-energy
may be considered a viable diversion strategy if the project team follows the European Commission
Waste Framework Directive 2008/98/EC and the European Commission Waste Incineration Directive
2000/76/EC. These standards consist of performance metrics of both efficiency and emissions for
different types of energy recovery systems. In addition, the facility must meet the applicable European
standards based on the fuel type. See Referenced Standards for more information on these directives:
 EN 303-1—1999/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners

 EN 303-2—1998/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
 EN 303-3—1998/AC—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers
 EN 303-4—1999, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
 EN 303-5—2012, Heating boilers for solid fuels
 EN 303-6—2000, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
 EN 303-7—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers equipped with a forced draught burner
Project teams pursuing this compliance option must demonstrate that reuse and recycling strategies
were exhausted before sending material to waste-to-energy facilities.

Option 2
MR construction and demolition waste management calculator or
equivalent tool tracking total and diverted waste amounts and material
streams and documentation of recycling rates for commingled facilities (if X
using Paths 1b or 2b)
International projects need to submit justification narrative for use of WTE

strategy for international teams and documentation of WTE facilities
X
adhering to EN standards (if applicable)
Narrative for waste prevention/design strategies used on the project to X

achieve the waste threshold and calculation of total waste per area is
required.

that can help achieve the MR prerequisite: Waste Performance.

EQ Prerequisite: Minimum Indoor Air
Quality Performance
Intent
To contribute to the comfort and well-being of building occupants by establishing minimum standards
for indoor air quality (IAQ).
Requirements
MF
For each dwelling unit, meet the following requirements:
Dwelling-unit ventilation
Design and install a dwelling-unit ventilation system that complies with Section 4, Section 6.7,
and Section 6.8 of ASHRAE 62.2-2016 (with errata) or local equivalent, whichever is more
stringent.
Dwelling unit ventilation systems are not required for projects that meet exception 1 or 2 in
Section 4.1.1 of ASHRAE 62.2-2016 or projects that meet section 6.4 of ASHRAE 62.1-2016.
In addition, do not use systems that rely on transfer air from pressurized hallways or corridors,
adjacent dwelling units, attics, etc.
Monitor outdoor air intake flow for all systems that are 1000 cfm (472 L/s) or larger.
Local exhaust
Design and install local mechanical exhaust systems in each kitchen and bathroom (including
half-baths) that comply with Sections 5 and 7 of ASHRAE 62.2-2016 (with errata) or local
equivalent, whichever is more stringent.
Exhaust air to the outdoors. Do not route exhaust ducts to terminate in attics or interstitial
spaces. Recirculating range hoods or recirculating over-the-range microwaves do not satisfy the
kitchen exhaust requirements. For exhaust hood systems capable of exhausting in excess of
400 cubic feet per minute (188 liters per second), provide makeup air at a rate approximately
equal to the exhaust air rate. Makeup air systems must have a means of closure and be
automatically controlled to start and operate simultaneously with the exhaust system.
Use ENERGY STAR–labeled bathroom exhaust fans in all bathrooms (including half-baths) or
performance equivalent for projects outside the U.S. A heat recovery ventilator (HRV) or energy
recovery ventilator (ERV) may be used to exhaust single or multiple bathrooms if it has an
efficacy level meeting the ENERGY STAR Technical Specifications for Residential Heat-
Recovery Ventilators and Energy-Recovery Ventilators (H/ERVs) Version 2.0 as certified by the
Home Ventilating Institute (HVI).

For all non-dwelling unit spaces, meet the following requirements:
For all occupied spaces, design and install ventilation systems that comply with the ventilation
rate procedure outlined in Section 6.2 or natural ventilation procedure outlined in Section 6.4 of
ASHRAE 62.1-2016 (with errata) or local equivalent, whichever is more stringent. Ventilation is
not required in non-occupied spaces, such as egress stairwells and closets (walk-in included).
Monitor outdoor air intake flow for all systems that are 1000 cfm (472 L/s) or larger.
Also comply with sections 4 and 5 of ASHRAE 62.1-2016.
Design and install local mechanical exhaust systems that comply with Section 6.5 of ASHRAE
62.1-2016.
Guidance
The prerequisite requirements are similar to LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction prerequisite
Ventilation. Refer to the LEED v4 Homes reference guide with the following additions and
modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
The referenced standards have been updated to ASHRAE 62.2-2016 for dwelling units and ASHRAE
62.1-2016 for all other spaces. The v4.1 credit requirements more clearly outline the specific sections of
ASHRAE that must be followed and the additional LEED-specific criteria that must be met for the
prerequisite.
The v4.1 credit specifies two situations where dwelling-unit ventilation systems are not required, one for
projects that meet the exceptions in Section 4.1.1 of ASHRAE 62.2-2016 and another for projects with
engineered natural ventilation systems.
New outdoor air monitoring requirements are included from LEED v4.1 BD+C New Construction.
Step 1. Select Systems
Design all ventilation and local mechanical exhaust systems for each dwelling-unit.
 Determine how much ventilation is required for each dwelling-unit and what type of ventilation
system to install: supply only, exhaust only, balanced, or engineered natural ventilation system.
See LEED v4 Homes reference guide further explanation section for guidance on multifamily
ventilation strategies.
 Determine what type of local exhaust system to install. See LEED v4 Homes step-by-step
guidance and further explanation section and the additional v4.1 credit requirements for exhaust
hood systems and bathroom exhaust fans.
 Refer to the ASHRAE Standard 62.2 User’s Manual updated for 62.2-2016 for additional
explanation and guidance on Standard 62.2’s requirements.
Design all ventilation and outdoor air monitoring devices for the non-dwelling unit spaces. See LEED v4
Homes reference guide for guidance.
Note: this prerequisite requires compliance with specific sections from ASHRAE 62.2 or 62.1, this does
not constitute full compliance with the standards.
Step 2. Install Equipment

See LEED v4 Homes reference guide for guidance.

Step 3. Confirm Compliance
Test all dwelling-unit ventilation systems and local mechanical exhaust systems as outlined in the LEED
v4 Homes reference guide.
Further Explanation
All
Confirmation that project meets requirements of ASHRAE 62.2-2016, Sections 4, 6.7 X

and 6.8 in for each dwelling-unit.
Confirmation that mechanical ventilation air for each dwelling unit is provided
X
directly from outdoors, not through a pressurized corridor.
If applicable, controls drawing showing monitoring devices for applicable systems X
For naturally ventilated and mixed mode ventilated projects, confirmation that
projects meets requirements of ASHRAE 62.1-2016, section 6.4 and/or exceptions 1 X
or 2 in ASHRAE 62.2-2016, Section 4.1.1
Confirmation that project meets requirements of ASHRAE 62.2-2016, Sections 5 X

and 7, and that bathroom exhaust fans meet ENERGY STAR performance
requirements.
Dwelling-unit mechanical ventilation and local exhaust airflow testing reports X
Confirmation that for any dwelling unit kitchen exhaust hoods that can exhaust X
more than 400 cfm, a makeup air source is installed with damper that opens when
exhaust fan is turned on
Confirmation that the ventilation systems for non-dwelling unit spaces comply with X
ASHRAE 62.1-2016, Section 6.2 or section 6.4, section 4, and section 5.
Confirmation that local mechanical exhaust systems for non-dwelling unit spaces X
comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2016, Section 6.5.
Confirmation that air filters that meet prerequisite requirements are installed on all X
applicable mechanical heating, cooling and ventilation system, and that filter
housings are airtight

 LEED for O+M v4.1 EQ prerequisite Indoor Environmental Quality Performance: managing
particulates and other indoor airborne pollutants and moisture in bathrooms, and are important
strategies for maintaining good indoor air quality and occupant satisfaction.

EQ Prerequisite: Combustion Venting
Intent
To limit the leakage of combustion gases into the occupied space of the home.
Requirements
MF
Do not install any unvented combustion appliances (ovens and ranges excluded).
Install a carbon monoxide (CO) monitor on each floor of each dwelling unit, hard-wired with a battery
backup. CO monitors are required in all types of units, regardless of the type of equipment installed in
the unit.
For all fireplaces and woodstoves inside the building, provide doors that close or a solid glass enclosure.
Space- and water-heating equipment that involves combustion must meet one of the following:
 it must be designed and installed with closed combustion (i.e., sealed supply air and exhaust
ducting);
 it must be designed and installed with power-vented exhaust; or
 it must be located in a detached utility building or open-air facility.
Projects that earn the EPA Indoor airPLUS label automatically meet the requirements of this
prerequisite.
Guidance
Combustion Venting. Refer to the LEED v4 Homes reference guide with the following additions and
modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
The v4.1 language was adopted from the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction prerequisite
Combustion Venting, with a new clarification that carbon monoxide (CO) monitors are required in all
units. CO monitors can help prevent carbon monoxide poisoning by alerting the residents of harmful CO
levels. Common sources of CO in homes are fuel-burning appliances, but other potential sources are
from vehicles idling nearby the building or unintended behavior of the occupants such as using
generators or camp stoves indoors during power outages.
Further Explanation
Campus
Group Approach

Campus Approach
All
X
Confirmation that no unvented combustion appliances are installed
Confirmation that CO monitors are installed on each floor and in every unit X
Confirmation that any combustion space- or water-heating equipment is installed

with closed combustion or power-vented exhaust or is located in a detached X
building or open-air facility.
Confirmation that any fireplace or woodstove has doors or seal. X

combustion gases and moisture is an important strategy for maintaining good indoor air quality
and occupant satisfaction.

EQ Prerequisite: Garage Pollutant Protection
Intent
To reduce occupants’ exposure to indoor pollutants originating from an adjacent garage.
Requirements
MF
Place all air-handling equipment and ductwork outside the fire-rated envelope of the garage. Ductwork
that serves the garage itself, or elevator vestibules or storage areas that are directly attached to or
inside the garage are exempt from this requirement, as are ducts that are positively pressurized that are
run continuously.
Tightly seal shared surfaces between the garage and conditioned spaces, including all of the following:
 In conditioned spaces above the garage, seal all penetrations and all connecting floor and
ceiling joist bays.
 In conditioned spaces next to the garage, weather-strip all doors, install carbon monoxide
detectors in rooms that share a door with the garage, seal all penetrations, and seal all cracks at
the base of the walls.
prerequisite.
Guidance
The prerequisite requirements are similar to LEED v4 BD Homes Design and Construction
prerequisite Garage Pollutant Protection. Refer to the LEED v4 Homes reference guide with the
following additions and modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
The v4.1 language was adopted from the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction prerequisite Garage
Pollutant Protection, with an added sentence that clarifies certain ductwork may be located inside the
fire-rated envelope of the garage.
Further Explanation
Campus
Group Approach
Campus Approach

All
Confirmation that all air-handling equipment and ductwork are located outside fire- X
rated envelope of garage.
If applicable, confirmation that any ductwork in the garage serves the garage itself,
or elevator vestibules or storage areas that are directly attached to or inside the X
garage, or are ducts that are positively pressurized that are run continuously.
Confirmation that surfaces between garage and conditioned spaces are sealed and
X
weather-stripped.
Confirmation that carbon monoxide monitors are installed in all rooms that share X
door with garage.

combustion gases and moisture is an important strategy for maintaining good indoor air quality

EQ Prerequisite: Radon-Resistant Construction
Intent
To reduce occupants’ exposure to radon gas and other soil gas contaminants.
Requirements
MF

For projects in high-risk areas for radon, EPA radon zone 1 (or local equivalent for projects outside the
United States), design and build with radon-resistant construction techniques. Follow the techniques
prescribed in at least one of the following standards: American Association of Radon Scientist and
Technologists (AARST), Reducing Radon in New Construction of 1 & 2 Family (CAH-2012) or Soil Gas
Control Systems in New Construction (CC-1000 2018); EPA Building Radon Out; NFPA 5000, Chapter
49; International Residential Code, Appendix F; CABO, Appendix F; or a local equivalent, whichever is
more stringent.
At a minimum, the following techniques must be included:
 Provide a capillary break, installed according to Indoor airPLUS version 1 (rev. 04), section 1.2.
 Provide a minimum 3- or 4-inch (or approximately 80- or 100- millimeters) diameter gas-tight
vertical vent pipe, clearly labeled as a component of a radon reduction system. The vent pipe
must with no bends greater than 45 degrees, connected to an open T-fitting in the aggregate
layer, extending up through the conditioned spaces and terminating at least 12 inches (300
millimeters) above the roof opening.
 Provide a radon fan or an electrical receptacle in an accessible attic location near the vent pipe
to facilitate future fan installation if needed.
The requirements for radon protection are automatically satisfied if the building is elevated by at least 2
feet (600 millimeters), with open air space between the building and ground. An enclosed vented
crawlspace does not qualify. A garage under a building is an acceptable alternative.
For mixed-use buildings, nonresidential space is exempted.
Case 2. Renovation of Existing Building
For projects in high-risk areas for radon, EPA radon zone 1 (or local equivalent for projects outside the
United States), and if no slab work is being performed (i.e., an existing slab is not being demolished, and
no new slab floor is being built), test the building for radon. If the results are greater than 4 pCi/L(150
Bq/m3), install an active ventilation system. If the results are less than 4 pCi/L (150 Bq/m3), no radon-
resistant construction techniques are required.
prerequisite.

Cities that have been proven to have an average radon concentration of 4 pCi/L (150 Bq/m3) or less
through testing (with a minimum of 50 tests) are considered equivalent to EPA radon zone 2. Projects
located in these cities are therefore are exempted from the radon requirements of this prerequisite.
Guidance
Radon-Resistant Construction. Refer to the LEED v4 Homes reference guide with the following
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
The v4.1 language was adopted from the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction prerequisite Radon-
Resistant Construction. The required radon-resistant construction techniques for Case 1. New
Construction now include the latest standards from the American Association Radon Scientist and
Technologists and the most recent revision of Indoor airPLUS (version 1 Rev 04). The credit now
includes a way for projects outside of the U.S. to demonstrate equivalency to EPA radon zone 2 if the
project can demonstrate radon testing has been performed in their city. This requirement was adapted
from the v4 alternative compliance path for projects in Canada and was added to better accommodate
projects outside of the U.S. where EPA radon zones do not exist.
Further Explanation
Radon testing
If radon testing is required, consider following the ANSI/AARST Standard MAMF-2017 Protocol for
Conducting Measurements of Radon and Radon Decay Products in Multifamily Buildings.
International Tips
Identify whether the project is located in an area with a program or designation equivalent to the U.S.
EPA radon zones 1, 2 and 3, or whether the city has data from at least 50 radon tests.
Cities with an average radon concentration above 4 pCi/L (150 Bq/m3) from 50 or more radon tests are
considered high-risk or equivalent to EPA radon zone 1 for the purposes of this prerequisite. If the
average concentration is below this, the area may be considered equivalent to EPA radon zone 2 or EPA
radon zone 3. .
If there is insufficient information on the radon risk level, the project must assume it is in a high-risk area
for radon and build with radon-resistant construction techniques per Case 1, or perform building-level
radon testing per Case 2, as applicable.
Campus
Group Approach
Case 1: All buildings in the group may be documented as one.
Case 2: Submit separate documentation for each building.
Campus Approach
All
Radon zone map that demonstrates what EPA radon zone (or equivalent) project is X
located in

If applicable, for projects in high-risk radon areas, plans that demonstrate radon-
X
resistant construction elements
For existing building without radon-resistant construction techniques, provide test

X
results that show radon levels are below 4 pCi/L
Projects located in a moderate or low-risk area for radon (EPA radon zones 2 or 3, or equivalent), that
build with radon-resistant construction techniques per Case 1, or perform building-level radon testing
per Case 2, as applicable, are eligible for 1 exemplary performance point.

 LEED for O+M v4.1 EQ prerequisite Indoor Environmental Quality Performance: reducing
occupant exposure to radon gas and other soil gas contaminants is an important strategy for
maintaining good indoor air quality and occupant satisfaction.

EQ Prerequisite: Interior Moisture Management
Intent
To promote durability and performance of the building enclosure and its components and systems
through appropriate design, materials selection, and construction practices.
Requirements
MF
Install all the applicable indoor moisture control measures listed in Table 1.
Table 1. Required interior moisture control measures for homes
Location or equipment Required measure
Area directly above bathtub, spa, or shower Use nonpaper-faced backer board or paper-faced
(extending to ceiling), exposed wall or area product or coating over wallboard that meets
behind fiberglass enclosure if wallboard is standard ASTM D 3273
installed
Kitchen, bathroom, laundry room, spa area Use water-resistant flooring; do not install carpet
Entryway within 3 feet (900 mm) of exterior Use water-resistant flooring; do not install carpet
door accessible from ground (carpet tiles are permitted)
Tank water heater in or over living space Install drain and drain pan, drain pan and automatic
water shut-off or flow restrictor, or floor drain with
floor sloped to drain
Conventional clothes washer in or over living Install a braided washer hose or one of the
space following:
drain and drain pan;
drain pan and automatic water shut-off or flow

restrictor; or
floor drain with floor sloped to drain
Conventional clothes dryer Exhaust directly to outdoors
Plumbing systems for building and irrigation After completion of construction, test to verify that
there are no detectable water leaks
Guidance

Behind the Intent
Proper moisture management extends the life of a building, reduces maintenance and repairs, and
improves indoor environmental quality. LEED requires the interior moisture control measures listed in
Table 1 of the rating system requirements to prevent water damage from bathrooms, appliances, and
equipment. Monitoring for leaks is also important for indoor environmental quality and for saving water:
on average, leaks account for 20% or more of indoor water use. Some leaks are obvious, such as a
dripping faucet, but leaks in the underground water main, the foundation, or framing cavities can be
detected only through testing.
Beta Update
This new prerequisite was adopted from the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction MR prerequisite:
Durability Management. The water leak testing requirements come from LEED v4 Homes Design and
Construction WE prerequisite Indoor water use.
Step 1. Prepare Project Specifications
Include the measures listed in Table 1 in the project specifications. The techniques in Table 1 are
minimum requirements for controlling interior moisture. For best performance, include additional water
management techniques in the specifications.
Suggested contractor language is as follows:
 Drywall installer: Use only nonpaper-faced drywall or a product that meets ASTM D 3273 for
mold resistance above and immediately around tubs, showers, and spa areas.
 Plumber: Install a drain pan that drains to the sewer system or the exterior below all tank water
heaters, clothes washers in or over living space. Test pans and drains for leaks and confirm that
they will convey water outside the building. [Alternatives: Install an automatic leak detector
cutoff system for all water heaters and clothes washers; install a braided washer hose for all
clothes washers.] Test the entire water supply system downstream from the utility-installed
meter for water leaks for a minimum of 30 minutes. Repair any leaks that are detected.
Step 2. Conduct Inspections

The builder should inspect each measure at each phase of construction to confirm that all are
completed correctly.
 Inspect and test drain pans below water heaters and clothes washers before installing drywall to
confirm that they are leak free and direct water out of the house. Confirm with the drywall and
tile installation contractors that they are supplying water-resistant materials that meet the
requirements of this prerequisite.
 Inform trade contractors and field personnel of any water management items that require
correction before work continues. Reinspect any defective measures to confirm that they have
been corrected.
Step 3. Test for Water Leaks

After plumbing is complete, including the installation of all fixtures and any irrigation, ensure that there
are no leaks in the system.
 Test with a pressure gauge or ask the plumber to perform the test. Turn off all water fixtures
and fittings in the building. Install a pressure gauge on a hose bib, and check pressure in psi.
 Do not turn on any water during the testing period. If pressure is unchanged over a period of at
least 30 minutes, there is no detectable water leak.

Further Explanation
Campus
Group Approach
Campus Approach
All
X
Confirmation that all indoor moisture control measures are installed
ASTM D3273: astm.org/Standards/D3273.htm
Not available
Definitions
 nonpaper-faced backer board drywall with fiberglass or other inorganic facing material for use
in wet areas that is resistant to mold formation

moisture is an important strategy for maintaining good indoor air quality and occupant
satisfaction.

EQ Prerequisite: Environmental Tobacco
Smoke Control
Intent
To prevent or minimize exposure of building occupants, indoor surfaces, and ventilation air distribution
systems to environmental tobacco smoke.
Requirements
MF
For this prerequisite smoking includes tobacco smoke, as well as smoke produced from the combustion
of cannabis and controlled substances and the emissions produced by electronic smoking devices.
Prohibit smoking in all common areas of the building.
Prohibit smoking outside the building except on private balconies or in designated smoking areas
located at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) (or the maximum extent allowable by local codes) from all entries,
outdoor air intakes, and operable windows.
Communicate the no-smoking policy in building rental or lease agreements or condo or coop
association covenants and restrictions. Have in place provisions for enforcement or no-smoking signage.
Guidance
Environmental Tobacco Smoke. Refer to the LEED v4 Homes reference guide with the following
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
The v4.1 language was adopted from the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction prerequisite
Environmental Tobacco Smoke and LEED v4 BD+C New Construction prerequisite Environmental
Tobacco Smoke Control. The v4.1 credit includes a definition of smoking that aligns with industry best
practice and incorporates related LEED interpretations from LEED v4. In response to feedback from
project teams with unique no-smoking enforcement methods, projects now also have flexibility with no-
smoking signage or enforcement provisions.
Further Explanation
All
Description of project’ s no smoking policy, addressing the expanded smoking X

definition in entirety and including information on how policy is communicated to

building occupants and details of enforcement provisions or no-smoking signage,
as applicable.
Copy of no-smoking policy, singed letter from owner describing project’s no-
X
smoking policy and enforcement, or copy of any legally binding covenants
Scaled site plan or map showing the location of all designated outdoor smoking and
no-smoking areas, location of property line, and site boundary and indicating 25 X
foot distance from building openings.
Narrative of code requirements that restrict the project from prohibiting smoking
X
for at least 25 feet from the entries, outdoor air takes, and operable windows.
Related Credit Tips

EQ credit No Environmental Tobacco Smoke: This credit rewards projects that prohibit smoking in the
entire building and on private balconies.
Definitions
Smoking includes tobacco smoke, as well as smoke produced from the combustion of cannabis and
controlled substances and the emissions produced by electronic smoking devices.

environmental tobacco smoke is an important strategy for maintaining good indoor air quality

EQ Prerequisite: Compartmentalization
Intent
To limit occupants’ exposure to indoor air pollutants by minimizing the transfer of air between units.
Requirements
MF
Construction Document Specifications
Include the following details in construction and bid documents:
 Elements to be sealed (construction and bid documents). List all elements identified in ASHRAE
90.1–2016, Section 5.4.3.1, or applicable state or local codes, in addition to any site-specific
elements identified during plan review. Show locations to be sealed as well as acceptable
methods and materials.
 Air barrier sheet (bid documents). Show the air barrier continuity through the various conditions
of the exterior enclosure; this information can serve as an index to details.
 Compartmentalization sheet (bid documents). Show the continuity of fire and smoke barriers
around each apartment and between corridors, stairs, and common areas; this information can
serve as an index to details.
Diagnostic Testing
Compartmentalize each residential unit to minimize leakage between units. Minimize uncontrolled
pathways for environmental tobacco smoke and other indoor air pollutants between units by sealing
penetrations in walls, ceilings, and floors and by sealing vertical chases (including utility chases, garbage
chutes, mail drops, and elevator shafts) adjacent to the units.
Weather-strip all doors leading from residential units to common hallways to minimize air leakage into
the hallway. Weather-strip all exterior doors and operable windows to minimize leakage from outdoors.
Demonstrate a maximum leakage of 0.30 cubic feet per minute per square foot (1.53 liters per second
per square meter) at 50 Pa of enclosure area (i.e., all surfaces enclosing the apartment, including
exterior and party walls, floors, and ceilings).
Renovation projects that retain their existing envelope must meet an allowable maximum leakage of
0.50 cubic feet per minute per square foot (2.54 liters per second per square meter) at 50 Pa of
enclosure area.
Guidance

Compartmentalization. Refer to the LEED v4 Homes reference guide with the following additions and
modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
The v4.1 language was primarily adopted from the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction
prerequisite Compartmentalization. Language from LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction EA
prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance has also been included to outline sealing, air barrier, and fire
and smoke barrier details that must be included in construction and bid documents to ensure sufficient
compartmentalization. The leakage threshold has been relaxed from 0.23 to 0.3 and a separate
threshold for renovation projects was included.
Follow all steps as outlined in the LEED v4 Homes reference guide. For step 5, confirm the leakage does
not exceed the maximum 0.3 cfm 50 per square foot (1.53 liters per second per square meter) of
enclosure area for new construction projects, or 0.5 cfm 50 per square foot (2.54 liters per second per
square meter) of enclosure area for renovation projects.
Further Explanation
Weatherstripping
For guidance on choosing appropriate weatherstripping and applying weatherstripping properly, see
https://www.energy.gov/energysaver/weatherize/air-sealing-your-home/weatherstripping
International Tips
The air leakage testing required by this prerequisite may be challenging if there are no professionals
locally trained and qualified to perform this testing. Two LEED interpretations LI 10444 and LI 10443
offer alternative interim approaches for projects in this situation.
Campus
Group Approach
Campus Approach
All
Construction and bid documents that include elements to be sealed, including the
X
air barrier sheets and compartmentalization sheets.
Door schedule demonstrating weather-stripping at exterior unit doors and doors

X
leading from units to common hallways
Compartmentalization test results conducted by qualified energy rater X

Related Credit Tips
EQ Credit Enhanced Compartmentalization. This credit rewards projects that are able to achieve
leakage rates significantly below those required in this prerequisite.

 LEED for O+M v4.1 EQ prerequisite Indoor Environmental Quality Performance: managing air
transfer and associated cooking odors, smoke, dust, and pet dander between units, and
reducing pressure imbalances are important strategies for maintaining good indoor air quality

EQ Credit: Enhanced Compartmentalization
Intent
To minimize the exposure of building occupants to indoor air pollutants by preventing the transfer of air
between units.
Requirements
MF
Demonstrate a maximum leakage of 0.23 cubic feet per minute per square foot (1.17 liters per second
per square meter) at 50 Pa of enclosure area (i.e., all surfaces enclosing the apartment, including
exterior and party walls, floors, and ceilings).
Renovation projects that retain their existing envelope must meet an allowable maximum leakage of
0.30 cubic feet per minute per square foot (1.54 liters per second per square meter) at 50 Pa of
enclosure area.
Exemplary performance is available if maximum leakage of 0.15 cubic feet per minute per square foot
(1.17 liters per second per square meter) at 50 Pa of enclosure area is met.
Guidance
The prerequisite requirements are similar to LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction credit Enhanced
Compartmentalization.
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
The v4.1 language was adopted from the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction credit Enhanced
Compartmentalization. The leakage threshold has been relaxed from 0.15 to 0.23 and a separate
threshold for renovation projects was included.
See EQ prerequisite Compartmentalization. The requirements for this credit are exactly the same, but
the required maximum leakage rate is lower (see Table 1 for comparison of leakage rate requirements).
Table 1. Maximum leakage rate requirements
New construction projects Renovation projects
cubic feet per liters per cubic feet per liters per
minute per second per minute per second per
Prerequisite/ Credit
square foot at square meter square foot at square meter
50 Pa of at 50 Pa of 50 Pa of at 50 Pa of
enclosure area enclosure area enclosure area enclosure area
Compartmentalization 0.3 1.53 0.5 2.54

Enhanced 0.23 1.17 0.3 1.53
Compartmentalization
Enhanced 0.15 0.67 0.23 1.17

Exemplary performance
Further Explanation
Campus
Group Approach
Campus Approach
All
Compartmentalization test results conducted by qualified energy rater X
Related Credit Tips

EQ Prerequisite Compartmentalization. This prerequisite rewards projects for sufficient levels of
compartmentalization.
Exemplary performance is available if maximum leakage of 0.15 cubic feet per minute per square foot
(1.17 liters per second per square meter) of enclosure area is met for new construction projects and 023
cfm 50 per square foot (1.17 liters per second per square meter) of enclosure area for renovation
projects.

 LEED for O+M v4.1 EQ prerequisite Indoor Environmental Quality Performance: managing air
transfer and associated cooking odors, smoke, dust, and pet dander between units, and
reducing pressure imbalances are important strategies for maintaining good indoor air quality

EQ Credit: No Environmental Tobacco Smoke
Intent
To minimize exposure of building occupants, indoor surfaces, and ventilation air distribution systems to
environmental tobacco smoke.
Requirements
MF
Prohibit smoking inside the entire building, including within residential units.
Prohibit smoking on any private balconies.
Communicate the no-smoking policy in building rental or lease agreements or in condo or co-op
association covenants and restrictions. Have in place provisions for enforcement or no-smoking signage.
Guidance
Behind the Intent
This is credit encourages projects to prohibit smoking in the entire building. Smoking on private
balconies is also prohibited to ensure unintended smoke does not enter the building and minimize
exposure to residents on nearby balconies or outside spaces. Prohibiting spoking in private residences
and balconies may be challenging but is the only way to fully eliminate the risks associated with ETS,
cannabis, and other substances covered in this credit.
Beta Update
The credit requirements remain same as LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction, but clarifications for
the consideration of balconies and enforcement of no-smoking policy have been included.
Follow the steps for EQ prerequisite Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control. Make sure the no smoking
policy specifically includes residential units and private balconies (if applicable).
Further Explanation
All
In addition to documentation provided for EQ prerequisite Environmental Smoke

Control, confirmation of smoking prohibition in private residences and on private X
balconies.
Related Credit Tips

EQ prerequisite Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control: This prerequisite allows smoking in limited
areas inside and outside of the building.

environmental tobacco smoke is an important strategy for maintaining good indoor air quality

EQ Credit: Enhanced Indoor Air Quality
Strategies
Intent
To promote occupants’ comfort and well-being, by improving indoor air quality.
Requirements
Use a combination of any of the following options for a maximum of 4 points.
MF
Option 1. Walk-Off Mats (1 point)
At each dwelling unit’s primary entryway from the outdoors, install a permanent walk-off mat that is at
least 4 feet (1.2 meters) long and allows access for cleaning (e.g., grating with catch basin).
For regularly used common exterior entryways in multifamily buildings, install permanent systems that
are at least 10 feet long (3 meters) in the primary direction of travel to capture dirt and particulates.
Acceptable entryway systems include permanently installed grates, grilles, slotted surfaces that allow
for cleaning underneath, rollout mats, and any other materials manufactured as entryway systems with
equivalent or better performance. Maintain all on a weekly basis.
AND/OR
Option 2. Filtration (1 point)
Meet both of the following filtration requirements, as applicable.
Each dwelling-unit mechanical system that supplies air to an occupiable space through ductwork
exceeding 10 ft (3m) in length and through a thermal conditioning component, except evaporative
coolers, must have air filters with a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 10 or higher. All
recirculated and mechanically supplied outdoor air must be filtered before passing through the thermal
conditioning components. Design ductwork and specify the central blower to account for the pressure
drop across the filter. Air filter housings must be airtight to prevent bypass or leakage.
Each central ventilation system that supplies outdoor air to occupied spaces must have particle filters or
air-cleaning devices that meet one of the following filtration media requirements:
 minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 13 or higher, in accordance with ASHRAE

Standard 52.2–2007; or
 Equivalent filtration media class of ePM1 50% or higher, as defined by ISO 16890-2016,
Particulate Air Filters for General Ventilation, Determination of the Filtration
Performance.

Replace all air filtration media after completion of construction and before occupancy.
AND/OR
Option 3. Enhanced Local Exhaust (1 point)
Use one of the following strategies in every bathroom with a shower, bathtub, or spa (i.e., half-baths are
exempt) to control the use of the local exhaust fan:
 an occupancy sensor;
 an automatic humidistat controller;
 a continuously operating exhaust fan; or
 a delay timer that operates the fan for at least 20 minutes.
AND/OR
Option 4. Balanced Whole-Dwelling Unit Ventilation (2 points)
Install a balanced whole-dwelling unit ventilation system (not just exhaust only or supply only) that
meets the minimum ventilation requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62.2–2016, Sections 4 and 7, or local
equivalent whichever is more stringent.
Guidance
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
This credit includes a collection of strategies that go beyond the prerequisite for indoor air quality.
Structurally this credit is different from the LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction rating system, with
requirements adopted and combined from three v4 credits: Option 1 (Walk-off mats) from v4 credit
Contaminant Control, Option 2 from v4 credit Air Filtering, Option 3 from v4 credit Enhanced
Ventilation, and Option 4 from v4 credit Balancing of Heating and Cooling Distribution Systems.
The filtration requirements in Option 2 have been revised to address ventilation systems in dwelling
units separately from central ventilation systems as the filtration capabilities of these systems differ. The
requirements for central ventilation systems were adapted from LEED v4 BD+C New Construction.
For option 4, there is no longer a limit on the ventilation rates (in v4 ventilation rates could not exceed
10% of the ASHRAE minimum value).
Refer to LEED v4 Homes Reference guide as follows:
 For Option 1: reference guidance for the Contaminant control credit.
 For Option 2: reference guidance for Air Filtering credit
 For Option 3: reference guidance for Enhanced Ventilation credit
 For Option 4: reference guidance for Balancing of Heating and Cooling Distribution Systems
Further Explanation
1 2 3 4

Scaled floor plans showing locations and measurements
X
Mechanical schedules highlighting MERV or class ratings for
all central systems that supply outdoor air and all dwelling-
X
unit ducted mechanical systems
Mechanical schedules and product specifications X

highlighting the exhaust fan controllers for each dwelling
unit full bathroom
Mechanical schedules that demonstrate dwelling unit X
ventilation systems

 LEED for O+M v4.1 EQ prerequisite Indoor Environmental Quality Performance: managing dust
and dirt tracked in on shoes, moisture in bathrooms, and particulates and other indoor airborne
pollutants are important strategies for maintaining good indoor air quality and occupant
satisfaction.

EQ Credit: Low-Emitting Materials
Intent
To reduce concentrations of chemical contaminants that can damage air quality, human health,
productivity, and the environment.
Requirements
MF
Use materials on the building interior (everything within the waterproofing membrane) that meet the
low-emitting criteria below. Points are awarded according to Table 1:
Table 1. Points for low-emitting materials

2 product categories 1 point
3 product categories 2 points
Reach 90% threshold in at least three product Exemplary performance
categories
or 1 additional point if only 1-3 points
achieved above.
For 2 product categories, at least 25% of the Exemplary performance
products comply with the VOC emissions evaluation
via the CDPH v1.2-2012 Appendix B, New Single- or 1 additional point if only 1-3 points
Family Residence Scenario achieved above.
Paints and Coatings
At least 75% of all paints and coatings, by volume or surface area, meet the VOC emissions evaluation
AND 100% meet the VOC content evaluation.
The paints and coatings product category includes all interior paints and coatings applied on site.
Adhesives and Sealants
At least 75% of all adhesives and sealants, by volume or surface area, meet the VOC emissions
evaluation AND 100% meet the VOC content evaluation.
The adhesives and sealants product category includes all interior adhesives and sealants applied on site.
Flooring
At least 90% of all flooring, by cost or surface area, meets the VOC emissions evaluation OR inherently
nonemitting sources criteria, OR salvaged and reused materials criteria.
The flooring product category includes all types of hard and soft surface flooring (carpet, ceramic, vinyl,
rubber, engineered, solid wood, laminates), wall base, underlayments, and other floor coverings.

Subflooring is excluded.
Wall panels
At least 75% of all wall panels, by cost or surface area, meet the VOC emissions evaluation, OR
inherently nonemitting sources criteria, OR salvaged and reused materials criteria.
The wall panels product category includes all finish wall treatments (wall coverings, wall paneling, wall
tile), surface wall structures such as gypsum or plaster, cubicle/curtain/partition walls, trim, doors,
frames, windows, and window treatments.
Removable/interchangeable fabric panels, built-in cabinetry, and vertical structural elements are
excluded.
Ceilings
At least 90% of all ceilings, by cost or surface area, meet the VOC emissions evaluation, OR inherently
nonemitting sources criteria, OR salvaged and reused materials criteria.
The ceilings product category includes all ceiling panels, ceiling tile, surface ceiling structures such as
gypsum or plaster, suspended systems (including canopies and clouds), and glazed skylights.
Overhead structural elements (exposed, finished, and unfinished) are excluded.
Insulation
At least 75% of all insulation, meets the VOC emissions evaluation.
The insulation material category includes all thermal and acoustic boards, batts, rolls, blankets, sound
attention fire blankets, foamed-in place, loose-fill, blown, and sprayed insulation.
Insulation for HVAC ducts and plumbing piping excluded.
Low-emitting criteria
Inherently nonemitting sources
Product is an inherently nonemitting source of VOCs (stone, ceramic, powder-coated metals, plated or
anodized metal, glass, concrete, clay brick, and unfinished or untreated solid wood) and has no integral
organic-based surface coatings, binders, or sealants.
Salvaged and reused materials
Product is more than one year old at the time of use. If finishes are applied to the product on-site, the
finishes must meet the VOC emissions evaluation AND VOC content evaluation requirements.
VOC emissions evaluation
Option 1. Product has been tested according to California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard
Method v1.2–2017 and complies with the VOC limits in Table 4-1 of the method. Use any modeling
scenario (for example, the default private office or appendix B, new single-family residence scenario). If
the appendix B. single-family residence scenario is used, exemplary performance may be available (see
Table 1 above). Additionally, the range of total VOCs after 14 days (336 hours) was measured as
specified in the CDPH Standard Method v1.2 and is reported (TVOC ranges: 0.5 mg/m3 or less, between

0.5 and 5 mg/m3, or 5 mg/m3 or more). Laboratories that conduct the tests must be accredited under
ISO/IEC 17025 for the test methods they use.
The statement of product compliance must include the exposure scenario used, the amount of wet-
applied product applied in mass per surface area (if applicable), and follow guidelines in CDPH Standard
Method v1.2-2017, Section 8. Organizations that certify manufacturers’ claims must be accredited under
ISO Guide 17065.
Option 2. Product has been tested according to CEN TS 16516 and complies with the LCI values from
Table 1 of the German AgBB Testing and Evaluation Scheme (2015) and a formaldehyde limit of 10
micrograms per cubic meter. Additionally, the range of total VOCs after 28 days was measured as
specified in EN 16516 and reported (TVOC ranges: 0.5 mg/m3 or less, between 0.5 and 5 mg/m3, or 5
mg/m3 or more). Laboratories that conduct the tests must be accredited under ISO/IEC 17025 for the
test methods they use.
The statement of product compliance must include the amount of wet-applied product applied in mass
per surface area (if applicable) and the range of total VOCs. Organizations that certify manufacturers’
claims must be accredited under ISO Guide 17065.
VOC content evaluation
Product meets the VOC content limits outlined in one of the applicable standards and for projects in
North America, methylene chloride and perchloroethylene may not be intentionally added.
Statement of product compliance must be made by the manufacturer. Any testing must follow the test
method specified in the applicable regulation. If the applicable regulation requires subtraction of
exempt compounds, any content of intentionally added exempt compounds larger than 1% weight by
mass (total exempt compounds) must be disclosed.
 Paints and coatings:

o California Air Resource Board (CARB) 2007 Suggested Control Measure (SCM) for
Architectural Coatings
o South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, effective February 5,
2016
o European Decopaint Directive (2004/42/EC)
o Hong Kong Air pollution control (VOC) Regulation for regulated architectural paints
(January 2010)
 Adhesives and sealants:
o SCAQMD Rule 1168, October 6, 2017
o Canadian VOC Concentration Limits for Architectural Coatings (SOR/2009-264)
o Hong Kong Air Pollution Control (VOC) Regulation for regulated adhesives and
regulated sealants (April 2012)
o Free of solvents, as defined in TRGS 610 (January 2011)
Formaldehyde Emissions Evaluation
Product meets one of the following:
 EPA TSCA Title VI or California Air Resources Board (CARB) ATCM for formaldehyde
requirements for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or
 EPA TSCA Title VI or CARB ATCM formaldehyde requirements for no added formaldehyde
resins (NAF).
 Tested per EN 717-1:2014 for formaldehyde emissions and complies with emissions class
E1.Structural composite wood product made with moisture resistant adhesives meeting ASTM

2559, no surface treatments with added urea-formaldehyde resins or coatings, and certified
according to one of the following industry standards:
o Plywood: compliant in accordance with Voluntary Product Standard ‐ Structural
Plywood (PS 1‐09), Voluntary Product Standard – Performance Standard for Wood‐
Based Structural‐Use Panels (PS 2‐10), or one of the standards considered by CARB to
be equivalent to PS 1 or PS 2: (AS/NZS 2269, EN 636 3S (including CE label), Canadian
Standards Association CSA O121 for Douglas fir plywood, CSA O151 for Canadian
softwood plywood, for CSA O153 Poplar plywood, or CSAO325 for Construction
sheathing)
o Oriented strand board: specified with the Exposure 1 or Exterior bond classification in
accordance with Voluntary Product Standard – Performance Standard for Wood‐Based
Structural‐Use Panels (PS 2‐10)
o Structural composite lumber: compliant in accordance with Standard Specification for
Evaluation of Structural Composite Lumber Products (ASTM D 5456‐13)
o Glued laminated timber: compliant in accordance with Structural Glued Laminated
Timber (ANSI A190.1‐2012)
o I‐joists compliant in accordance with Standard Specification for Establishing and
Monitoring Structural Capacities of Prefabricated Wood I‐Joists (ASTM D 5055‐13)
o Cross‐laminated timber: compliant in accordance with Standard for Performance‐Rated
Cross‐Laminated Timber (PRG 320‐15)
o Finger‐jointed lumber labeled “Heat Resistant Adhesive (HRA)” in accordance with the
American Softwood Lumber Standard (DOC PS‐20 2015)
Guidance
The credit requirements are similar to LEED v4 Homes Design and Construction credit Low
Emitting Products. Refer to the LEED v4 Homes reference guide with the following additions and
modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
The credit requirements have been revised to better align with LEED v4.1 BD+C, where applicable.
The threshold ranges for compliance are adjusted to 75%- 90% by cost or surface area. Some other
changes are: i) including inherently non-emitting sources and salvaged/reused materials as part of
compliance criteria rather than exceptions/exclusions to reward project teams more directly, and ii)
modifying existing standard references CDPH standard method v1.1-> CDPH standard method v1.2
(updated version).
 SCAQMD Rule 1113, June 2011  SCAQMD Rule 1113, February 2015 (updated version)
 SCAQMD Rule 1168, July 2005  SCAQMD Rule 1168, October 2017 (updated version)
 AgBB 2010  CEN TS 16516 (updated testing standard)
 AgBB 2010  AgBB 2015 (updated VOC limits standard version)
Newly referenced standards for credit requirements are as below:
 TRGS 610 (January 2011) (for VOC content of adhesives and sealants)
 EPA TSCA Title VI and structural composite wood industry standards (for formaldehyde
emissions in composite wood)
For the VOC emissions evaluation, an international option is now included from the LEED v4.1 BD+C
rating system and for CDPH standard method v1.2, the single-family residence scenario is no longer
required. This scenario is still in the early phases of being adopted by manufacturers and third party
testing agencies. The v4.1 credit rewards exemplary performance for projects that select materials
compliant with this residential-specific scenario.

Refer to the LEED v4 Homes reference guide.
Further Explanation
CARB ATCM composite wood formaldehyde regulation
The LEM credit now accepts demonstration of compliance to U.S. federal regulation EPA TSCA Title VI
as an option to CARB ATCM requirements for formaldehyde in ULEF or NAF resins used in composite
wood products. Follow the LEED v4 guidance for CARB ATCM compliance.
TSCA Title VI (Formaldehyde standards for Composite Wood Products Act): In 2017, EPA issued a final
rule to implement the formaldehyde standards for composite wood products act that added Title VI to
the Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA). TSCA Title VI establishes formaldehyde emission standards
identical to the California Air Resources Board (CARB) limits. As with CARB ATCM, the goal is to reduce
exposure and adverse effects from formaldehyde emissions in composite wood. The rule affects
formaldehyde emission standards applicable to hardwood plywood, medium density fiberboard and
particleboard and finished goods containing these products that are manufactured and traded in the
U.S. region., establishes a third party certification program for emission testing of these products and
includes requirements for ULEF and NAF resins used in these products.
All
USGBC low-emitting materials calculator X
Product information (e.g., third-party certifications, testing reports) X

 LEED for O+M v4.1 EQ prerequisite Indoor Environmental Quality Performance: Strategies to
reduce chemical contaminant levels for improved air quality and human health such as using
inherently non-emitting products and/or using products with low VOC content/emissions in
newly constructed spaces can contribute to better indoor air quality and occupant satisfaction.

EQ Credit: Indoor Air Quality Assessment
Intent
To establish better quality indoor air in the building after construction and during occupancy.
Requirements
MF
Before each dwelling unit is occupied, perform air cleaning, a flush-out, and air testing in the unit, as
follows.
Option 1 (1 point):
 Complete all construction and cleaning activities in the dwelling unit. All interior finishes, such as
millwork, doors, paint, carpet, acoustic tiles, and movable furnishings (e.g., workstations,
partitions), must be installed, and major VOC punch list items must be finished.
 Perform air cleaning in the dwelling unit, with a recirculating HEPA Air Filtration Device (HAFD)
capable of removing 99.97% of particles down to 0.3 microns in size. At a minimum, clean the
air equal to 6 air changes per hour for at least 2 days (48 hours).
 When air cleaning is complete, test the air in the dwelling unit for particulates using a particulate
monitoring device with accuracy of greater of 5 µg/m3 or 20% of reading and resolution +/-
5µg/m3. Demonstrate that 10 micron particles do not exceed 8 µg/m3. If concentrations exceed
8 µg/m3, continue air cleaning until this level is achieved.
Option 2 (1 additional point):
 Concurrent with air cleaning, flush-out the dwelling unit for a minimum of 14 days (336 hours)
by operating the dwelling-unit ventilation system with an outdoor air quantity not less than 10%
of the system’s total required ventilation rate (per ASHRAE 62.2-2016). Maintain an internal
temperature of at least 60°F (15°C) and no higher than 80°F (27°C) and relative humidity no
higher than 60%.
 When the flush-out is complete, under ventilation conditions typical for occupancy, test the
indoor air in the unit for the contaminants listed in Table 1 using an allowed test method and
demonstrate the contaminants do not exceed the concentration levels listed in the table.
Table 1. Maximum concentration levels, by contaminant and testing method
Contaminant Maximum Allowed test methods*

concentration

Carbon Monoxide 10 mg/m3 and no Monitoring devices : Direct calibrated
(CO) greater than 2 mg/m3 electrochemical instrument with accuracy of (+/-
above outdoors (<9 2% ppm <50 ppm minimum accuracy).
ppm and no greater
than 2 ppm above
outdoors)
OR
Analytical methods: EPA IP-3A and IP-3B, and ISO

4224
Carbon Dioxide 700 ppm above outdoor Monitoring devices : Calibrated NDIR instrument
(CO2) levels (+/- 3% ppm minimum accuracy)
OR
Analytical methods: EPA IP-3A and IP-3B, and ISO

4224
Formaldehyde 16 ppb Monitoring devices : not allowed
OR
Analytical methods: ISO 16000-3, EPA TO-11a, EPA

comp. IP-6A, ASTM D5197-16
Total volatile 500 µg/m3 Monitoring devices: calibrated PID instrument

organic compounds based on isobutylene baseline (+/- 200 ppb or
(TVOC) better LOD, 5 ppb or less minimum accuracy).
Analytical methods: Use ISO 16000-6, EPA TO-17,

or EPA TO-15 to collect and analyze the air sample.
Calculate the TVOC value per EN 16516:2017, CDPH
Standard Method v1.2 2017 section 3.9.4, or
alternative calculation method as long as full
method description is included in test report.
*If an test analytical method is used for each contaminant, an exemplary performance point is available.
Sampling of identical spaces may be used for the analytical methods by testing one in seven with a
minimum of three samples in the group.

Guidance
Behind the Intent
Many building materials contain substances that are hazardous to human health, and construction
activity can introduce contaminants into the indoor environment. Harmful substances include
formaldehyde and volatile organic compounds (VOCs) from building materials. Dust, ozone, and fine
particulate matter generated by construction activity, diesel engines, or unfiltered outdoor air can also
be harmful. Reducing indoor air contaminants has significant human health benefits and typically
improves occupants’ comfort.
Air cleaning and flush-outs are effective methods to remove and disperse off-gassed compounds and
other contaminants left behind at the end of construction.
Testing airborne pollutant levels is the best way to demonstrate that source control strategies have
been effectively and properly implemented.
Beta Update
This credit has been significantly restructured to better reflect indoor air assessment opportunities in
residential buildings. Air cleaning, which is required for two days, will remove particles left behind from
construction. The flush-out, which is required to be performed for 14 days at 10% of the total required
ventilation rate, will remove additional contaminants from the building during a critical time of off-
gassing.
Performance testing is now required to ensure the air cleaning and/or flush-out are effective and to
provide feedback for any additional contaminant control that may be needed. The number of
contaminants required to be tested has been significantly reduced from LEED v4 and monitoring
devices are now included as allowed test methods for all contaminants except formaldehyde. Due to the
complexity of testing for formaldehyde and importance of this contaminant, analytical methods must be
used.
Step 1. Determine Assessment Approach
 Outline how the air cleaning will be performed. Select compliant air cleaning equipment and
develop a plan for how each dwelling unit will be cleaned.
 If pursuing Option 2, outline how the flush-out will be performed. Determine the amount of
outdoor air that will be introduced to each unit and an operation plan for each dwelling-unit.
 Develop a plan for indoor air testing.
o Determine how each contaminant will be tested. Select test method(s) including
specific monitoring device(s) or analytical methods as applicable, and identify who will
perform the testing.
o Select locations for testing and compliant equipment for each required contaminant.
Particulate testing must be performed in each unit, sampling is not allowed. Testing of
CO, CO2, Formaldehyde, and TVOC must be performed in each unit unless an analytical
test method is being used, in which case sampling is allowed. For sampling, test one in
seven identical spaces with a minimum of three samples in the group.
Air cleaning, flush-out, and air testing may be performed in stages as specific units are completed.
Step 2. Clean and Prepare Building

Complete all construction and cleaning activities.
Step 3. Perform Air Cleaning and Flush Out
Complete the air cleaning and flush-out (if pursuing Option 2) following the requirements in the credit.
Document details of the air cleaning and flush-out in a report.
Step 4. Perform Air Testing
 After at least 2 days (48 hours) of air cleaning, test for particulates per the air testing plan.
Confirm the particulate levels do not exceed the threshold in the credit requirements.
 If also pursuing Option 2, after at least 14 days, test for CO, CO2, Formaldehyde and TVOC per
the air testing plan. Confirm the contaminant levels do not exceed the maximum concentrations
outlined in the credit requirements.
Further Explanation
1 2
IAQ testing report X

X
Air cleaning report X
X
Flush-out report X
For Option 2, if an analytical test method is used for the testing of carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide,
and total volatile organic compounds, an exemplary performance point is available. Sampling of
identical spaces may be used for the analytical methods by testing one in seven with a minimum of
three samples in the group.

remove pollutants and dust from the building and meeting contaminant threshold levels can
directly contribute to better indoor air quality and occupant satisfaction.

EQ Credit: Thermal Comfort
Intent
To promote occupant’s comfort and well-being by providing quality thermal comfort.
Requirements
MF
Option 1. Radiant Comfort
Meet all of the following for each dwelling unit:
1) Heating and cooling controls are installed in every unit
2) Walls, floor, and roof components meet the prescriptive insulation value requirements of 2009
IECC Commercial code, tables 502.1.2 or 502.2.
3) Have no thermal bridges in the envelope, including at patios and concrete podiums
a. Minimum R-3 continuous insulation installed for all non-mass walls (CZ 1-2 are
exempted)
4) Windows meet the following maximum U-value and SHGC.
OR
Option 2. ASHRAE Standard 55-2017
Design heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) systems and the building envelope to meet the
requirements of ASHRAE Standard 55–2017, Thermal Comfort Conditions for Human Occupancy with
errata or a local equivalent.
For natatoriums, demonstrate compliance with ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, 2015 edition,
Chapter 5, Places of Assembly, Typical Natatorium Design Conditions, with errata.
OR
Option 3. ISO Standards
Design HVAC systems and the building envelope to meet the requirements of the applicable standard:

 ISO 7730:2005, Ergonomics of the Thermal Environment, analytical determination and
interpretation of thermal comfort, using calculation of the PMV and PPD indices and local
thermal comfort criteria; and
 ISO 17772-2017Energy Performance of Buildings- Indoor environmental quality- Part 1. Indoor

environmental input parameters for the design and assessment of energy performance of
buildings, Section A2.
Guidance
The credit requirements are similar to LEED v4 BD+C New Construction credit Thermal Comfort.
Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide with the following additions and modifications:
Behind the Intent

Beta Update
Changes for this credit include updates to recent versions of referenced ASHRAE and European
standards or updates to reference more globally applicable standards. The changes made were to the
following standards:
 ASHRAE 55-2010  ASHRAE 55-2017 (updated version)

 ASHRAE Applications Handbook 2011 edition  ASHRAE Applications Handbook 2015 edition
(updated version)
 EN 15251  ISO 17772-2017 (global applicability)
A new option has been added to address radiant comfort.
For Options 2 and 3, refer to LEED v4 reference guide.
Option 2. ASHRAE Standard 55-2017
Step 1. Select Analysis Method(s) - Use the following sections for the newer ASHRAE Standard 55-2017
for thermal comfort analysis.
For mechanically conditioned spaces, select one of more of the following from section 5.3, Method for
Determining Acceptable Thermal Environment in Occupied Spaces:
 Section 5.3.1, Graphic Comfort Zone Model
 Section 5.3.2 Analytical Comfort Zone Model with Normative Appendix B
 Section 5.3.3 Elevated Air Speed Comfort Zone Method
Section 5.3.4 must also be followed for potential sources of local discomfort.
For naturally conditioned spaces, select Section 5.4, Determining Acceptable Thermal Conditions in
Occupant-Controlled Naturally Conditioned Spaces. This method is available only for spaces that meet
certain criteria (see Further Explanation below, Criteria for Occupant-Controlled Naturally Conditioned
Spaces). Spaces that do not meet these criteria must follow one of the mechanically conditioned spaces
methods.
For mixed mode spaces, each seasonal conditioning strategy must be documented separately. For
example, demonstrate heating season compliance using Section 5.3 and cooling season compliance
using Section 5.4.
Step 2: Perform Analysis: Perform analysis exactly as per LEED v4 reference guide for this section if
using Section 5.3 or Section 5.4 of the newer ASHRAE Standard 55-2017.
Step 3: Follow design guidelines as per LEED v4 reference guide for this step per Section 6.1 of ASHRAE
55-2017.

Option 3. ISO 7730-2005 and ISO 17772-2017
Step 1. Select Analysis method (s)

Select either ISO 7730-2005 for mechanically conditioned spaces or the newer standard ISO 17772-2017,
Section H.2 Default acceptable indoor temperatures for buildings without mechanical cooling systems
(i.e. for naturally conditioned spaces). Follow ISO method for spaces that do not meet criteria listed
below Further Explanation, Criteria for Occupant- Controlled Naturally Conditioned Spaces.
For mixed mode spaces, each seasonal conditioning strategy must be documented separately. For
example, demonstrate heating season compliance using ISO 7730 and cooling season compliance using
ISO 17772-2017.
Step 2: Select Building Category

Refer to LEED v4 reference guide for guidance on this section with the exception of following the newer
standard ISO 17772-2017 instead of EN 15251-2007. The comparison of comfort acceptability ranges
(allowed PMV and PMD percentages) for the two standards and category descriptions still hold valid
per Table 1 of LEED v4 reference guide.
Step 3: Perform Analysis

If using ISO 7730-2005, perform the analysis as described in LEED v4 reference guide.
If using ISO 17772-2017, calculate running mean outdoor temperatures for the project’ s location as
described in Section H.2 of this ISO standard, for times of the year when natural conditioning is used.
Use Figure H.1 to establish the upper and lower operative temperature limits of the comfort zone and
use Figure H.1 of ISO 17772-2017 to plot running mean outdoor temperatures, comfort zone boundaries,
and design operative temperatures as in LEED v4 reference guide.
Further Explanation
Criteria for Occupant-Controlled Naturally Conditioned Spaces
The same set of requirements per LEED v4 reference guide for use of occupant controlled naturally
conditioned spaces (or adaptive) method are applicable for the newer standards ASHRAE 55-2017
(Section 5.4) and ISO 17772-201 (Section H.2) as well.
1 2 3
Confirmation that heating and cooling controls are installed in

X
every unit
Confirmation that walls, floor and roof components meet
prescriptive insulation requirements of 2009 IECC tables
X
502.1.2 or 502.2, no thermal bridges exist in the envelop, and
that all non-mass walls have R-3 continuous insulation
Confirmation that windows meet required U-value and SHGC
X
requirements
Description of weather data used to determine operative
temperatures, relative humidity, outdoor temperatures X
Meet ASHRAE Standard 55-2017 for 80% acceptability with the X

same submittals and copies of ASHRAE 55-2017, Appendix I,
Figure I2, Figure I4 or Figure I5 or predicted worst case indoor
conditions for each month on copy of Figure 5.4.
Documentation to verify thermally conditioned spaces meet
ISO 7730 or ISO 17772-2017 as applicable (e.g. for ISO, X
calculations based on Sections 4.1 and 6 or Annex H, computer
program results based on Annex D, tables based on Annex E,

or copy of Figures 2, 3, 4, A.1, A.2; for EN, documentation of
worst-case indoor conditions for each month on copy of Figure
A1).

promote occupant comfort and wellbeing by providing thermal comfort such as designing
HVAC systems and building envelope per thermal comfort standards and providing individual
thermal comfort controls in newly constructed occupant spaces can contribute to occupant
satisfaction.

EQ Credit: Daylight and Quality Views
Intent
To connect building occupants with the outdoors, reinforce circadian rhythms, and reduce the use of
electrical lighting by introducing daylight and views into the space.
Requirements
MF
Option 1. Daylight
Demonstrate through computer modeling or daylight measurements that illuminance levels comply with
the following:
 Minimum access to daylight in each living space: Achieve a minimum of 10 lux of daylight for at
least 90% of the floor area of each regularly occupied space in all residential units. For this
requirement, each space is evaluated individually.
 Adequate daylight for the building: Achieve levels between 150 lux and 5,000 lux for at least 50%
of the regularly occupied floor area. Spaces that incorporate blinds or shades for glare control may
demonstrate compliance for only the minimum 150 lux level. For this requirement, compliance is
evaluated as an overall percentage of all regularly occupied spaces in the building.
Calculate illuminance levels as follows:
 Calculate at 9 a.m. and 3 p.m. on a clear-sky day at the equinox.
 Calculate on a maximum 5 foot (1500 millimeters) square grid.
 Exclude blinds or shades from the model. Include any permanent interior obstructions. Movable
furniture and partitions may be excluded.
Measure illuminance levels as follows:
 Take measurements during the day sometime between September 1st and October 30th or March
1st and April 30th.
 For all regularly occupied spaces except kitchens, measure at 30 inches (76 millimeters) above the
floor.
 For kitchens, measure at kitchen counter height.
 Take measurements on a maximum 5 foot (1500 millimeters) square grid.
OR
Option 2. Quality Views

For at least 50% of the regularly occupied spaces in each residential unit, have one window that
includes one of the following: (1) flora, fauna, or sky; or (2) objects at least 25 feet from the exterior of
the window.
Qualifying windows must provide a clear image of the exterior, not obstructed by frits, fibers, patterned
glazing, or added tints that distort color balance.
Views into interior atria may be used to meet up to 30% of the required spaces in the building.
Guidance
The credit requirements are similar to LEED v4 BD+C New Construction credits Daylight and
Quality Views. Refer to the LEED v4 BD+C reference guide with the following additions and
modifications:
Behind the Intent

This credit encourages connection of building occupants with the outdoors. Daylighting can enhance a
connection to nature and directly improve the mood of building occupants, there is a multitude of
physiological and psychological benefits resulting from daylight in buildings, for example: 2
 Improved vitamin D, visual system, circadian rhythms, sleep quality, mood, mental
performance, alertness, and brain activity.
 Decreased cancer probability, abnormal bone formation, depression, stress, sadness, and
violent behavior.
Views to the outdoors also connect the occupants with natural environmental cues, such as diurnal
changes from light to dark and the changes in light from season to season, which are important for
maintaining natural circadian rhythms. Disruption of these rhythms can lead to long-term health care
problems, including mental disorders. 3
For the daylighting portion of this credit, compliance is based on first meeting a minimum level of
daylight in each living space in the building to ensure all occupants of the building have access to some
daylight during the day and then second meeting an overall level of daylight for the building to ensure a
significant portion of the building has adequate daylight for typical daily tasks.
For the quality views portion of this credit, compliance is again determined for each residential unit to
make sure all occupants in the building have access to views to the outdoors.
Beta Update
This is a new credit adapted from LEED v4 O+M Multifamily. For Quality Views, a qualifying window
must have a view to flora, fauna, sky, or objects at least 25 feet from the exterior of the window.
Movement has been removed from the available criteria as this type of feature is sometimes not desired
in a residential setting.
2 Int’l Journal of Advances in Chemical Eng., & Biological Sciences (IJACEBS) Vol. 3, Issue 1 (2016) ISSN 2349-1507
EISSN 2349-1515
Natural Light and Productivity: Analyzing the Impacts of Daylighting on Students’ and Workers’ Health and Alertness
N. Shishegar, M. Boubekri
3 Kellert, Stephen R., Judith H. Heerwagen, and Martin L. Mador, Biophilic Design: The Theory, Science and Practice of
Bringing Life into Buildings (New

York: Wiley, 2008), p. 91.

Option 1. Daylight
Step 1. Design for Daylight
Follow LEED v4 BD+C reference guide steps 1-4.
Step 2. Perform Simulation or Measurements
If demonstrating compliance through using computer modeling, follow LEED v4 BD+C reference guide
steps 1-2 under Option 2. Simulation-Illuminance calculation.
If demonstrating compliance through measurements,
 Determine when the measurements will be taken. Measurements may be taken anytime during
the day in September, October, March, or April.
 Draw the measurement grid and the measurement nodes (usually at the center of the grid
space) on a floor plan. Alternatively, tape or mark off the measurement grid on the floor of the
actual space and document the grid with photos or a video. Use a light meter to take a daylight
illuminance measurement at 30 inches [750 millimeters] above the floor (or at kitchen counter
height for kitchens).
 Measure illuminance as follows:

o Refer to the IESNA Reference Guide, 10th edition, Section 9.7, for more information on
light meters.
o Locate each measurement node in the actual space.
o Record the measured illuminance at each node on the floor plan or in a tracking table.
o If the reading exceeds 5,000 lux, note whether blinds or shades are incorporated.
o All measurements do not need to be taken on the same day.
Step 3. Evaluate Illuminance Compliance
Review the simulation or measurement results and determine compliance with the two separate
requirements: minimum access to daylight in each living space, and adequate daylight for the building.
 Minimum access to daylight in each living space: For each residential unit, record the regularly
occupied spaces with illuminance levels of at least 10 lux for at least 90% of the floor area.
Confirm that all spaces comply.
 Adequate daylight for the building: For the entire building, record the regularly occupied floor
area with illuminance levels between 150 lux and 5,000 lux. Also include areas with levels
exceeding 5,000 lux if blinds or shades are incorporated. Confirm that more than 50% of the
regularly occupied floor area complies.
Option 2. Quality Views
Step 1. Evaluate Project Site

Review the project’s surroundings to identify the presence of elements that meet the view quality
requirements of this credit, such as parks, green roofs and walls, nearby buildings, and pedestrian and
vehicle movement.
Step 2. Identify Sightlines to Exterior Views

Identify the spaces with one window that includes views to at least one of the following: (1) flora, fauna,
or sky; (2) objects at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior of the glazing.
 For each residential unit, evaluate each regularly occupied space.
 Only include windows with a clear image of the exterior, not obstructed by frits, fibers,
patterned glazing, or added tints that distort color balance.
 Identify whether the view from the window is to an interior atrium.

Complete the tracking table to confirm that for each residential unit, at least 50% of the regularly
occupied spaces have a window with a qualifying view. If the building has interior atria, confirm that no
more than 30% of the qualifying views are from views to interior atria.
Further Explanation
1 2
List of all regularly occupied spaces in each residential unit, with x

X
total area and qualifying floor area in each space.
If applicable, narrative or output file describing daylight simulation
x
program, simulation inputs, and weather file
If applicable, sample daylight measurement report with measured
illuminance values for at least one space, height of measurement x
point measurement grid size, and results for the measurement.
Calculations demonstrating percentage of compliant regularly
x
occupied floor area with 150 lux to 5,000 lux.
Calculations for each residential unit demonstrating percentage of x
compliant spaces with a qualifying view.
Sample documentation illustrating how the qualifying views were x
determined for at least one space.

promote connection of building occupants with outdoors and reinforce circadian rhythms can
contribute to occupant satisfaction.

EQ Credit: Acoustic Performance
Intent
To promote occupant’s comfort and well-being by providing effective acoustic design.
Requirements
MF
Option 1. HVAC Background Noise (1 point)
Install quiet space heating, cooling and ventilation systems in each dwelling unit. In each regularly
occupied space, achieve maximum background noise levels from heating, cooling and ventilation
systems to ensure they are at or below the following thresholds:
35 dBA for living areas
45 dBA for kitchens and baths
Calculate or measure sound levels. For measurements, use a sound level meter that conforms to ANSI
S1.4 for type 1 (precision) or type 2 (general purpose) sound measurement instrumentation, , the
International Electrotechnical Commission (2013) IEC 61672-1:2013 Electroacoustics – Sound Level
Meters – Part 1: Specifications, or a local equivalent. Measurements shall be taken at roughly 6 feet off
the floor, from the center of each room. Heating and cooling systems with multiple speeds must be
tested at the fan speed designed to serve the hottest day of the year.
AND/OR
Option 2. Envelope Acoustic Performance (1 point)
Meet the following requirements:
 Walls, partitions and floor/ceiling assemblies separating dwelling units from each other, from
adjacent occupancies, from public or service areas, from stairs or from mechanical equipment
spaces, including boiler rooms, or elevator or other shafts shall have a minimum sound
transmission class (STC) rating of 50. Penetrations or openings in construction assemblies for
piping; electrical devices; recessed cabinets; bathtubs; soffits; or heating, ventilating or exhaust
ducts shall be sealed, lined, insulated or otherwise treated to maintain the required rating.
 Exterior windows in dwelling units, must have a minimum STC rating of 34.
 Dwelling unit entrance doors (either from common hallways or the exterior) must have a
minimum STC rating of 30.
Floor/ceiling assemblies between dwelling units or between a dwelling unit and a public or service area
stair, exterior mechanical equipment, or other mechanical equipment space, including boiler rooms, shall
be constructed of assemblies with a minimum impact insulation class (IIC) rating of 50

Guidance
Behind the Intent
Beta Update
The credit includes two options that address top acoustics-related considerations in multifamily
buildings: Option 1 for noise levels from HVAC equipment, and Option 2 to address airborne sound and
impact sound from adjacent units and from the outdoors. This is a new credit adopted from LEED v4
pilot credit LEED v4 Homes Acoustic comfort pilot credit.
This credit establishes minimum performance criteria for multifamily buildings. Specific thresholds were
selected (see Table 1) to encourage effective acoustic design while also balancing considerations of
cost, material use, and implementable construction strategies. Projects are encouraged to exceed the
performance criteria outlined in this credit and to pursue the performance-based compliance
approaches (post-construction measurements and testing) to maximize occupant comfort and well-
being.
Table 1. Sources of compliance criteria

Source(s) for acoustic
performance criteria
HVAC background noise living areas 35 dBA 2015 ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC
Applications, Chapter 48, Table
1
HVAC background noise in kitchens and baths 45 dBA 2015 ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC
Applications, Chapter 48, Table
1
Walls, partitions and floor/ceiling assemblies STC 50 NYC Code section 1207.2
separating dwelling units from each other, from
adjacent occupancies, from public or service areas,
from stairs or from mechanical equipment spaces,
including boiler rooms, or elevator or other shafts
Exterior windows in dwelling units STC 34 LEED, based on review of
available residential window
products
Dwelling unit entrance doors STC 30 NYC Code section 1207.2
Floor/ceiling assemblies between dwelling units or IIC 50 NYC Code section 1207.2 and
between a dwelling unit and a public or service area International Building Code
stair, exterior mechanical equipment, or other
mechanical equipment space, including boiler rooms
Option 1. HVAC Background Noise
Step 1. Select Compliant Equipment

Identify equipment and air distribution elements that could contribute to HVAC background noise in
each dwelling unit’s regularly occupied spaces. Select quiet equipment and consider source-receiver
paths when locating living spaces and HVAC equipment. Review basic acoustic design techniques and
source design considerations from resources such as those outlined in 2015 ASHRAE Handbook-- HVAC
Applications, Chapter 48.
Compile acoustic performance data at specific operating points from the space conditioning and whole-
dwelling unit equipment manufacturer’s data – intermittent local exhaust fans are excluded from the
scope of this credit. This information may inform the HVAC background noise criteria used for
compliance.

Step 2. Verify HVAC Background Noise
Demonstrate compliance through either design calculations or measurements, as follows:
 Design calculations. Calculations may be done in the design phase.
o Calculate sound pressure levels per Chapter 48 and follow the steps outlined in the
HVAC Noise-Reduction Design Procedures section of the handbook. Calculations may
be done in the design phase. Calculate sound pressure levels per AHRI Standard 885–
2008, Procedure for Estimating Occupied
o Space Sound Levels in the Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets. Follow the steps
outlined in Section 6, Calculation Procedures for Estimating Sound Levels in Occupied
Spaces.
 Measurement. Follow the measurement guidance in the Determining Compliance, Room Noise
Measurements section of 2015 ASHRAE Handbook-- HVAC Applications, Chapter 48. The
measurements must be performed post-construction and should be done in furnished spaces
with HVAC systems operating in typical conditions and while no occupants are present. Noises
from sources other than HVAC systems should be minimized or turned off during testing. Use
sound level meter equipment that complies with the credit requirements.
A local standard, procedure, or handbook that is equivalent to one of the above methods may also be
used.

Document all calculations and/or measurement results. Confirm that the HVAC background noise in all
living areas is below 35 dBA and in all kitchens and baths is below 45 dBA.
Option 2. Enhanced Acoustic Performance

Step 1. Select Compliant Materials
Verify that the applicable materials for each dwelling unit meet the acoustic performance criteria
outlined in the credit requirements. Demonstrate compliance through published data, or measurement,
as follows:
 Published data. Select walls, partitions, floor/ceiling assemblies, doors, and windows with
published STC or IIC manufacturer’s data, as applicable
 Measurement. Measure noise isolation class (NIC) for all assemblies per Annex A.3 of ANSI
S12.60– 2010 and compare the results with the sound isolation requirements. A NIC rating within
3 points of the specified STC rating may be considered compliant. Measurements cannot be
performed until after the substantial completion of construction. Assemblies with similar
construction details may be grouped together. Any significant variance in opening areas, such
as window or door ratios, should be evaluated separately.

Compile a list of each material used in the dwelling units and its associated location(s) and the acoustic
performance criteria from published data or measurements.
Further Explanation
Campus
Group Approach
Campus Approach
Ineligible.

1 2
Dwelling unit’s sound level values

X
Measurement narrative and manufacturer’s data X
STC and IIC ratings for space adjacencies X

 LEED for O+M v4.1 EQ prerequisite Indoor Environmental Quality Performance: Strategies that
manage sound levels and sound transfer or impact from adjacent spaces and HVAC equipment
can contribute to occupant satisfaction.

IN Credit: Innovation
Intent
To encourage projects to achieve exceptional or innovative performance.
Requirements
MF
To achieve all five innovation points, a project team must achieve at least one pilot credit, at least one
innovation credit and no more than two exemplary performance credits.
Option 1. Innovation (1 point)
Achieve significant, measurable environmental performance using a strategy not addressed in the LEED
green building rating system.
Identify the following in writing:
 the intent of the proposed innovation credit;

 the proposed requirement for compliance;
 the proposed submittals to demonstrate compliance; and
 the design approach (strategies) used to meet the requirements.
Examples of innovation may be found in the LEED Innovation Catalog.
AND/OR
Option 2. Pilot (1 point)
Achieve one pilot credit from USGBC’s LEED Pilot Credit Library.
AND/OR
Option 3. Additional Strategies (1-3 points)
 Innovation (1-3 points)

Defined in Option 1 above.
 Pilot (1-3 points)

Defined in Option 2 above.
 Exemplary Performance (1-2 points)

Achieve exemplary performance in an existing LEED v4 prerequisite or credit that allows
exemplary performance, as specified in the LEED Reference Guide, v4 edition. An exemplary
performance point is typically earned for achieving double the credit requirements or the next
incremental percentage threshold.
Guidance

There are no substantive changes to the credit requirements; refer to the LEED v4 BD+C reference
guide, with the following additions:
Step 2. Develop Innovation Point Strategy
 If projects pursue a pilot ACP, they are exempted from the requirement to pursue at least one
pilot credit. To achieve all five points in the Innovation credit under this approach, projects may
select one of the following point combinations:
o 4 innovation and 1 exemplary performance
o 3 innovation and 2 exemplary performance
Further Explanation
Documentation Innovation Pilot Exemplary
Credit Performance
Innovation narrative
X
Supporting documentation X
X X
Pilot credit registration
X
Pilot credit survey
X
Pilot credit specific submittals X
Exemplary performance credit and level X

 LEED O+M IN credit Innovation: Many innovation strategies are also available in the LEED O+M
v4.1 credit Innovation. Other innovation strategies focus on innovative performance tracking or
operations practices that can be initiated during design and construction and set up a project
for success in achieving higher performance scores.

IN Credit: LEED Accredited Professional
Intent
To encourage the team integration required by a LEED project and to streamline the application and
certification process.
Requirements
MF
At least one principal participant of the project team must be a LEED Accredited Professional (AP) with
a specialty appropriate for the project.
Guidance
the following addition:
Further Explanation
Required
Documentation
Full name and specialty credential of LEED AP X

 LEED O+M IN credit Innovation: A LEED Accredited Professional encourages integration of
LEED expertise and collaboration toward project priorities. As such, it is a requirement to
achieve Innovation points in LEED v4.1 O+M.

RP Credit: Regional Priority
Intent
To address geographically specific environmental, social equity, and public health priorities.
Requirements
MF
Six Regional Priority credits have been identified by the USGBC regional councils and chapters as
having special importance for the project’s region. A database of these credits and their geographic
applicability is available on the USGBC website, at www.usgbc.org/rpc.
One point is awarded for each Regional Priority credit achieved, up to a maximum of four.
Guidance
the following addition:
Further Explanation
Campus
Group Approach
Campus Approach
Ineligible.
Documentation
No additional documentation is required to earn Regional Priority credits. Document compliance

for the selected credits, and the related RP bonus points for their achievement will be awarded
automatically.

 LEED O+M IN credit Innovation: Regional approaches can be applied as innovation strategies in
the LEED O+M v4.1 credit Innovation and set up a project for success in achieving higher
performance scores.

APPENDICES
Appendix I. Summary of changes - Changes from LEED v4 BD+C
INTEGRATIVE PROCESS
Credit Integrative Process  Added new option from LEED v4 BD+C:

Multifamily Midrise: Installation
Contractor Training
 Revised ‘implementation’ sections to
streamline documentation and provide
more meaningful outputs from the
integrative process.
LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION
Credit LEED for Neighborhood  Modified point scale to allow any LEED
Development Location ND project maximum points
Credit Sensitive Land Protection  None
Credit High-Priority Site  None
Credit Surrounding Density and  Added new option from Multifamily

Diverse Uses Midrise: Compact Development
Credit Access to Quality Transit  Reduced thresholds for weekend transit

trips.
 Clarified requirements for privately run
shuttles.
 Added more point thresholds
Credit Bicycle Facilities  Allowed on-site bicycle sharing stations

to count for 50% of the long-term and
short-term bicycle storage space for all
projects.
 Reduced long-term storage
requirements from one space per
residential unit to one space per three
dwelling units
 Extend the distance to short-term
storage and long-term storage.
Credit Reduced Parking Footprint  Removed dependency on density and

removed cases 1 and 2.
 Parking reduction adjusted to 30% (from
20 and 40% reductions)
 Removed carpool preferred parking
requirement.

 Added three new options 1. No Off-
Street Parking, 3. Car share, and 4.
Unbundling Parking.
Credit Green Vehicles  Changed credit’s name to Electric

Vehicles
 Removed preferred parking
requirements.
 Removed Option 2. Liquid, gas, or
battery facilities and replaced with
Electric Vehicle Charging Infrastructure.
SUSTAINABLE SITES
Prerequisite Construction Activity  Required construction activity air

Pollution Prevention pollution rules only for projects in
locations that have local rules on this
topic
Credit Site Assessment  Clarified credit language.
Credit Site Development – Protect  Changed name to Protect and Restore

or Restore Habitat Habitat
 Reduced threshold to 25% from 30%
restoration.
 Simplified soils requirements and added
a vegetation section.
 Financial Support cost revised to $0.20
per sq. ft. from $0.40.
Credit Open Space  Clarified credit language.

 Added new option from Multifamily
Midrise: Access to Open Space
Credit Rainwater Management  Reduced thresholds starting at 80th

percentile instead of 95th. Zero lot line
starts at 70th percentile instead of 85th.
 Clarified credit language.
 Removed Options 2, replacing with an
option from Multifamily Midrise:
Permeable Lot Area
Credit Heat Island Reduction  Clarified credit language.

 Added new scoring approach taken
from Multifamily Midrise
Credit Light Pollution Reduction  None
WATER EFFICIENCY
Prerequisite Outdoor Water Use  Combined with Indoor Water Use to

Reduction create a new prerequisite: Water Use
Reduction, which requires 20% water
reduction from the baseline

Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction  Combined with Outdoor Water Use to
create a new prerequisite: Water Use
Reduction, which requires 20% water
reduction from the baseline
Prerequisite Building-Level Water  None

Metering
Credit Outdoor Water Use  Combined with Indoor Water Use to

Reduction create a new credit: Water Use
Reduction
 New prescriptive path from Multifamily
Midrise added to this new credit
Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction  Combined with Outdoor Water Use to
create a new credit: Water Use
Reduction
 New prescriptive path from Multifamily
Midrise added to this new credit
Credit Cooling Tower Water Use  Removed
Credit Water Metering  New Option added that rewards

metering dwelling units
ENERGY & ATMOSPHERE
Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning  Changed name to Fundamental Systems

and Verification Testing and Verification
 Added in requirements for dwelling-
units HVAC systems from Multifamily
Midrise, included validating air sealing of
ducted heating and cooling systems and
a thermal enclosure inspection
 Clarified requirements for shared and
common area systems, as well as mixed-
use projects
 Updated reference standards used in
fundamental commissioning
Prerequisite Minimum Energy  Updated standard to ASHRAE 90.1-2016

Performance  Allowed projects to comply using
energy cost or GHG emissions
 Permit on-site renewables for
compliance
 Added in requirements from Multifamily
Midrise, including properly sizing
dwelling unit heating and cooling
equipment
 Modified the reference standard in the
prescriptive compliance option to the
New Building Institute’s Multifamily
Guide

Midrise: Dwelling Unit Energy Simulation
Prerequisite Building-Level Energy  Added in the requirement from

Metering Multifamily Midrise that all dwelling units
must have their own electricity meter
Prerequisite Fundamental Refrigerant  None

Management
Prerequisite Enhanced Commissioning  Added new options from Multifamily

Midrise for systems that service only
residential dwelling units
 Updated reference standards and
clarified credit language.
Credit Optimize Energy  Updated standard to ASHRAE 90.1-2016

Performance  Revised point threshold tables.
 Included two metrics for compliance:
energy cost and GHG emissions
 On-site renewables permitted for the
energy cost and GHG emissions metrics
 New off-site renewables permitted for
GHG emissions metric
 Replaced AEDG compliance path with
Guide
Midrise: Dwelling Unity Energy
Simulation
Credit Advanced Energy Metering  Changed name to Whole Building

Energy Monitoring and Reporting
 Modified requirements to reward whole-
building aggregation of energy uses, and
reporting these to USGBC
Credit Demand Response  Changed name to Grid Harmonization

 Added Case 3. Load Flexibility and
Management Strategies (1-2 points)
which is available to all projects.
Credit Renewable Energy  Combined with Green Power and Carbon

Production Offsets
 Allows more types of renewables to
count towards compliance.
Credit Enhanced Refrigerant  None

Management
Credit Green Power and Carbon  Combined with Renewable Energy

Offsets

Credit Efficient Hot Water  New credit from Multifamily Midrise,
Distribution System rewards insulating all hot-water piping
to R-4
MATERIALS & RESOURCES
Prerequisite Storage and Collection of  None

Recyclables
Prerequisite Construction and Demolition  Replaced requirement to approximate

Waste Management Planning diversion amounts per material in plan
with requirement to report expected
diversion rate per material stream.
Credit Building Life-Cycle Impact  No change for Option 1 & Option 2

Reduction  Added two additional pathways from
v2009 building re-use requirements for
Option 3
 Added two additional entry pathways to
existing WBLCA requirements and a
fourth pathway to demonstrate
embodied carbon impact reductions
(Option 4)
Credit Environmentally Preferable  New credit from Multifamily Midrise

Products  Three Building Product Disclosure and
Optimization (BPDO) credits are added
as options in this credit
Building Product Disclosure and Optimization
– Environmental Product Declarations:
 Restructured Option 1: deleted partial
weightings for product contributions
and made all options worth a full point.
 Reduced # of products requirement for
Option 1 (ten from three manufacturers
instead of twenty from five
manufacturers) for BD+C: Core and Shell
and BD+C: Warehouses and Distribution
Centers and made third-party verified
EPDs worth 1.5 products.
 Lowered cost threshold for Option 2
from 50% to 10% by cost and added an
alternate pathway with # of products
requirement.
 Added additional entry pathways for
Option 2 starting with manufacturer
action plan to reduce impacts followed
by several tiers of comparative EPD
analysis with increased impact reduction
requirements accompanied by a
narrative for life cycle optimization.
 Removed the structure and enclosure
limit for Option 2.

– Sourcing of Raw Materials:
 Moved Option 1 in entirety to pilot credit
library to be used as a pilot credit and
transferred Option 1 point to Option 2.
from 25% to 20% by cost (three
manufacturers) for 1 point and added
second cost threshold for 40% by cost
(five manufacturers) for 2 points.
 Split bio-based material pathway for
Option 2 into two- a lower tier valuation
pathway (50% of cost) without SAN
standard requirement and a higher tier
valuation pathway (100% by cost).
 Modified valuation of material re-use
pathway for Option 2 from 100% to
200% of cost.
limit for Option 2.
– Material Ingredients:
 Reduced # of products threshold for
Option 1 (ten products from three
manufacturers instead of twenty
products from five manufacturers) for
BD+C: Core and Shell and Warehouses
and Distribution Centers.
from 25% to 10% by cost and added an
alternate pathway with # of products
requirement.
 Added additional entry pathways for
Option 2 starting with manufacturer
action plan to conduct material hazard
assessments followed by several tiers for
demonstrating material optimization of
products including third party
verification of assessments.
limit for Option 2 and/or Option 3.
 Moved Option 3 supply chain
optimization credit to pilot credit library
to be used as a pilot credit.
Credit Construction and Demolition  Added additional pathways in Option 1

Waste Management towards using certified recycling facility
for both levels of waste diversion
 Lowered waste reduction threshold for
Option 2 from 2.5 lbs/sq ft to 7.5 lbs/sq
ft for all new construction projects
(except Warehouses and Distribution
Centers)

 Clarified that waste generation target
only applies to new construction waste
and that any demolition or renovation
waste must be 75% diverted or more but
does not count against total generated
waste target.
INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality  Updated referenced standards to 62.2-

Performance 2016 for dwelling units and 62.1-2016 for
all other spaces
 Added requirements for dwelling unit
ventilation systems called out in
Multifamily Midrise, including
requirement to install ENERGY STAR
certified fans and sone requirements for
dwelling unit mechanical ventilation
systems
 Added a new natural ventilation option
for projects located in historic buildings.
 Clarified requirements for outdoor air
monitoring.
Prerequisite Combustion Venting  New prerequisite from Multifamily

Midrise
 Moved combustion venting
requirements from Minimum Indoor Air
Quality Performance to this prerequisite
Prerequisite Garage-Pollutant Protection  New prerequisite from Multifamily

Midrise
Prerequisite Radon-Resistant  New prerequisite from Multifamily

Construction Midrise
 Moved radon requirements from
Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance
to this prerequisite
Prerequisite Interior Moisture  New prerequisite from Multifamily

Management Midrise
Prerequisite Environmental Tobacco  Updated definition for smoking.

Smoke Control  Revised requirements for
communicating the no-smoking policy.
 Projects may no longer trade off a
smoking ban for compartmentalization
of dwelling units
Prerequisite Compartmentalization  New prerequisite from Multifamily

Midrise

 Threshold increased from 0.23
CFM50/sq ft enclosure area to 0.30
CFM50/sq ft of enclosure area
Credit Enhanced  New credit from Multifamily Midrise

Credit No Environmental Tobacco  New credit from Multifamily Midrise

Smoke
Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality  Broke credit requirements into 4

Strategies options,
 Option 1. Walk Off Mats has new
requirements for entryway systems
between dwelling units and the exterior
 Option 2. Filtration has new
requirements for dwelling units heating
and cooling systems
 Option 3. Enhanced Local Exhaust is a
new option from Multifamily Midrise
 Option 4. Balanced Whole-Dwelling Unit
Ventilation is a new option from
Multifamily Midrise
Credit Low-Emitting Materials  Restructured credit around product

categories and adjusted thresholds.
 Updated reference standards.
Credit Construction Indoor Air  Removed credit

Quality Management Plan
Credit Indoor Air Quality  Added two tiers to option 2: PM and

Assessment inorganic compounds; VOCs
 Reduced list of individual VOCs to be
included in testing.
 Adjusted concentration limits for
contaminants.
Credit Thermal Comfort  Updated referenced standards.

 Added new option for Radiant Comfort
Credit Interior Lighting  Removed
Credit Daylight  Revised Option 1, ASE is required to be

calculated but removed specific 10%
threshold.
 Revised thresholds and points for
Options 1, 2, and 3.
 Revised Option 1 to require sDA to be
calculated for each individual space in
addition to average sDA for all regularly
occupied floor area.

 Combined with Quality Views
Credit Quality Views  Reduced the amount of qualifying floor

area down from 75% to 50%
 Reduced the number of view features
from two to one
 Combined with Daylight
Credit Acoustic Performance  Updated reference standards

 Broke credit into two options, HVAC
Background Noise and Envelope
Acoustic Performance. Updated
requirements for both options and
focused them on dwelling unit spaces.
 Deleted sound reinforcement and sound
masking requirements.
 Revised reverberation time table
INNOVATION
Credit Innovation  Added reference to the Innovation

Catalog
 Added clarification in Reference Guide
that pilot ACPs may substitute for pilot
credits in requirement for full five points
Credit LEED Accredited  None

Professional
REGIONAL PRIORITY
Credit Regional Priority  None

Appendix II. Summary of changes - Changes from LEED v4 Multifamily Midrise (Homes Design
and Construction)
INTEGRATIVE PROCESS
Credit Integrative Process  Added new option from New

Construction v4.1: Integrative Process
 Removed Option 1: Integrative Project
Team and Option 2: Design Charrette
LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION
Prerequisite Floodplain Avoidance  Removed
Credit LEED for Neighborhood  No substantive changes

Development Location
Credit Site Selection  Option 1. Sensitive Land Protection

moved to a standalone credit. Parkland
removed as required land.
 Removed Option 2. Infill
 Option 3. Open Space moved to SS
Open Space
 Removed Option 4. Street Network
 Option 5. Bicycle Network and Storage
moved to a standalone credit, Bicycle
Facilities
Credit Compact Development  Moved to Surrounding Density and

Diverse Uses
 Kept only the 1 point threshold of 30
dwelling units/acre
Credit Community Resources  Changed name to Surrounding Density

and Diverse Resources
 Added in option for Surrounding Density
from v4.1 New Construction
 Removed the top threshold of 12 uses or
greater
Credit Access to Transit  Changed name to Access to Quality

Transit
 Reduced thresholds for weekend transit
trips.
 Clarified requirements for privately run
shuttles.
 Removed requirements for daily transit
service for projects with commuter rail
or ferry service only

Credit High-Priority Site  New credit from New Construction v4.1
Credit Bicycle Facilities  New credit from v4.1 New Construction

 Allowed on-site bicycle sharing stations
to count for 50% of the long-term and
short-term bicycle storage space for all
projects.
 Reduced long-term storage
requirements from one space per
residential unit to one space per three
dwelling units
 Extended the distance to short-term
storage and long-term storage.
Credit Reduced Parking Footprint  New credit from v4.1 New Construction
Credit Green Vehicles  New credit from v4.1 New Construction
SUSTAINABLE SITES
Prerequisite Construction Activity  Required construction activity air

Pollution Prevention pollution rules only for projects in
locations that have local rules on this
topic
Prerequisite No Invasive Plants  Removed
Credit Heat Island Reduction  Clarified credit language.

 Added new scoring approach taken
from v4.1 New Construction
Credit Rainwater Management  Reduced thresholds starting at 80th

percentile instead of 95th
 Added new compliance path for zero lot
line projects at 70th percentile
Credit Non-Toxic Pest Control  Removed
Credit Site Assessment  New credit from v4.1 New Construction
Credit Protect or Restore Habitat  New credit from v4.1 New Construction
Credit Open Space  New credit from v4.1 New Construction
Credit Light Pollution Reduction  New credit from v4.1 New Construction
WATER EFFICIENCY
Prerequisite Water Use Reduction  New prerequisite, which replaces the

point floor. Requires projects to
demonstrate the equivalence of 20%
water reduction from the baseline

Prerequisite Building-Level Water  Changed perquisite name to Building-
Metering Level Water Metering.
 Clarified reporting requirements
Credit Total Water Use Reduction  Changed name to Water Use Reduction
Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction  Moved to be an option within Water Use
Reduction
 Removed the credit for 1.0 gpm faucets
 Added in new credit for installing 2.0
gpm showerheads; removed credit for
installing 1.5 gpm showerheads
 Added in new credit for installing 1.28
gpf toilets
 Water pressure testing was removed.
 Water leak testing was moved to EQ p
Interior Moisture Management
Credit Outdoor Water Use  Moved to be an option within Water Use

Reduction Reduction
 Requirement for minimizing turf grass
area was removed
Credit Water Metering  New credit, taken in part from v4.1 New
Construction
ENERGY & ATMOSPHERE
Prerequisite Fundamental Systems  New prerequisite, taken in part from v4.1

Testing and Verification New Construction prerequisite
Fundamental Commissioning and
Verification and Multifamily Midrise
prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance
Prerequisite Minimum Energy  Commissioning requirements moved to

Performance EA p Fundamental Systems Testing and
Verification
 Updated standard to ASHRAE 90.1-2016
 Allowed projects to comply using
energy cost or GHG emissions
 Permit on-site renewables for
compliance
 Clarified requirements for properly sizing
dwelling unit heating and cooling
equipment
 Added in new prescriptive compliance
option using the New Building Institute’s
Multifamily Guide
Prerequisite Energy Metering  None
Prerequisite Fundamental Refrigerant  New prerequisite from v4.1 New

Management Construction

Prerequisite Education of the  Removed
Homeowner, Tenant or
Building Manager
Credit Enhanced Commissioning  New prerequisite, taken in part from v4.1

New Construction Updated reference
standards and clarified credit language.
 Options for testing dwelling-unit heating
and cooling systems taken from EQ c
Balancing of Heating and Cooling
Systems
Credit Annual Energy Use  Changed name to Optimize Energy

Performance
 Revised point threshold tables
 Removed the Home Size Adjuster
 Updated standard to ASHRAE 90.1-2016
 Included two metrics for 90.1
compliance: energy cost and GHG
emissions
 On-site renewables permitted for the
energy cost and GHG emissions metrics
 New off-site renewables permitted for
GHG emissions metric
 Replaced AEDG compliance path with
Guide
Credit Efficient Hot Water  Efficient hot water distribution and

Distribution System performance test options removed
Credit Advanced Utility Tracking  Changed name to Whole Building

Energy Monitoring and Reporting
 Modified requirements to reward whole-
building aggregation of energy uses, and
reporting these to USGBC
Credit Grid Harmonization  New credit from v4.1 New Construction
Credit Renewable Energy  New credit from v4.1 New Construction
Credit Enhanced Refrigerant  New credit from v4.1 New Construction

Management
MATERIALS & RESOURCES
Prerequisite Certified Tropical Wood  Removed
Prerequisite Durability Management  Moved to EQ p Interior Moisture

Management
 Added in new compliance option for
clothes washers to install a braided
washer hose

Prerequisite Storage and Collection of  New prerequisite taken from New
Recyclables Construction v4.1
Prerequisite Construction and Demolition  New prerequisite taken from New

Waste Management Planning Construction v4.1
Credit Durability Management  Removed

Verification
Credit Environmentally Preferable  Threshold for compliance lowered from

Products 90% per component to 70% per
component
 Flooring – Base Floor only removed as 2
point option
 Framing/Sheathing combined; clarified
it’s for all structural systems
 “Additional components” classification
removed. Projects can now receive a full
point for installing compliant products
for any of the following components:
doors, cabinets, counters, interior trim,
windows, decking or patio material.
 Three BPDO credits from New
Construction v4.1 have been added as
options in this credit
Credit Construction and Demolition  Lowered waste reduction threshold from

Waste Management 4.2 lbs/sq ft to 7.5 lbs/sq ft for all new
construction projects.
 Removed the 25% benefit for recycling
to the reduction calculation, and
removed using the LEED Reference
Home for calculating the baseline waste
for the project
 Added additional options rewarding
diverting construction and demolition
waste, taken from v4.1 New Construction
Credit Building Life-Cycle Impact  New credit from v4.1 New Construction
Reduction
INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
Prerequisite Ventilation  Changed prerequisite name to Minimum

Indoor Air Quality Performance
 Updated referenced standards to 62.2-
2016 for dwelling units and 62.1-2016 for
all other spaces.
 Clarified the relevant sections of 62.2-
2016 that projects must follow
 Added requirement to monitor any
outdoor air for systems that are 1000
cfm or larger

Prerequisite Combustion Venting  Removed the requirement to perform
depressurization testing
Prerequisite Garage-Pollutant Protection  Added allowances for when ducts are

allowed to be run through a garage
Prerequisite Radon-Resistant  Updated standards

Construction
Prerequisite Air Filtering  Moved to Minimum Indoor Air Quality

Performance
Prerequisite Environmental Tobacco  Updated definition for smoking.

Smoke Control  Revised requirements for
communicating the no-smoking policy.
Prerequisite Compartmentalization  Threshold increased from 0.23

CFM50/sq ft enclosure area to 0.30
 Threshold increased to 0.50 CFM50/sq
ft of enclosure area for renovation
projects that maintain their existing
envelope
Prerequisite Interior Moisture  New prerequisite moved from MRp

Management Durability Management
Credit Enhanced Ventilation  Combined with Contaminant Control to

form a new credit, Enhanced Indoor Air
Quality Strategies
Credit Contaminant Control  Option 1: Walk Off Mats moved to

Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies
 Removed Option 2: Shoe Removal and
Storage
 Option 3: Preoccupancy Flush and
Option 4: Air Testing moved to Indoor
Air Quality Assessment
Credit Balancing of Heating and  Option 1: Multiple Zones removed

Cooling Distribution Systems  Option 2: Supply Air-Flow testing moved
to EAc Enhanced Commissioning.
 Supply air testing no longer measures
room by room air-flow rates, instead the
HVAC fan air-flow is to be measured and
compared against the installer measured
air-flow or the design air-flow
 Option 3: Pressure Balancing moved to
EAc Enhanced Commissioning
Credit Enhanced  Threshold increased from 0.15

Compartmentalization CFM50/sq ft enclosure area to 0.23

 Threshold increased to 0.30 CFM50/sq
ft of enclosure area for renovation
projects that maintain their existing
envelope
Credit Enhanced Combustion  Removed

Venting
Credit Enhanced Garage Pollutant  Removed

Protection
Credit Low-Emitting Products  Changed name to Low-Emitting

Materials
 Restructured credit around product
categories and adjusted thresholds.
 Updated reference standards.
Credit No Environmental Tobacco  None

Smoke
Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality  New credit taken in part from v4.1 New
Strategies Construction and Multifamily Midrise
 Option 1. Walk Off Mats is taken from
Contaminant Control
 Option 2. Filtration has new
requirements for dwelling units heating
and cooling systems
 Option 3. Enhanced Local Exhaust is
taken from Enhanced Ventilation
 Option 4. Balanced Whole-Dwelling Unit
Ventilation is taken from Enhanced
Ventilation
Credit Indoor Air Quality  New credit, taken in part from

Assessment Contaminant Control and v4.1 New
Construction
 Modified definition of a preoccupancy
flush
 Added two tiers to option 2: PM and
inorganic compounds; VOCs
 Reduced list of individual VOCs to be
included in testing.
 Adjusted concentration limits for
contaminants.
Credit Thermal Comfort  New credit taken in part from v4.1 New
Construction
Credit Daylight and Quality Views  New credit taken in part from v4.1 New
Construction

Credit Acoustic Performance  New credit taken in part from v4.1 New
Construction
INNOVATION
Credit Innovation  Added reference to the Innovation

Catalog
 Added clarification in Reference Guide
that pilot ACPs may substitute for pilot
credits in requirement for full five points
Credit LEED Accredited  None

Professional
REGIONAL PRIORITY
Credit Regional Priority  None
Summary of point changes for each category from LEED v4 BD+C: Multifamily Midrise to LEED v4.1
Residential: Multifamily:
Integrative Process reduced 2 pts to 1 pt
Location and Transportation: unchanged 15 pts
Sustainable Sites: increased 7 pts to 10 pts
Water Efficiency: unchanged 12 pts
Energy and Atmosphere: reduced 37 pts to 34 pts
Materials and Resources: increased 9 pts to 13 pts
Indoor Environmental Quality: reduced 18 pts to 26 pts
Innovation: unchanged 6 pts
Regional Priority: unchanged 4 pts

Appendix IV. Multifamily Core and Shell
LEED v4.1 Residential: Multifamily and Multifamily Core and Shell Development Scorecards
Multifamily
Core and
Multifamily Shell
INTEGRATIVE PROCESS 1 2
Credit Integrative Process 1 2
Option 1. Installation Contractor Training 1 1
LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION 15 20
LEED for Neighborhood Development
Credit Location 15 20
Credit Sensitive Land Protection 2 2
Option 1. Previously Developed Land 2 2
Option 2. Avoidance of Sensitive Land 1 2
Credit High-Priority Site 1 2
Option 1. Historic District 1 2
Option 2. Priority Designation 1 2
Option 3. Brownfield Remediation 1 2
Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses 5 7
Option 1. Surrounding Density 3 4
Option 2. Diverse Uses 2 3
Credit Access to Quality Transit 3 5
Credit Bicycle Facilities 1 1
Credit Reduced Parking Footprint 1 1
Option 1. No Off-Street Parking 1 1
Option 2. Reduce Parking 1 1
Option 3. Carshare 1 1
Option 4. Unbundling Parking 1 1
Credit Electric Vehicles 2 2
Option 1. Electric Vehicle Charging 1 1
Option 2. Electric Vehicle Charging
Infrastructure 1 1
SUSTAINABLE SITES 10 12
Prerequisite Construction Activity Pollution Prevention P P
Credit Site Assessment 1 1
Credit Protect or Restore Habitat 1 1
Option 1. On-Site Restoration 1 1
Option 2. Financial Support 1 1
Credit Open Space 1 1
Option 1. Onsite Open Space 1 1
Option 2. Access to Open Space 1 1
Credit Rainwater Management 3 4

Option 1. Percentile of Rainfall Events 3 4
Option 2. Permeable Lot Area 3 4
Credit Heat Island Reduction 2 2
Credit Light Pollution Reduction 1 1
Option 1. Bug Rating Method 1 1
Option 2. Calculation Method 1 1
Tenant Design and Construction
Credit Guidelines 1
WATER EFFICIENCY 12 12
Prerequisite Water Use Reduction P P
Prerequisite Building-Level Water Metering P P
Credit Water Use Reduction 10 10
Option 1. Total Water Use Reduction 10 10
Option 2. Outdoor and Indoor Water Use
Reduction 9 9
Credit Water Metering 2 2
Option 1. Meter Water Subsystems 1 1
Option 2. Meter Dwelling Units 1 1
ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE 34 27
Fundamental Systems Testing and
Prerequisite Verification P P
Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance P P
Option 4. Energy Performance Compliance –

India ACP
Prerequisite Energy Metering P P
Prerequisite Fundamental Refrigerant Management P P
Credit Enhanced Commissioning 6 2
Option 1. Supply Air-Flow Testing 1
Option 2. Pressure Balancing 1
Option 3. Enhanced Commissioning 3
Option 4. Enhanced and Monitoring-Based
Commissioning 4
Option 5. Envelope Commissioning 2 2
Credit Optimize Energy Performance 18 18
Option 1. Energy Performance Compliance 18 18
Option 2. Dwelling Unit Energy Simulation 18 18
Option 4. Energy Performance Compliance –

India ACP 18 18
Whole Building Energy Monitoring and
Credit Reporting 1 1
Credit Grid Harmonization 2 1
Credit Renewable Energy 5 5
Credit Enhanced Refrigerant Management 1

Option 1. No Refrigerants or Low-Impact
Refrigerants 1
Option2. Calculation of Refrigerant Impact 1
Credit Domestic Hot Water Pipe Insulation 1
MATERIALS AND RESOURCES 13 15
Prerequisite Storage and Collection of Recyclables P P
Construction and Demolition Waste
Prerequisite Management Planning P P
Credit Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction 5 7
Option 1. Historic Building Reuse 5 7
Option 2. Renovation of Abandoned or
Blighted Building 5 7
Option 3. Building and Material Reuse 4 6
Option 4. Whole-Building Life-Cycle
Assessment 4 4
Credit Environmentally Preferable Products 6 6
Option 1. Environmentally Preferable
Products 6 6
Option 2. BPDO - Environmental Product
Declarations 2 2
Option 3. BPDO – Sourcing of Raw Materials 2 2
Option 4. BPDO – Material Ingredients 2 2
Construction and Demolition Waste
Credit Management 2 2
Option 1. Diversion 2 2
Option 2. Reduction of Total (Construction
and Demolition) Waste Material 2 2
INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY 16 13
Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance P P
Prerequisite Combustion Venting P P
Prerequisite Garage Pollutant Protection P P
Prerequisite Radon-Resistant Construction P P
Prerequisite Interior Moisture Management P P
Prerequisite Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control P P
Prerequisite Compartmentalization P P
Credit Enhanced Compartmentalization 1 1
Credit No Environmental Tobacco Smoke 1 1
Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies 4 4
Option 1. Walk-Off Mats 1 1
Option 2. Filtration 1 1
Option 3. Enhanced Local Exhaust 1 1
Option 4. Balanced Whole-Dwelling Unit
Ventilation 2 2
Option 5. Air Quality Benchmarking – India
ACP 1 1
Option 6. Permanent Air Quality Monitoring
System and Comparison – India ACP 1 1
Option 7. Air Quality Management – India
ACP 2 2
Option 8. Real Time Information – India ACP 1 1

Credit Low-Emitting Materials 4 4
Credit Indoor Air Quality Assessment 2
Option 1 1
Option 2 1
Credit Thermal Comfort 1 1
Option 1. Radiant Comfort 1 1
Option 2. ASHRAE Standard 55-2017 1 1
Option 3.ISO Standards 1 1
Credit Daylight and Quality Views 1 1
Option 1. Daylight 1 1
Option 2. Quality Views 1 1
Credit Acoustic Performance 2 1
Option 1. HVAC Background Noise 1 1
Option 2. Envelope Acoustic Performance 1 1
INNOVATION 6 6
Credit Innovation 5 5
Option 1. Innovation 1 1
Option 2. Pilot 1 1
Option 3. Additional Strategies 3 3
Credit LEED Accredited Professional 1 1
REGIONAL PRIORITY 4 4
Credit Regional Priority 4 4
TOTAL POINTS 110 POSSIBLE POINTS
Refer to the following page for credit requirements and guidance for SSc Tenant Design and
Construction Guidelines, the only credit that is unique to Multifamily Core and Shell.

SS Credit: Tenant Design and Construction
Guidelines
 Residential: Multifamily Core and Shell (1 point)
Intent
To educate tenants in implementing sustainable design and construction features in their tenant
improvement build-outs.
Requirements
CS
Publish for tenants an illustrated document with the following content, as applicable:
 a description of the sustainable design and construction features incorporated in the core and
shell project and the project’s sustainability goals and objectives, including those for tenant
spaces;
 general information on efficient use of energy, water, and natural resources;
 information on local green power options;
 guidance on occupants’ activities and choices, including cleaning materials and methods, water-
efficient landscaping, integrated pest management, effects of chemical fertilizers and pesticides,
irrigation, lighting selection, and appliance selection;
 guidelines on the preferences and specification for space conditioning equipment and other
electrical appliances to be installed by occupants for maintaining the desired efficiency level.
 product manufacturers’ manuals for all installed equipment, fixtures, and appliances;
 information that enables a tenant to coordinate space design and construction with the building
systems when pursuing the following LEED v4 for Interior Design and Construction
prerequisites and credits:
o WE Prerequisite: Indoor Water Use Reduction
o WE Credit: Indoor Water Use Reduction
o EA Prerequisite: Minimum Energy Performance
o EA Prerequisite: Fundamental Refrigerant Management
o EA Credit: Optimize Energy Performance
o EA Credits: Advanced Energy Metering
o EA Credit: Renewable Energy
o EA Credit: Enhanced Refrigerant Management
o MR Prerequisite: Storage and Collection of Recyclables
o EQ Prerequisite: Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance
o EQ Prerequisite: Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control
o EQ Credit: Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies
o EQ Credit: Low-Emitting Materials
o EQ Credit: Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan
o EQ Credit: Indoor Air Quality Assessment
o EQ Credit: Thermal Comfort
o EQ Credit: Acoustic Performance
o WE Credit: Total Water Use
o MR Prerequisite: Storage and Collection of Recyclables
o MR Credit: Environmentally Preferable Products

o EQ Prerequisite: Minimum Indoor Air Quality
o EQ Credit: Low-Emitting Products
o EQ Credit: Microclimate Management / Outdoor air quality :
Strategies for mitigation
 operations and maintenance guidance for any installed equipment, including water and energy
meter, hot water distribution system, space heating and cooling, mechanical ventilation,
humidity control, radon protection, renewable energy, outdoor air quality management and
irrigation, rainwater harvesting, or graywater systems (following 2009 EPA WaterSense Single-
Family New Home Specifications, item 5.0, Homeowner Education);
 information on sharing utility data with USGBC via a USGBC-approved third party.
Provide the guidelines to all tenants before signing the lease.
Guidance
There are no substantive changes to the credit requirements; refer to the LEED v4 Homes Design and
Construction (Multifamily Midrise) reference guide, with the following addition:
Further Explanation
Campus
Group Approach
Campus Approach
Ineligible.

 LEED O+M EA credit Energy Performance and WE credit Water Performance: Core and shell
projects that require tenants to demonstrate a specified percentage reduction in energy and
water use can include the assumed tenant reduction in the core and shell energy and water
models. Such requirements must be incorporated into the tenant lease and can be accurately
measured by installing whole building energy and water meters. It is a simple yet critical
strategy for understanding total energy and water use of tenants throughout the building life
cycle. Tracking energy use and water consumption on a regular basis supports effective
building management and provides data to help verify that building systems are operating as
designed.

LEED v4.1 Residential BD C Multifamily Homes Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LEED v4.1 Residential BD C Multifamily Homes Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LEED v4.1 Residential BD C Multifamily Homes Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LEED v4.

WELCOME TO LEED V4.1 ................................................................................................................................................................ 5

LEED V4.1 RESIDENTIAL: MULTIFAMILY SCORECARD .....................................................................................................9

WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW ....................................................................................................................................................... 11

IP CREDIT: INTEGRATIVE PROCESS ........................................................................................................................................ 17

LT CREDIT: LEED FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT LOCATION .................................................................. 22

LT CREDIT: SENSITIVE LAND PROTECTION ....................................................................................................................... 24

LT CREDIT: HIGH-PRIORITY SITE.............................................................................................................................................. 27

LT CREDIT: SURROUNDING DENSITY AND DIVERSE USES......................................................................................... 29

LT CREDIT: ACCESS TO QUALITY TRANSIT ....................................................................................................................... 32

LT CREDIT: BICYCLE FACILITIES .............................................................................................................................................. 35

LT CREDIT: REDUCED PARKING FOOTPRINT .................................................................................................................... 38

LT CREDIT: ELECTRIC VEHICLES .............................................................................................................................................. 41

SS PREREQUISITE: CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY POLLUTION PREVENTION ........................................................ 44

SS CREDIT: SITE ASSESSMENT ................................................................................................................................................. 46

SS CREDIT: OPEN SPACE ............................................................................................................................................................. 53

SS CREDIT: RAINWATER MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................................................. 55

SS CREDIT: HEAT ISLAND REDUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 59

SS CREDIT: LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION ...................................................................................................................... 62

WE PREREQUISITE: WATER USE REDUCTION .................................................................................................................. 66

WE PREREQUISITE: BUILDING-LEVEL WATER METERING ......................................................................................... 69

WE CREDIT: WATER USE REDUCTION.................................................................................................................................. 70

WE CREDIT: WATER METERING ............................................................................................................................................... 75

EA PREREQUISITE: FUNDAMENTAL SYSTEMS TESTING AND VERIFICATION .................................................. 77

EA PREREQUISITE: MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE............................................................................................... 87

EA PREREQUISITE: ENERGY METERING ............................................................................................................................. 108

EA PREREQUISITE: FUNDAMENTAL REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT .................................................................... 110

EA CREDIT: ENHANCED COMMISSIONING .......................................................................................................................... 112

EA CREDIT: OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE .............................................................................................................119

EA CREDIT: WHOLE BUILDING ENERGY MONITORING AND REPORTING ......................................................... 127

3 U.S. Green Building Council

EA CREDIT: RENEWABLE ENERGY ....................................................................................................................................... 134

EA CREDIT: ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT .............................................................................................142

EA CREDIT: DOMESTIC HOT WATER PIPE INSULATION ............................................................................................ 145

MR PREREQUISITE: STORAGE AND COLLECTION OF RECYCLABLES .................................................................147

MR PREREQUISITE: CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLANNING ................ 148

MR CREDIT: BUILDING LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION ........................................................................................... 151

MR CREDIT: ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS ...................................................................................158

MR CREDIT: CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT ........................................................ 180

EQ PREREQUISITE: MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE ................................................................185

EQ PREREQUISITE: COMBUSTION VENTING .....................................................................................................................188

EQ PREREQUISITE: GARAGE POLLUTANT PROTECTION .......................................................................................... 190

EQ PREREQUISITE: RADON-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION.........................................................................................192

EQ PREREQUISITE: INTERIOR MOISTURE MANAGEMENT ..........................................................................................195

EQ PREREQUISITE: ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE CONTROL ................................................................. 198

EQ PREREQUISITE: COMPARTMENTALIZATION ........................................................................................................... 200

4 U.S. Green Building Council

EQ CREDIT: NO ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE .............................................................................................. 205

EQ CREDIT: ENHANCED INDOOR AIR QUALITY STRATEGIES ............................................................................... 207

EQ CREDIT: LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS........................................................................................................................... 210

EQ CREDIT: INDOOR AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT ......................................................................................................... 215

EQ CREDIT: THERMAL COMFORT...........................................................................................................................................219

EQ CREDIT: DAYLIGHT AND QUALITY VIEWS ................................................................................................................ 223

EQ CREDIT: ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................................................ 227

IN CREDIT: INNOVATION............................................................................................................................................................. 231

IN CREDIT: LEED ACCREDITED PROFESSIONAL............................................................................................................ 233

RP CREDIT: REGIONAL PRIORITY ......................................................................................................................................... 234

APPENDICES .................................................................................................................................................................................... 235

SS CREDIT: TENANT DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES ........................................................................256